AIR-COOLED SCROLL CHILLER

INSTALLATION, OPERATION, MAINTENANCE

Replaces 150.72-NM1 (0110) Form 150.72-NM2 (811)
Supersedes 150.72-NM2 (309)
035-21911-100

YLAA0070 - YLAA0175
AIR-COOLED SCROLL CHILLERS
WITH MICROCHANNEL AND ROUND TUBE CONDENSER COILS
STYLE A, B, AND C (60 HZ)
70 - 175 TON
246-613 KW

GS560418

R-410A

Issue Date: Products are produced at a

facility whose quality-
management systems are
August 15, 2011 ISO9001 certified.
 FORM 150.72-NM2 (811)

ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011

IMPORTANT!
READ BEFORE PROCEEDING!
GENERAL SAFETY GUIDELINES

This equipment is a relatively complicated apparatus. erty in which it is situated, as well as severe personal
During installation, operation, maintenance or service, injury or death to themselves and people at the site.
individuals may be exposed to certain components or
conditions including, but not limited to: refrigerants, This document is intended for use by owner-authorized
oils, materials under pressure, rotating components, operating/service personnel. It is expected that this in-
and both high and low voltage. Each of these items dividual possesses independent training that will en-
has the potential, if misused or handled improperly, to able them to perform their assigned tasks properly and
cause bodily injury or death. It is the obligation and re- safely. It is essential that, prior to performing any task
sponsibility of operating/service personnel to identify on this equipment, this individual shall have read and
and recognize these inherent hazards, protect them- understood this document and any referenced mate-
selves, and proceed safely in completing their tasks. rials. This individual shall also be familiar with and
Failure to comply with any of these requirements could comply with all applicable governmental standards and
result in serious damage to the equipment and the prop- regulations pertaining to the task in question.

SAFETY SYMBOLS
The following symbols are used in this document to alert the reader to areas of potential hazard:

DANGER indicates an imminently haz- CAUTION identifies a hazard which

ardous situation which, if not avoided, could lead to damage to the machine,
will result in death or serious injury. damage to other equipment and/or envi-
ronmental pollution. Usually an instruc-
tion will be given, together with a brief
explanation.

WARNING indicates a potentially haz- NOTE is used to highlight additional

ardous situation which, if not avoided, information which may be helpful to you.
could result in death or serious injury.

External wiring, unless specified as an optional connection in the manufacturer’s product line, is
NOT to be connected inside the micro panel cabinet. Devices such as relays, switches, transducers
and controls may NOT be installed inside the panel. NO external wiring is allowed to be run through
the micro panel. All wiring must be in accordance with Johnson Controls published specifications
and must be performed ONLY by qualified Johnson Controls personnel. Johnson Controls will not
be responsible for damages/problems resulting from improper connections to the controls or appli-
cation of improper control signals. Failure to follow this will void the manufacturer’s warranty and
cause serious damage to property or injury to persons.

2 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.72-NM2 (811)

ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011

CHANGEABILITY OF THIS DOCUMENT

In complying with Johnson Controls policy for contin- It is the responsibility of operating/service personnel
uous product improvement, the information contained to verify the applicability of these documents to the
in this document is subject to change without notice. equipment in question. If there is any question in the
While Johnson Controls makes no commitment to up- mind of operating/service personnel as to the applica-
date or provide current information automatically to bility of these documents, then prior to working on the
the manual owner, that information, if applicable, can equipment, they should verify with the owner whether
be obtained by contacting the nearest Johnson Controls the equipment has been modified and if current litera-
Service office. ture is available.

ASSOCIATED LITERATURE
Manual Description Form Number
Start-Up Checklist - YLAA0070-0175 Style A and B, 60 Hz 150.72-CL1
Renewal Parts - YLAA0070-YLAA0155 Styles “A” and “B” 60 Hz 150.72-RP1
Wiring Diagrams - YLAA0070-0175 Styles “A”, “B” and “C” 60 Hz 150.72-W1
Limited Warranty Engineered Systems Equipment 50.05-NM2

JOHNSON CONTROLS 3
 FORM 150.72-NM2 (811)

ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

4 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.72-NM2 (811)

ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011

TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION 1 – GENERAL CHILLER INFORMATION AND SAFETY........................................................................13
INTRODUCTION............................................................................................................................................. 13
WARRANTY.................................................................................................................................................... 13
SAFETY AND QUALITY.................................................................................................................................. 13
Standards for Safety and Quality........................................................................................................... 13
Responsibility for Safety......................................................................................................................... 14
ABOUT THIS MANUAL................................................................................................................................... 14
MISUSE OF EQUIPMENT.............................................................................................................................. 14
Suitability for Application........................................................................................................................14
Structural Support..................................................................................................................................14
Mechanical Strength ..............................................................................................................................14
General Access......................................................................................................................................14
Pressure Systems..................................................................................................................................14
Electrical.................................................................................................................................................15
Rotating Parts.........................................................................................................................................15
Sharp Edges...........................................................................................................................................15
Refrigerants and Oils..............................................................................................................................15
High Temperature and Pressure Cleaning............................................................................................. 15
Emergency Shutdown............................................................................................................................15
SECTION 2 – PRODUCT DESCRIPTION...............................................................................................................17
INTRODUCTION............................................................................................................................................. 17
GENERAL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION.............................................................................................................. 17
Compressors..........................................................................................................................................17
Cooler (Evaporator)................................................................................................................................17
Condenser..............................................................................................................................................18
Coils................................................................................................................................................18
Fans................................................................................................................................................18
Motors.............................................................................................................................................18
Millenium Control Center........................................................................................................................ 18
Display/Print....................................................................................................................................18
Entry................................................................................................................................................18
Setpoints.........................................................................................................................................18
Unit..................................................................................................................................................18
Unit On/Off......................................................................................................................................18
COMMUNICATIONS....................................................................................................................................... 19
HIGH AMBIENT KIT........................................................................................................................................ 19
BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM INTERFACE.......................................................................................... 19
POWER PANEL.............................................................................................................................................. 19
ACCESSORIES AND OPTIONS..................................................................................................................... 19
Power Options........................................................................................................................................19
Compressor Power Connections....................................................................................................19
Control Transformer........................................................................................................................20
Control Options......................................................................................................................................20
Ambient Kit (Low)............................................................................................................................20
Ambient Kit (High)...........................................................................................................................20
Language LCD and Keypad Display...............................................................................................20
Compressor, Piping, Evaporator Options:.............................................................................................. 20
Low Temperature Brine...................................................................................................................20
Chicago Code Relief Valves...........................................................................................................20
Service Suction Isolation Valve.......................................................................................................20
Hot Gas By-Pass............................................................................................................................20
Flanges (ANSI/AWWA C-606 couplings Type)...............................................................................20
Flow Switch.....................................................................................................................................20

JOHNSON CONTROLS 5
 FORM 150.72-NM2 (811)

ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011

TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONT’D)

Differential Pressure Switch............................................................................................................21
Hydro-Kit.........................................................................................................................................21
Condenser and Cabinet Options............................................................................................................ 21
Pre-Coated Fin Condenser Coils....................................................................................................21
Post-Coated Dipped Condenser Coils............................................................................................21
Copper Fin Condenser Coils...........................................................................................................21
Enclosure Panels (Unit)..................................................................................................................21
Coil End Hail Guard........................................................................................................................21
Sound Attenuation...........................................................................................................................21
Vibration Isolators...........................................................................................................................21
SECTION 3 – HANDLING AND STORAGE.............................................................................................................35
DELIVERY AND STORAGE............................................................................................................................ 35
INSPECTION.................................................................................................................................................. 35
MOVING THE CHILLER................................................................................................................................. 35
Lifting Weights........................................................................................................................................35
Rigging Instructions ...............................................................................................................................36
SECTION 4 – INSTALLATION.................................................................................................................................37
INSTALLATION CHECKLIST.......................................................................................................................... 37
HANDLING...................................................................................................................................................... 37
INSPECTION.................................................................................................................................................. 37
LOCATION AND CLEARANCES.................................................................................................................... 37
Foundation.............................................................................................................................................37
Ground Level Locations.........................................................................................................................37
Rooftop Locations..................................................................................................................................37
Noise Sensitive Locations...................................................................................................................... 38
SPRING ISOLATORS (OPTIONAL)................................................................................................................ 38
COMPRESSOR MOUNTING.......................................................................................................................... 38
REMOTE COOLER OPTION.......................................................................................................................... 38
CHILLED LIQUID PIPING............................................................................................................................... 38
PIPEWORK ARRANGEMENT........................................................................................................................ 39
General Requirements ..........................................................................................................................39
WIRING........................................................................................................................................................... 39
Evaporator Pump Start Contacts............................................................................................................ 40
System Run Contacts.............................................................................................................................40
Alarm Status Contacts............................................................................................................................40
Remote Start/Stop Contacts................................................................................................................... 40
Remote Emergency Cutoff..................................................................................................................... 40
Remote Temp Reset Input...................................................................................................................... 40
Load Limit Input......................................................................................................................................40
Flow Switch Input...................................................................................................................................40
COMPRESSOR HEATERS............................................................................................................................. 41
RELIEF VALVES............................................................................................................................................. 41
HIGH PRESSURE CUTOUT........................................................................................................................... 41
SINGLE-POINT SUPPLY CONNECTION – TERMINAL BLOCK, NON-FUSED
DISCONNECT SWITCH OR CIRCUIT BREAKER......................................................................................... 42
USER CONTROL WIRING INPUTS............................................................................................................... 43
USER CONTROL WIRING OUTPUTS........................................................................................................... 44
SECTION 5 – TECHNICAL DATA............................................................................................................................45
OPERATIONAL LIMITATIONS (ENGLISH)..................................................................................................... 45
Voltage Limitations.................................................................................................................................45
HEAT EXCHANGER FLOW, GPM.................................................................................................................. 46

6 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.72-NM2 (811)

ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011

TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONT’D)

PHYSICAL DATA (ENGLISH).......................................................................................................................... 48
ELECTRICAL DATA........................................................................................................................................ 50
ELECTRICAL NOTES..................................................................................................................................... 51
ELECTRICAL NOTES AND LEGEND............................................................................................................. 66
WIRING DIAGRAMS....................................................................................................................................... 70
Elementary Wiring Diagrams.................................................................................................................. 70
Condenser Fan Mapping and Sequencing............................................................................................. 74
Compressor Wiring.................................................................................................................................76
Power Options Connection Diagram...................................................................................................... 78
Power Panel...........................................................................................................................................80
Fan Wiring..............................................................................................................................................82
Micro Panel Connections....................................................................................................................... 90
Single and Dual Point Wiring Options.................................................................................................... 92
Pump Wiring...........................................................................................................................................93
DIMENSIONS (ENGLISH).............................................................................................................................. 94
WEIGHT DISTRIBUTION AND ISOLATOR MOUNTING POSITIONS........................................................... 99
General...................................................................................................................................................99
Sample Isolator Location Drawings........................................................................................................ 99
CLEARANCES.............................................................................................................................................. 101
ISOLATOR LOCATIONS............................................................................................................................... 102
ISOLATOR INFORMATION
For Units Shipped On Or After June 15, 2008............................................................................................... 105
One Inch Deflection Spring Isolator Cross-reference........................................................................... 105
One Inch Deflection Spring Isolators Installation Instructions.............................................................. 106
Seismic Isolator Cross-reference......................................................................................................... 107
Seismic Isolator Installation and Adjustment........................................................................................ 108
Duralene Isolator Cross-reference....................................................................................................... 109
Installation of Durulene Vibration Isolators........................................................................................... 110
ISOLATOR INFORMATION
For units shipped before June 15, 2008........................................................................................................ 111
One Inch Deflection Spring Isolator Cross Reference.......................................................................... 111
Installation of 1” Deflection Mounts...................................................................................................... 112
Neoprene Isolator Cross-reference...................................................................................................... 113
Two Inch Deflection, Seismic Spring Isolator
Cross-reference - SLRS....................................................................................................................... 114
SLRS Seismic Isolator Installation and Adjustment.............................................................................. 115
SECTION 6 – COMMISSIONING........................................................................................................................... 117
PREPARATION – POWER OFF................................................................................................................... 117
Inspection ............................................................................................................................................ 117
Refrigerant Charge............................................................................................................................... 117
Service and Oil Line Valves.................................................................................................................. 117
Compressor Oil.................................................................................................................................... 117
Fans .................................................................................................................................................... 117
Isolation / Protection............................................................................................................................. 117
Control Panel........................................................................................................................................ 117
Power Connections.............................................................................................................................. 117
Grounding............................................................................................................................................. 117
Supply Voltage..................................................................................................................................... 118
PREPARATION – POWER ON..................................................................................................................... 118
Switch Settings..................................................................................................................................... 118
Compressor Heaters............................................................................................................................ 118

JOHNSON CONTROLS 7
 FORM 150.72-NM2 (811)

ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011

TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONT’D)

Water System....................................................................................................................................... 118
Flow Switch.......................................................................................................................................... 118
Temperature Sensor(s)......................................................................................................................... 118
EQUIPMENT PRE-STARTUP AND STARTUP CHECKLIST........................................................................ 119
Pre Startup........................................................................................................................................... 119
Unit Checks (No Power)............................................................................................................... 119
Compressor Heaters (Power On – 24 Hours Prior To Start)......................................................... 119
Startup ................................................................................................................................................. 119
Panel Checks (Power On – Both Unit Switch Off)........................................................................ 119
Checking Superheat And Subcooling................................................................................................... 121
Leak Checking......................................................................................................................................121
Unit Operating Sequence..................................................................................................................... 121
SECTION 7 – UNIT CONTROLS...........................................................................................................................123
INTRODUCTION........................................................................................................................................... 123
IPU II AND I/O BOARDS............................................................................................................................... 123
TRANSFORMER .......................................................................................................................................... 124
DISPLAY........................................................................................................................................................ 124
KEYPAD........................................................................................................................................................ 124
UNIT SWITCH............................................................................................................................................... 124
BATTERY BACK-UP..................................................................................................................................... 124
PROGRAMMING # OF COMPRESSORS.................................................................................................... 124
STATUS KEY................................................................................................................................................. 125
Unit Status............................................................................................................................................125
General Status Messages.................................................................................................................... 125
Fault Safety Status Messages.............................................................................................................. 127
System Safeties............................................................................................................................127
Unit Safeties..................................................................................................................................128
Unit Warning.........................................................................................................................................129
DISPLAY/PRINT KEYS................................................................................................................................. 131
Oper Data Key......................................................................................................................................131
Oper Data Quick Reference List.......................................................................................................... 134
Print Key...............................................................................................................................................134
Operating Data Printout........................................................................................................................134
History Printout.....................................................................................................................................135
History Displays....................................................................................................................................136
Software Version..................................................................................................................................138
ENTRY KEYS................................................................................................................................................ 139
Up and Down Arrow Keys....................................................................................................................139
Enter/Adv Key......................................................................................................................................139
SETPOINTS KEYS....................................................................................................................................... 140
Cooling Setpoints.................................................................................................................................140
Leaving Chilled Liquid Control.............................................................................................................. 140
Return Chilled Liquid Control............................................................................................................... 141
Remote Setpoint Control...................................................................................................................... 141
SCHEDULE/ADVANCE DAY KEY................................................................................................................ 141
PROGRAM KEY............................................................................................................................................ 143
System Trip Volts..................................................................................................................................145
Unit Trip Volts.......................................................................................................................................145
UNIT KEYS .................................................................................................................................................. 147
Options Key..........................................................................................................................................147
Option 1 – Language....................................................................................................................147
Option 2 – System Switches (two system units only)...................................................................147

8 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.72-NM2 (811)

ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011

TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONT’D)

Option 3 – Chilled Liquid Cooling Type.........................................................................................147
Option 4 – Ambient Control Type..................................................................................................148
Option 5 – Local/Remote Control Type.........................................................................................148
Option 6 – Unit Control Mode.......................................................................................................148
Option 7 – Display Units...............................................................................................................148
Option 8 – Lead/Lag Type (two system units only).......................................................................148
Option 9 – Condenser Fan Control Mode ....................................................................................149
Option 10 – Manual Override Mode..............................................................................................149
Option 11 – Current Feedback Options Installed..........................................................................149
Option 12 – Power Fail Restart.....................................................................................................149
Option 13 – Soft Start Enable/Disable..........................................................................................149
Option 14 – Unit Type...................................................................................................................149
Option 15 – Refrigerant Type........................................................................................................150
Option 16 – Expansion Valve Type...............................................................................................150
Option 17 – Flash Card Update....................................................................................................150
Option 18 – Remote Temperature Reset......................................................................................150
Option 19 – Pump Control............................................................................................................150
Option 20 – Pump Selection.........................................................................................................151
Clock....................................................................................................................................................151
SECTION 8 – UNIT OPERATION..........................................................................................................................153
CAPACITY CONTROL.................................................................................................................................. 153
SUCTION PRESSURE LIMIT CONTROLS.................................................................................................. 153
DISCHARGE PRESSURE LIMIT CONTROLS.............................................................................................153
LEAVING CHILLED LIQUID CONTROL....................................................................................................... 153
LEAVING CHILLED LIQUID CONTROL OVERRIDE TO REDUCE CYCLING............................................. 154
LEAVING CHILLED LIQUID SYSTEM LEAD/LAG AND COMPRESSOR SEQUENCING........................... 154
RETURN CHILLED LIQUID CONTROL........................................................................................................ 155
RETURN CHILLLED LIQUID SYSTEM LEAD/LAG AND COMPRESSOR SEQUENCING......................... 156
ANTI-RECYCLE TIMER................................................................................................................................ 157
ANTI-COINCIDENCE TIMER........................................................................................................................ 157
EVAPORATOR PUMP CONTROL AND YORK HYDRO KIT PUMP CONTROL.......................................... 157
EVAPORATOR HEATER CONTROL............................................................................................................ 157
PUMPDOWN CONTROL.............................................................................................................................. 157
STANDARD CONDENSER FAN CONTROL................................................................................................ 157
LOAD LIMITING............................................................................................................................................ 161
COMPRESSOR RUN STATUS..................................................................................................................... 161
ALARM STATUS........................................................................................................................................... 161
REMOTE BAS/EMS TEMPERATURE RESET USING A VOLTAGE OR CURRENT SIGNAL..................... 161
SECTION 9 – SERVICE AND TROUBLESHOOTING...........................................................................................163
CLEARING HISTORY BUFFERS................................................................................................................. 163
SERVICE MODE........................................................................................................................................... 163
SERVICE MODE – OUTPUTS...................................................................................................................... 163
SERVICE MODE – CHILLER CONFIGURATION.........................................................................................164
SERVICE MODE – ANALOG AND DIGITAL INPUTS................................................................................... 164
CONTROL INPUTS/OUTPUTS..................................................................................................................... 165
CHECKING INPUTS AND OUTPUTS........................................................................................................... 167
Digital Inputs.........................................................................................................................................167
Analog Inputs – Temperature............................................................................................................... 167
Outside Air Sensor...............................................................................................................................167
Liquid and Refrigerant Sensor Test Points .......................................................................................... 168
Entering Chilled Liquid Sensor............................................................................................................. 168
Leaving Chilled Liquid Temperature Sensor......................................................................................... 168

JOHNSON CONTROLS 9
 FORM 150.72-NM2 (811)

ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011

TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONT’D)

Analog Inputs – Pressure..................................................................................................................... 168
System 1 Discharge Transducer.......................................................................................................... 169
System 2 Discharge Transducer.......................................................................................................... 169
System 1 Suction Transducer.............................................................................................................. 169
System 2 Suction Transducer.............................................................................................................. 169
Digital Outputs......................................................................................................................................169
OPTIONAL PRINTER INSTALLATION........................................................................................................ 170
Parts.....................................................................................................................................................170
Obtaining a Printout..............................................................................................................................171
TROUBLESHOOTING.................................................................................................................................. 172
SECTION 10 – MAINTENANCE............................................................................................................................175
IMPORTANT.................................................................................................................................................. 175
COMPRESSORS.......................................................................................................................................... 175
Oil Level check.....................................................................................................................................175
Oil Analysis...........................................................................................................................................175
CONDENSER FAN MOTORS....................................................................................................................... 175
CONDENSER ROUND TUBE COILS........................................................................................................... 175
MICROCHANNEL COIL CLEANING............................................................................................................. 175
OPERATING PARAMETERS........................................................................................................................ 176
ON-BOARD BATTERY BACK-UP................................................................................................................. 176
PLATE AND FRAME HEAT EXCHANGER (EVAPORATOR) HEATER........................................................ 176
OVERALL UNIT INSPECTION...................................................................................................................... 176
BACNET, MODBUS AND YORKTALK 2 COMMUNICATIONS..................................................................... 177
BACnet and Modbus Communications................................................................................................ 180
Analog Write Points......................................................................................................................180
Binary Write Points.......................................................................................................................180
Analog Read Only Points..............................................................................................................180
Binary Monitor Only Points...........................................................................................................180
Communications Data Map Notes........................................................................................................ 180
Yorktalk 2 Communications.................................................................................................................. 184
Received Data (Control Data).......................................................................................................184
Transmitted Data..........................................................................................................................184
TEMPERATURE CONVERSION CHART..................................................................................................... 188
R-410A PRESSURE TEMPERATURE CHART............................................................................................189

10 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.72-NM2 (811)

ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011

LIST OF FIGURES
FIGURE 1 - UNIT COMPONENTS FRONT������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������22
FIGURE 2 - UNIT COMPONENTS SIDE����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������23
FIGURE 3 - POWER PANEL COMPONENTS��������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������24
FIGURE 4 - POWER PANEL / CONTROL COMPONENTS�����������������������������������������������������������������������������������25
FIGURE 5 - REFRIGERANT FLOW DIAGRAM������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������32
FIGURE 6 - PROCESS AND INSTRUMENTATION DIAGRAM������������������������������������������������������������������������������33
FIGURE 7 - UNIT RIGGING/LIFTING ��������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������36
FIGURE 8 - CHILLED LIQUID SYSTEM ����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������39
FIGURE 9 - S
 INGLE-POINT SUPPLY CONNECTION – TERMINAL BLOCK, NON-FUSED DISCONNECT
SWITCH OR CIRCUIT BREAKER OR CIRCUIT BREAKER�������������������������������������������������������������� 42
FIGURE 10 - CONTROL WIRING INPUTS�������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������43
FIGURE 11 - CONTROL WIRING OUTPUTS���������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������44
FIGURE 12 - ELEMENTARY WIRING DIAGRAM���������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������70
FIGURE 13 - ELEMENTARY WIRING DIAGRAM���������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������72
FIGURE 14 - CONDENSER FAN MAPPING AND SEQUENCING�������������������������������������������������������������������������74
FIGURE 15 - COMPRESSOR WIRING������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������76
FIGURE 16 - POWER OPTIONS CONNECTION DIAGRAM���������������������������������������������������������������������������������78
FIGURE 17 - POWER PANEL���������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������80
FIGURE 18 - FAN WIRING, STANDARD LOW SOUND OR ULTRA QUIET, YLAA0070 - YLAA0135,
YLAA0150 AND YLAA0155���������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������82
FIGURE 19 - FAN WIRING, STANDARD LOW SOUND OR ULTRA QUIET, YLAA0141��������������������������������������� 84
FIGURE 20 - FAN WIRING, STANDARD LOW SOUND OR ULTRA QUIET, YLAA0070 - YLAA0175������������������� 86
FIGURE 21 - FAN WIRING, HIGH AIR FLOW��������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������88
FIGURE 22 - MICRO PANEL CONNECTIONS�������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������90
FIGURE 23 - SINGLE AND DUAL POINT WIRING OPTIONS�������������������������������������������������������������������������������92
FIGURE 24 - PUMP WIRING����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������93
FIGURE 25 - S
 AMPLE PRINTOUT SUPPLIED IN THE ISOLATOR PACKAGE AND IN THE CHILLER PANEL
LITERATURE PACKET���������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������99
FIGURE 26 - S
 AMPLE PRINTOUT SUPPLIED IN THE ISOLATOR PACKAGE AND IN THE CHILLER PANEL
LITERATURE PACKET�������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������100
FIGURE 27 - UNIT CLEARANCES – ALL MODELS���������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������101
FIGURE 28 - L
 EAVING WATER TEMPERATURE
CONTROL EXAMPLE���������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������153
FIGURE 29 - SETPOINT ADJUST������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������154
FIGURE 30 - CONDENSER FAN LOCATIONSWIRING DIAGRAMS�������������������������������������������������������������������158
FIGURE 31 - MICROBOARD LAYOUT�����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������166
FIGURE 32 - I/O BOARD RELAY CONTACT ARCHITECTURE���������������������������������������������������������������������������170
FIGURE 33 - PRINTER TO MICROBOARD ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS������������������������������������������������������� 171
FIGURE 34 - MICRO PANEL CONNECTIONS�����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������178

JOHNSON CONTROLS 11
 FORM 150.72-NM2 (811)

ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011

LIST OF TABLES
TABLE 1 - COMPLETE PIN NUMBER DESCRIPTION������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������26
TABLE 2 - TEMPERATURES AND FLOWS������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������45
TABLE 3 - VOLTAGE LIMITATIONS������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������45
TABLE 4 - ETHYLENE & PROPYLENE GLYCOL CORRECTION FACTORS������������������������������������������������������� 46
TABLE 5 - PHYSICAL DATA (ENGLISH)����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������48
TABLE 6 - MICRO PANEL POWER SUPPLY���������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������50
TABLE 7 - VOLTAGE RANGE���������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������50
TABLE 8 - ELECTRICAL DATA W/O PUMPS���������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������52
TABLE 9 - WIRING LUGS���������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������56
TABLE 10 - ELECTRICAL DATA W/ PUMPS����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������58
TABLE 11 - SETPOINTS ENTRY LIST�����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������120
TABLE 12 - STATUS KEY MESSAGES QUICK REFERENCE LIST��������������������������������������������������������������������130
TABLE 13 - OPERATION DATA����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������134
TABLE 14 - COOLING SETPOINTS, PROGRAMMABLE LIMITS AND DEFAULTS�������������������������������������������� 142
TABLE 15 - PROGRAM KEY LIMITS AND DEFAULT�������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������144
TABLE 16 - SETPOINTS QUICK REFERENCE LIST�������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������146
TABLE 17 - UNIT KEYS OPTIONS PROGRAMMING QUICK REFERENCE LIST���������������������������������������������� 152
TABLE 18 - SAMPLE COMPRESSOR STAGING FOR RETURN WATER CONTROL���������������������������������������� 155
TABLE 19 - RETURN CHILLED LIQUID CONTROL FOR 4 COMPRESSORS (6 STEPS)��������������������������������� 155
TABLE 20 - RETURN CHILLED LIQUID CONTROL FOR 4 COMPRESSORS (6 STEPS)��������������������������������� 156
TABLE 21 - YLAA STANDARD CONDENSER FAN CONTROL USING DISCHARGE PRESSURE ONLY
(2, 3, OR 4 FANS PER SYSTEM)������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������159
TABLE 22 - YLAA STANDARD CONDENSER FAN CONTROL USING DISCHARGE PRESSURE ONLY
(5 OR 6 FANS PER SYSTEM)�����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������160
TABLE 23 - COMPRESSOR OPERATION LOAD LIMITING��������������������������������������������������������������������������������161
TABLE 24 - I/O DIGITAL INPUTS��������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������165
TABLE 25 - I/O DIGITAL OUTPUTS����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������165
TABLE 26 - I/O ANALOG INPUTS������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������165
TABLE 27 - I/O ANALOG OUTPUTS��������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������165
TABLE 28 - OUTDOOR AIR SENSOR TEMPERATURE/VOLTAGE/CORRELATION������������������������������������������ 167
TABLE 29 - ENTERING/LEAVING CHILLED LIQUID TEMP. SENSOR, TEMPERATURE/VOLTAGE
CORRELATION����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������168
TABLE 30 - PRESSURE TRANSDUCERS�����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������169
TABLE 31 - TROUBLESHOOTING�����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������172
TABLE 32 - MINIMUM, MAXIMUM AND DEFAULT VALUES�������������������������������������������������������������������������������178
TABLE 33 - VALUES REQUIRED FOR BAS COMMUNICATION�������������������������������������������������������������������������179
TABLE 34 - REAL TIME ERROR NUMBERS�������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������179
TABLE 35 - BACNET AND MODBUS COMMUNICATIONS DATA MAP��������������������������������������������������������������� 181
TABLE 36 - YORKTALK 2 COMMUNICATIONS DATA MAP��������������������������������������������������������������������������������185

12 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.72-NM2 (811)
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011

SECTION 1 – GENERAL CHILLER INFORMATION AND SAFETY

INTRODUCTION For warranty purposes, the following conditions must
YORK YLAA0070 - 0175 (70 -175 ton, 246 - 527kW) be satisfied: 1
chillers are manufactured to the highest design and • The initial start of the unit must be carried out
construction standards to ensure high performance, re- by trained personnel from an Authorized John-
liability and adaptability to all types of air conditioning son Controls Service Center (see “SECTION 6 –
installations. COMMISSIONING” on page 117).
The unit is intended for cooling water or glycol solu- • Only genuine YORK approved spare parts, oils,
tions and is not suitable for purposes other than those coolants, and refrigerants must be used.
specified in this manual.
• All the scheduled maintenance operations detailed
This manual contains all the information required for in this manual must be performed at the specified
correct installation and commissioning of the unit, to- times by suitably trained and qualified personnel
gether with operating and maintenance instructions. (see “SECTION 10 – MAINTENANCE” on page
The manuals should be read thoroughly before at- 175).
tempting to operate or service the unit.
• Failure to satisfy any of these conditions will auto-
All procedures detailed in the manuals, including in- matically void the warranty (see “WARRANTY”
stallation, commissioning and maintenance tasks must on page 13).
only be performed by suitably trained and qualified
personnel. SAFETY AND QUALITY

The manufacturer will not be liable for any injury or Standards for Safety and Quality
damage caused by incorrect installation, commission- YLAA chillers are designed and built within an ISO
ing, operation or maintenance resulting from a failure 9002 accredited design and manufacturing organiza-
to follow the procedures and instructions detailed in tion. The chillers comply with the applicable sections
the manuals. of the following Standards and Codes:

WARRANTY • ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 15- Safety Code for

Mechanical Refrigeration.
Johnson Controls warrants all equipment and materi-
als against defects in workmanship and materials for a • ANSI/NFPA Standard 70- National Electrical
period of eighteen months from date of shipment, or 12 Code (N.E.C.).
months from date of shipment, whichever occurs first, • ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code- Section
unless labor or extended warranty has been purchased VIII Division 1.
as part of the contract.
• ARI Standard 550/590 - Positive Displacement
The warranty is limited to parts only replacement and Compressors and Air Cooled Rotary Screw Water
shipping of any faulty part, or sub-assembly, which has Chilling Packages.
failed due to poor quality or manufacturing errors. All
claims must be supported by evidence that the failure • ASHRAE 90.1- Energy Efficiency compliance.
has occurred within the warranty period, and that the • Conform to Intertek Testing Services, formerly
unit has been operated within the designed parameters ETL, for construction of chillers and provide
specified. ETL/cETL listing label.
All warranty claims must specify the unit model, serial • Manufactured in facility registered to ISO 9002.
number, order number and run hours/starts. Model and
serial number information is printed on the unit identi- • OSHA – Occupational Safety and Health Act.
fication plate. In addition, the chillers conform to Underwriters Labo-
The unit warranty will be void if any modification to ratories (U.L.) for construction of chillers and provide
the unit is carried out without prior written approval U.L./cU.L. Listing Label.
from Johnson Controls.

JOHNSON CONTROLS 13
 FORM 150.72-NM2 (811)
SECTION 1 – GENERAL CHILLER INFORMATION and SAFETY
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011

Responsibility for Safety This manual and any other document supplied with
Every care has been taken in the design and manufac- the unit are the property of Johnson Controls which
ture of the unit to ensure compliance with the safety reserves all rights. They may not be reproduced, in
requirements listed above. However, the individual whole or in part, without prior written authorization
operating or working on any machinery is primarily from an authorized Johnson Controls representative.
responsible for:
MISUSE OF EQUIPMENT
• Personal safety, safety of other personnel, and the
Suitability for Application
machinery.
The unit is intended for cooling water or glycol solu-
• Correct utilization of the machinery in accordance tions and is not suitable for purposes other than those
with the procedures detailed in the manuals. specified in these instructions. Any use of the equipment
ABOUT THIS MANUAL other than its intended use, or operation of the equip-
ment contrary to the relevant procedures may result in
The following terms are used in this document to alert injury to the operator, or damage to the equipment.
the reader to areas of potential hazard.
The unit must not be operated outside the design pa-
rameters specified in this manual.

Structural Support
Structural support of the unit must be provided as in-
dicated in these instructions. Failure to provide proper
support may result in injury to the operator, or damage
A WARNING is given in this document to identify a to the equipment and/or building.
hazard, which could lead to personal injury. Usually an
instruction will be given, together with a brief explana- Mechanical Strength
tion and the possible result of ignoring the instruction. The unit is not designed to withstand loads or stresses
from adjacent equipment, pipework or structures. Ad-
ditional components must not be mounted on the unit.
Any such extraneous loads may cause structural failure
and may result in injury to the operator, or damage to
the equipment.

A CAUTION identifies a hazard which could lead to General Access

damage to the machine, damage to other equipment There are a number of areas and features, which may
and/or environmental pollution. Usually an instruction be a hazard and potentially cause injury when working
will be given, together with a brief explanation and the on the unit unless suitable safety precautions are taken.
possible result of ignoring the instruction. It is important to ensure access to the unit is restricted
to suitably qualified persons who are familiar with the
potential hazards and precautions necessary for safe
operation and maintenance of equipment containing
high temperatures, pressures and voltages.

Pressure Systems
A NOTE is used to highlight additional information, The unit contains refrigerant vapor and liquid under
which may be helpful to you but where there are no pressure, release of which can be a danger and cause
special safety implications. injury. The user should ensure that care is taken during
installation, operation and maintenance to avoid dam-
The contents of this manual include suggested best age to the pressure system. No attempt should be made
working practices and procedures. These are issued for to gain access to the component parts of the pressure
guidance only, and they do not take precedence over system other than by suitably trained and qualified per-
the above stated individual responsibility and/or local sonnel.
safety regulations.

14 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.72-NM2 (811)
SECTION 1 – GENERAL CHILLER INFORMATION and SAFETY
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011

Electrical Frame rails, brakes, and other components may also

The unit must be grounded. No installation or main- have sharp edges. Reasonable care should be taken
tenance work should be attempted on the electrical when working in contact with any components to avoid
equipment without first switching power OFF, isolat- risk of minor abrasions and lacerations. 1
ing and locking-off the power supply. Servicing and
Refrigerants and Oils
maintenance on live equipment must only be per-
formed by suitably trained and qualified personnel. No Refrigerants and oils used in the unit are generally non-
attempt should be made to gain access to the control toxic, non-flammable and non-corrosive, and pose no
panel or electrical enclosures during normal operation special safety hazards. Use of gloves and safety glasses
of the unit. is, however, recommended when working on the unit.
The build up of refrigerant vapor, from a leak for ex-
Rotating Parts ample, does pose a risk of asphyxiation in confined or
Fan guards must be fitted at all times and not removed enclosed spaces and attention should be given to good
unless the power supply has been isolated. If ductwork ventilation.
is to be fitted, requiring the wire fan guards to be re-
High Temperature and Pressure Cleaning
moved, alternative safety measures must be taken to
protect against the risk of injury from rotating fans. High temperature and pressure cleaning methods
(e.g. steam cleaning) should not be used on any part
Sharp Edges of the pressure system as this may cause operation of
The fins on the air-cooled condenser coils have sharp the pressure relief device(s). Detergents and solvents,
metal edges. Reasonable care should be taken when which may cause corrosion, should also be avoided.
working in contact with the coils to avoid the risk of
Emergency Shutdown
minor abrasions and lacerations. The use of gloves is
recommended. In case of emergency, the control panel is fitted with a
Unit Switch to stop the unit in an emergency. When op-
erated, it removes the low voltage 120VAC electrical
supply from the inverter system, thus shutting down
the unit.

JOHNSON CONTROLS 15
 FORM 150.72-NM2 (811)
SECTION 1 – GENERAL CHILLER INFORMATION and SAFETY
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

16 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.72-NM2 (811)
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011

SECTION 2 – PRODUCT DESCRIPTION

GS560418

INTRODUCTION GENERAL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

YORK YLAA Air-Cooled Scroll Chillers provide Compressors
chilled water for all air conditioning applications us-
The chiller has suction-gas cooled, hermetic, scroll
ing central station air handling or terminal units. They
compressors. The YLAA compressors incorporate a
are completely self-contained and are designed for out-
compliant scroll design in both the axial and radial
door (roof or ground level) installation. Each complete
direction. All rotating parts are statically and dynami-
packaged unit includes hermetic scroll compressors, a
cally balanced. A large internal volume and oil res-
liquid cooler, air cooled condenser, a charge of Zero
ervoir provides greater liquid tolerance. Compressor
Ozone Depletion Potential Refrigerant R-410A and
crankcase heaters are also included for extra protection
a weather resistant microprocessor control center, all
against liquid migration.
mounted on a pressed steel base.
The units are completely assembled with all intercon- Cooler (Evaporator)
necting refrigerant piping and internal wiring, ready The cooler is a direct expansion type with refrigerant
for field installation. inside high efficiency copper tubes. The liquid flow-
ing through the cooler is forced over the tubes by water
Prior to delivery, the packaged unit is pressure-tested,
baffles.
evacuated, and fully charged with Refrigerant R-410A
and oil. After assembly, a complete operational test is The Water baffles are constructed of galvanized steel to
performed with water flowing through the cooler to as- resist corrosion. The removable heads allow access to
sure that the refrigeration circuit operates correctly. the internally enhanced, seamless copper tubes. Vent
and drain connections are included.
The unit structure is heavy-gauge, galvanized steel.
This galvanized steel is coated with baked-on powder Water inlet and outlet connections are grooved for
paint, which, when subjected to ASTM B117 1000 compatibility with field supplied ANSI/AWWA C-606
hour, salt spray testing, yields a minimum ASTM 1654 couplings.
rating of “6”. Units are designed in accordance with
NFPA 70 (National Electric Code), ASHRAE/ANSI 15 The cooler is equipped with a heater controlled by a
Safety code for mechanical refrigeration, ASME, and separate thermostat. The heater provides freeze pro-
rated in accordance with ARI Standard 550/590. tection for the cooler down to -20º F (-29º C) ambient.
The cooler is covered with ¾” flexible, closed cell,
foam insulation (K = 0.25).

JOHNSON CONTROLS 17
 FORM 150.72-NM2 (811)
SECTION 2 – PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011

The evaporator is constructed, tested and stamped in • System pressures (each circuit)
accordance with applicable sections of ASME pres-
• Operating hours and starts (each compressor)
sure vessel code for minimum 450 PSIG (3103 kPa)
refrigerant side design working pressure and 150 PSIG • Print calls up to the liquid crystal display
(1034 kPa) water side design working pressure.
• Operating data for the systems
A strainer with a mesh size between .5 and 1.5 mm (40
• History of fault shutdown data for up to the last
mesh) is recommended upstream of the heat exchanger
six fault shutdown conditions.
to prevent clogging from water system debris.
• An RS-232 port, in conjunction with this press-to-
Condenser print button, is provided to permit the capability
of hard copy print-outs via a separate printer (by
Coils
others).
Fin and tube condenser coils of seamless, internally-
enhanced, high condensing-coefficient, corrosion re- Entry
sistant copper tubes are arranged in staggered rows, This section is used to enter setpoints or modify system
mechanically expanded into aluminum fins. Integral values.
subcooling is included. The design working pressure
of the coil is 650 PSIG (45 bar). Setpoints

Fans Updating can be performed to:

The condenser fans are composed of corrosion resis- • Chilled liquid temperature setpoint and range
tant aluminum hub and glass-fiber reinforced poly-
• Remote reset temperature range
propylene composite blades molded into a low noise
airfoil section. They are designed for maximum effi- • Set daily schedule/holiday for start/stop
ciency and are statically and dynamically balanced for
• Manual override for servicing
vibration free operation. They are directly driven by
independent motors, and positioned for vertical air dis- • Low and high ambient cutouts
charge. The fan guards are constructed of heavy gauge,
• Number of compressors
rust resistant, coated steel. All blades are statically and
dynamically balanced for vibration free operation. • Low liquid temperature cutout

Motors • Low suction pressure cutout

The fan motors are Totally Enclosed Air-Over, squirrel • High discharge pressure cutout
cage type, current protected. They feature ball bear- • Anti-recycle timer (compressor start cycle time)
ings that are double sealed and permanently lubricated.
• Anti-coincident timer (delay compressor starts)
Millenium Control Center
Unit
All controls are contained in a NEMA 3R/12 cabinet
with hinged outer door and includes a Liquid Crystal This section is used to:
Display with Light Emitting Diode backlighting for
• Set time
outdoor viewing:
• Set unit options
• Two display lines
Unit On/Off
• Twenty characters per line
The microprocessor control center is capable of dis-
Display/Print playing the following:
• Color coded 12-button non-tactile keypad with
• Return and leaving liquid temperature
sections for display and print of typical informa-
tion: • Low leaving liquid temperature cutout setting
• Chilled liquid temperatures • Low ambient temperature cutout setting
• Ambient temperature • Outdoor air temperature

18 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.72-NM2 (811)
SECTION 2 – PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011

• English or Metric data COMMUNICATIONS

• Suction pressure cutout setting • Native communication capability for BACnet(MS/
TP) and Modbus.
• Each system suction pressure
• Optional communication available for N2 and
• Discharge pressure (optional)
LON via eLink option.
2
• Liquid Temperature Reset via a Johnson Controls
ISN DDC or Building Automation System (by HIGH AMBIENT KIT
others) via a 4 to 20 milliamp or 0 to10VDCinpu Allows units to operate when the ambient temperature
• Anti-recycle timer status for each system is above 115°F (46°C). Includes sun shield panels and
discharge pressure transducers.
• Anti-coincident system start timer condition
BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM
• Compressor run status
INTERFACE
• No cooling load condition The Microprocessor Board can accept a 4 to 20 milli-
• Day, date and time amp,0 to10VDC input to reset the leaving chiller liquid
temperature from a Building Automation System.
• Daily start/stop times
• The standard unit capabilities include remote
• Holiday status
start-stop, remote water temperature reset via a
• Automatic or manual system lead/lag control PWM 4 to 20 milliamp or 0 to 10VDC input sig-
nal or up to two stages of demand (load) limiting
• Lead system definition depending on model.
• Compressor starts and operating hours • The standard control panel can be directly con-
• (each compressor) nected to a Johnson Controls Building Automated
System.
• Status of hot gas valves, evaporator heater
POWER PANEL
• and fan operation
Each panel contains:
• Run permissive status
• Number of compressors running • Compressor power terminals

• Liquid solenoid valve status • Compressor motor starting contactors per l.E.C.**

• Load and unload timer status • Control power terminals to accept incoming for
115-1-60 control power
• Water pump status
• Fan contactors and overload current protection
Provisions are included for: pumpdown at shutdown;
optional remote chilled water temperature reset and The power wiring is routed through liquid-tight con-
two steps of demand load limiting from an external duit to the compressors and fans.
building automation system. Unit alarm contacts are
ACCESSORIES AND OPTIONS
standard.
Power Options
The operating program is stored in non-volatile memo-
ry battery backed RAM to eliminate chiller failure due Compressor Power Connections
to AC powered failure/battery discharge. Programmed Single-point terminal block connection(s) are provid-
setpoints are retained in lithium battery-backed RTC ed as standard. The following power connections are
memory for 5 years minimum. available as options. (See electrical data for specific
voltage and options availability.) (Factory-mounted)

* Intensity of Protection European Standard

** International Electrotechnical Commission

JOHNSON CONTROLS 19
 FORM 150.72-NM2 (811)
SECTION 2 – PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011

Single-Point Supply Terminal Block Ambient Kit (High)

Includes enclosure, terminal-block and interconnecting Required if units are to operate when the ambient tem-
wiring to the compressors. Separate external protection perature is above 115°F (46°C). Includes discharge
must be supplied, by others, in the incoming compres- pressure transducers.
sor-power wiring. (Do not include this option if either
the Single-Point Non-Fused Disconnect Switch or Sin- Language LCD and Keypad Display
gle-Point Circuit Breaker options have been included.) Spanish, French, German, and Italian unit LCD con-
trols and keypad display available. Standard language
Single-Point Non-Fused Disconnect Switch is English.
Or Multiple-Point Non-Fused Disconnect
Switches Compressor, Piping, Evaporator Options:
Unit-mounted disconnect switch(es) with external, Low Temperature Brine
lockable handle (in compliance with Article 440-14 of
N.E.C.), can be supplied to isolate the unit power volt- Required for brine chilling below 30°F (-1°C) leaving
age for servicing. Separate external fusing must be sup- brine temperature. Option includes resized thermal ex-
plied, by others in the power wiring, which must comply pansion valve.
with the National Electrical Code and/or local codes.
Chicago Code Relief Valves
Single-Point Non-Fused Disconnect Switch Unit will be provided with relief valves to meet Chi-
With Individual System Breakers cago code requirements. (Factory-Mounted)
Includes unit-mounted disconnect switch with external,
Service Suction Isolation Valve
lockable handles (in compliance with Article 440-14 of
N.E.C.) to isolate unit power voltage for servicing. Fac- Service suction discharge (ball-type) isolation valves
tory interconnecting wiring is provided from the discon- are added to unit per system (discharge service ball-
nect switch to factory supplied system circuit breakers. type isolation valve is standard on each circuit). (Fac-
tory-Mounted)
Single-Point Circuit Breaker
Hot Gas By-Pass
A unit mounted circuit breaker with external, lockable
handle (in compliance with N.E.C. Article 440-14), can Permits continuous, stable operation at capacities below
be supplied to isolate the power voltage for servicing. the minimum step of compressor unloading to as low
(This option includes the Single-Point Power connection.) as 5% capacity (depending on both the unit and operat-
ing conditions) by introducing an artificial load on the
Control Transformer cooler. Hot gas by-pass is installed on only refrigerant
Converts unit power voltage to 115-1-60 (2.0 or 3.0 system #1 on two-circuited units. (Factory-Mounted)
KVA capacity). Factory mounting includes primary
Flanges (ANSI/AWWA C-606 couplings Type)
and secondary wiring between the transformer and the
control panel. (Factory-mounted) Consists of (2) Flange adapter for grooved end pipe (stan-
dard 150 psi [10.5 bar] cooler). (Not available on optional
Control Options DX cooler 300 PSIG DWP waterside.) (Field-mounted)
Ambient Kit (Low) Flow Switch
Units will operate to 25°F (-3.9°C). This accessory in- The flow switch or its equivalent must be furnished
cludes all necessary components to permit chiller opera- with each unit.
tion to 0°F (-18°C). (This option includes the Discharge
Pressure Transducer / Readout Capability option.) For 150 psig (10.5 bar) DWP
proper head pressure control in applications below 30°F
For standard units. Johnson Controls model F61MG-
(-1°C) where wind gusts may exceed 5 mph, it is recom-
1C Vapor-proof SPDT, NEMA 3R switch (150 PSIG
mended that Optional Condenser Louvered Enclosure
[10.5 bar] DWP), -20°F to 250°F (-29°C to 121°C),
Panels also be included. (Factory-mounted)
with 1” NPT connection for upright mounting in hori-
zontal pipe. (Field-mounted)

20 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.72-NM2 (811)
SECTION 2 – PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011

Differential Pressure Switch Panels for winter applications where wind gusts may
Alternative to an above mentioned flow switch. Pre- exceed five miles per hour. The following types of en-
tempco model DPS300A-P40PF-82582-5 (300 psi max. closure panels are available:
working pressure), SPDT 5 amp 125/250VAC switch, • Wire Panels (Full Unit) - Consists of welded
Range 3 to 40 PSID, deadband 0.5 to 0.8 psi, with 1/4” wire-mesh guards mounted on the exterior of the
NPTE Pressure Connections. unit. Prevents unauthorized access, yet provides 2
free air flow. (Factory-Mounted)
Hydro-Kit
Factory installed Hydro-Kit suitable for water glycol sys- • Wire/Louvered Panels - Consists of welded
tems with up to 35% glycol at leaving temperatures down wire-mesh panels on the bottom part of unit and
to 20 F. The Hydro-kit option is available in a single or louvered panels on the condenser section of the
dual configuration (dual as standby duty only), with to- unit. (Factory- mounted)
tally enclosed permanently lubricated pump motors. • Louvered Panels (Condenser Coils Only) - Lou-
vered Panels are mounted on the sides and ends
The hydro-kit option comes standard with a balancing
of the condenser coils for protection. (Factory-
valve, flow switch, pressure ports, suction guide, strain-
Mounted)
er, bleed and drain valves and frost protection.
• Louvered Panels (Full Unit) - Louvered panels
Expansion tanks are optional within the Hydro-Kit
surround the front, back, and sides of the unit.
option.
They prevent unauthorized access and visually
Condenser and Cabinet Options screen unit components. Unrestricted air flow
is permitted through generously sized louvered
Condenser coil protection against corrosive environments is openings. This option is applicable for any out-
available by choosing any of the following options. For addi-
door design ambient temperature up to 115°F
tional application recommendations, refer to FORM 150.12-
ES1. (Factory-Mounted) (46°). (Factory-Mounted)

Coil End Hail Guard

Pre-Coated Fin Condenser Coils
Louvered panel attached to exposed coil end. (Facto-
The unit’s coils are constructed with epoxy coated
ry-Mounted)
aluminum fins. This can provide corrosion resistance
comparable to copper-fin coils in typical seashore loca- Sound Attenuation
tions. Either these or the post-coated coils (below), are
recommended for units being installed at the seashore One or both of the following sound attenuation options
or where salt spray may hit the unit. are recommended for residential or other similar sound
sensitive locations:
Post-Coated Dipped Condenser Coils
• Compressor Acoustic Sound Blanket - Each
The unit’s coils are constructed with dipped-cured con- compressor is individually enclosed by an acous-
denser coils. This is another choice for seashore and tic sound blanket. The sound blankets are made
other corrosive applications (with the exception of with one layer of acoustical absorbent textile fi-
strong alkalies, oxidizers and wet bromine, chlorine ber of 5/8” (15mm) thickness; one layer of anti-
and fluorine in concentrations greater than 100 ppm). vibrating heavy material thickness of 1/8” (3mm).
Both are closed by two sheets of welded PVC,
Copper Fin Condenser Coils reinforced for temperature and UV resistance.
The unit’s coils are constructed with copper fins. (This (Factory-Mounted)
is not recommended for units in areas where they may
• Ultra Quiet Fans - Lower RPM, 8-pole fan mo-
be exposed to acid rain.)
tors are used with steeper-pitch fans. (Factory-
Enclosure Panels (Unit) Mounted)

Tamperproof Enclosure Panels prevent unauthorized Vibration Isolators

access to units. Enclosure Panels can provide an aes- Level adjusting, spring type 1” (25.4mm) or seismic
thetically pleasing alternative to expensive fencing. deflection or neoprene pad isolators for mounting un-
Additionally, for proper head pressure control, Johnson der unit base rails. (Field-mounted)
Controls recommends the use of Condenser Louvered
JOHNSON CONTROLS 21
 FORM 150.72-NM2 (811)
SECTION 2 – PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011

FAN
ASSEMBLIES
CONDENSER CONDENSER
COIL COILS

CONTROL
PANEL
POWER POWER
PANEL PANEL

SIGHT
GLASS

FILTER
DRIERS

COMPRESSORS EVAPORATOR LD13245

TXV

Figure 1 - UNIT COMPONENTS FRONT

22 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.72-NM2 (811)
SECTION 2 – PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011

FAN ASSEMBLIES
2

CONDENSER
CONDENSER COILS
COILS

EVAPORATOR

RECEIVERS
LD13246

Figure 2 - UNIT COMPONENTS SIDE

JOHNSON CONTROLS 23
 FORM 150.72-NM2 (811)
SECTION 2 – PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011

DISCONNECT
SWITCH
FAN FUSES FAN CONTACTORS
FAN CONTACTOR

COMPRESSOR
OVERLOADS

XTBF1 LD13247

COMPRESSOR
CONTACTORS

Figure 3 - POWER PANEL COMPONENTS

24 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.72-NM2 (811)
SECTION 2 – PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011

FAN FUSES MICROCOMPUTER

FAN CONTACTORS CONTROL CONTROL
RELAY CENTER MICROPANEL

DISPLAY

KEYPAD

COMPRESSOR
OVERLOADS

XTBC1

MICROBOARD
XTBC2
COMPRESSOR
CONTACTORS XTBF2
LD13248

Figure 4 - POWER PANEL / CONTROL COMPONENTS

JOHNSON CONTROLS 25
 FORM 150.72-NM2 (811)
SECTION 2 – PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011

PRODUCT IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (PIN)

BASIC UNIT NOMENCLATURE

YLAA0150SE 46XCA
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
BASE PRODUCT TYPE NOMINAL CAPACITY UNIT DESIGNATOR REFRIGERANT VOLTAGE/STARTER DESIGN/DEVELOPMENT LEVEL

Y : YORK 0 # # # S : Standard Efficiency E : R-410A 1 7 : 200 / 3/ 60 A : Design Series A, B, C

L : Scroll 1 # # # H : High Efficiency 2 8 : 230 / 3 / 60 : Development Level
A
A
: Air-Cooled Even Number: R : Heat Pump 4 0 : 380 / 3 / 60

: Condensing 60 HZ Nominal Tons Y : High Efficiency (Round Tube) 4 6
: 460 / 3 / 60

Unit Odd Number: Z : Standard Efficiency (Round Tube) 5 8 : 575 / 3 / 60
A
: Americas 50 HZ Nominal kW

Europe X : Across the Line

Table 1 - COMPLETE PIN NUMBER DESCRIPTION

FEATURE DESCRIPTION OPTION DESCRIPTION
CONTRACT Contract Number NUM Contract Number = {CONTRACT/NUM}
ORDER Order quantity QTY Order quantity = { ORDER/QTY }
N USA origin not required
USA USA origin
Y USA origin required
LBS Crane/Rigging Shipping Weight = {lbs}
SHIPWT Shipping Weight
KG Crane/Rigging Shipping Weight = {kg}
N Unit being built for sold order
STOCK Stock unit
Y Unit being built for stock
Stock conversion N Not a conversion
CONV
C Order being converted from stock
MODEL Model (PIN 1-4) YLAA YLAA
0070 0070
0080 0080
0090 0090
0091 0091
0101 0101
0115 0115
CAP Capacity (PIN 5-8) 0120 0120
0135 0135
0150 0150
0155 0155
0156 0156
0170 0170
0175 0175
S Standard Efficiency
H High Efficiency
UNIT Unit Designator (PIN 9)
Y High Efficiency (Round Tube)
Z Standard Efficiency (Round Tube)
REF Refrigerant (PIN 10) E R-410A

26 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.72-NM2 (811)
SECTION 2 – PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011

Table 1 - COMPLETE PIN NUMBER DESCRIPTION (CONT’D)

FEATURE DESCRIPTION OPTION DESCRIPTION
17 200/3/60
28 230/3/60
40 380/3/60
VOLTS Voltage (PIN 11 & 12)
46 460/3/60
2
50 380-415/3/50
58 575/3/60
X Across the Line starter
STARTER Starter (PIN 13)
T Soft Start
A Design Series A
DESIGN Design Series (PIN 14) B Design Series B
C Design Series C
DEV Development Level (PIN 15) A Development Level A
XX MP Supply TB
SX SP Supply TB
SD SP NF Disconnect Switch
POWER Power Field (PIN 16 & 17) BX SP Circuit Breaker w/ Lockable Handle
DB SP NF Disc Switch w/Ind Sys CB
MB MP Supply w/Ind Sys CB & L Ext Handles
MD MP NF Disc Switches
X No Control Transformer Required
TRANS
Cntrl Transformer (PIN 18) T Control Transformer Required
Q Special Control Transformer Required
X No Power Capacitor required
PFC Power Factor Capacitor (19) C Power Capacitor required
Q Special Power Capacitor required
B Both Low/High Ambient Kit w/Sunshield (factory)
S High Ambient Kit w/Sunshield (factory)
AMB Ambient Kits (PIN 20) H High Ambient Kit required (factory)
A Both Low/High Ambient Kit required (factory)
Q Special Ambient Kit required
X BAS Reset/Offset required (Std)
BAS Bas Reset/Offset (PIN 21) L LON E-Link Kit (factory)
Q Special BAS Reset/Offset required
X English
S Spanish
C Chinese (Simplified) (Not Applicable to eLogia)
E English with Chinese Displayed Board (Not Applicable to
LCD Language (PIN 22)
eLogia)
F French
G German
I Italian
Both Discharge & Suction Pressure Transducer Readout
B
RDOUT Readout Kits (PIN 23) required
Q Special Pressure Readout required
L N American Safety Code (cUL/cETL)
SAFETY Safety Codes (PIN 24) C European Safety Code ( CE )
G China Safety Code (GB) (Not Applicable to eLogia)
JOHNSON CONTROLS 27
 FORM 150.72-NM2 (811)
SECTION 2 – PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011

Table 1 - COMPLETE PIN NUMBER DESCRIPTION (CONT’D)

FEATURE DESCRIPTION OPTION DESCRIPTION
X X
SENSOR PIN 25
Q Special Quote
C Motor Current Module
PUMP Motor Current Module (PIN 26)
Q Special Quote
X No Remote Panel required
REMOTE Remote Panel (PIN 27)
Q Special Remote Panel required
X No Sequence Kit required
SEQ Sequence Kit (PIN 28)
Q Special Sequence Kit required
NUM Leaving Water Temp = {TEMP/NUM} degrees
TEMP Leaving Water Temp(29,30)
QQ Special LWT requirements
X No Chicago Code Kit required
C Chicago Code Kit required
CHICAGO Chicago Code Kit (PIN 31) S Service Isolation Valves
B Both Chicago Code & Serv Isolation
Q Special Chicago Code Kit required
X Standard Valves Req’d
VALVES Valves (PIN 32)
Q Special Optional Valves Req’d
X No Hot Gas Bypass required
HGBP Hot Gas Bypass (PIN 33) 1 Hot Gas Bypass required - 1 circuit
Q Special Hot Gas Bypass required
X X
GAUGE PIN 34
Q Special Quote
X X
OVERLOAD PIN 35
Q Special Quote
X X
PIN36 Q Special Quote
PIN 36

H Crankcase Heater Standard

HTR Crankcase Heater (Pin 37)
Q Special Crankcase Heater required
X 150psig DWP Waterside
DWP DWP (PIN 38)
Q Special Quote
X Standard Insulation
INS Insulation (PIN 39) D Double Thick Insulation
Q Special Insulation required
X No Flanges required
FLANGES Flanges (PIN 40) V Victaulic Flanges required
Q Special Flanges required
X No Flow Switch required
S One Flow Switch Required
T Two Flow Switches Required
U Three Flow Switches Required
FLOW Flow Switch (PIN 41)
D One Differential Pressure Switch Required
E Two Differential Pressure Switches Required
F Three Differential Pressure Switches Required
Q Special Flow Switch required

28 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.72-NM2 (811)
SECTION 2 – PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011

Table 1 - COMPLETE PIN NUMBER DESCRIPTION (CONT’D)

FEATURE DESCRIPTION OPTION DESCRIPTION
A ASME Pressure Vessel Codes
E PED Pressure Vessel Codes
VESSEL Vessel Codes (PIN 42)
G GB Pressure Vessel Codes (Not Applicable to eLogia)
Q Special Quote
2
X Standard Cooler required
CLR Cooler (PIN 43) R Remote Cooler required
Q Special Cooler required
X X
PIN44 PIN 44
Q Special Quote
X Aluminum Coils
C Copper Fin Coils
COILS Coils (PIN 45) B Pre-Coated Fin Coils
P Post-Coated Dipped Coils
Q Special Coils
X No Option required
HEAT PIN 46 H Heat Recovery
Q Special Quote
X TEAO Fan Motors
FANMOTORS Fan Motors (PIN 47)
Q Special Fan Motors required
X No Enclosure required
1 Wire (Full Unit) Encl Panels (factory)
2 Wire (Full Unit) Encl Panels (field)
3 Wire/Louvered Encl Panels (factory)
4 Wire/Louvered Encl Panels (field)
5 Louvered (Cond only) Encl Panels (factory)
6 Louvered (Cond only) Encl Panels (field)
7 Louvered (Full Unit) Encl Panels (factory)
ENCL Enclosure Panels (PIN 48)
8 Louvered (Full Unit) Encl Panels (field)
9 End Louver (End Hail Guard) Encl Panels (factory)
A End Louver (End Hail Guard) Encl Panels (field)
B Aesthetic Panel Kit only (factory)
C Aesthetic Panel Kit only (field)
D Aesthetic Panel Kit plus Hail Guards (factory)
E Aesthetic Panel Kit plus Hail Guards (field)
Q Special Enclosure Panels
X No Acoustic Blanket required
ACOUSTIC B Acoustic Blanket Required
Acoustic Blanket (PIN 49)
E Acoustic Enclosure
Q Special Acoustic Blanket required
X X
PIN50 PIN 50
Q Special Quote
X X
PIN51 PIN 51
Q Special Quote

JOHNSON CONTROLS 29
 FORM 150.72-NM2 (811)
SECTION 2 – PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011

Table 1 - COMPLETE PIN NUMBER DESCRIPTION (CONT’D)

FEATURE DESCRIPTION OPTION DESCRIPTION
X Standard Low Sound Fans required
A High Airflow Fans required (Vendor Specific)
E Low Sound Fans required (Vendor Specific)
G High Air Flow Fans required
FANS Sound Fans (PIN 52) L Ultra Quiet Fans required
S High Static Fans required (Vendor Specific)
U Ultra Quiet Fans required (Vendor Specific)
2 Two Speed Fans required (Vendor Specific)
Q Special Sound Fans required
X X
PAINT PIN 53
Q Special Quote
X No Isolators required
1 1” Deflection Isolators required
ISOL Vibration Isolators (PIN 54) N Neoprene Isolators required
S Seismic Isolators required
Q Special Isolators required
Marketing
PIN 55 PIN 55 Purposes
Only!
Marketing
PIN 56 PIN 56 Purposes
Only!
X No option required
A Buy American Act Compliance
Both Buy American Act Compliance and Container Ship-
B
SHIP Ship Instructions (PIN 57) ping Kit (Factory Prep)
C Container Shipping Kit (Factory Load)
P Container Shipping Kit (Factory Prep)
Q Special quote
Marketing
PIN 58 PIN 58 Purposes
Only!

30 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.72-NM2 (811)
SECTION 2 – PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011

Table 1 - COMPLETE PIN NUMBER DESCRIPTION (CONT’D)

FEATURE DESCRIPTION OPTION DESCRIPTION
X No Pump required
A Pump Kit A required
B Pump Kit B required
C Pump Kit C required
2
D Pump Kit D required
E Pump Kit E required
F Pump Kit F required
G Pump Kit G required
H Pump Kit H required
PKG Pump Package (PIN 59) I Pump Kit I required
J Pump Kit J required
K Pump Kit K required
L Pump Kit L required
M Pump Kit M required
N Pump Kit N required
O Pump Kit O required
P Pump Kit P required
R Pump Kit R required
Q Special quote
X No option required
PKGOPT Pump Package Options (PIN 60)
Q Special quote
CUR Curitiba, Brazil
GZ Guangzhou, China
LOC Mfg location MEX Mexico, ES
MTY Monterrey, BE
SAT San Antonio, Texas
CV YorkWorks configuration version {YW/CV}
YW YorkWorks version
UV YorkWorks upload version {YW/UV}
SQ Special quote Q Special quote

JOHNSON CONTROLS 31
 FORM 150.72-NM2 (811)
SECTION 2 – PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011

AIR COOLED CONDENSERS

YLAA REFRIGERANT FLOW DIAGRAM

(INCLUDING TEMPERATURE SENSORS & PRESSURE TRANSDUCERS)
* HOT GAS OPTION - SYSTEM 1 ONLY

SIGHT GLASS /
MOISTURE INDICATOR
LIQUID LINE FILTER / DRIER

LIQUID LINE
SERVICE VALVE LIQUID LINE
SOLENOID VALVE

HOT DISCHARGE
GAS LINE

OPTIONAL
DISCHARGE LINE
BALL VALVE * SOLENOID OPERATED
HOT GAS BY PASS VALVE

OPTIONAL DISCHARGE TXV

PRESSURE TRANSDUCER
OPTIONAL EQUALIZER
SERVICE VALVE OPTIONAL LINE
SUCTION LINE
HIGH PRESSURE BALL VALVE
CUTOUT SWITCH OPTIONAL
RELIEF VALVE

OPTIONAL
SERVICE
VALVE
DX COOLER

LOW PRESSURE SWITCH OR RETURN WATER

SUCTION PRESSURE TRANSDUCER TEMP. SENSOR
ENTERING CHILLED WATER
LEAVING
LEAVING CHILLED WATER CHILLED WATER
TEMP. SENSOR
OIL EQUALIZING
LINE
2 OR 3 COMPRESSORS PER SYSTEM
LD13138A

Figure 5 - REFRIGERANT FLOW DIAGRAM

32 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.72-NM2 (811)
SECTION 2 – PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011

Control Functions:
DV - Display Value
2
Fans Fans
CHT - Chilled Liquid Temperature Components:
HPC - High Pressure Cutout
LPC - Low Pressure Cutout Pressure Relief Valve
HPL - High Pressure Load Limiting
LTC - Low Temperature Cutout Service (Ball) Valve

Expansion Valve
Condenser S
Solenoid Valve

Sight Glass

Sensor Pressure
or Temperature
DV
585 PSIG HPL P Service (Stop) Access Valve
PS HPC

650 PSIG PS Pressure Switch

Filter Drier
(Removable Core)
See P.R.V.
Options
ZCPR-3 ZCPR-2 ZCPR-1

Chilled
Liquid
450 PSIG

Compressors Evaporator

DV
LPC P Ambient Air Sensor
DV
HTC T
LTC

T
Chilled
Liquid
DV
S
CHT
LTC

-YLLSV
LD13139

Figure 6 - PROCESS AND INSTRUMENTATION DIAGRAM

Low pressure liquid refrigerant enter the cooler and high pressure vapor is fed to the air cooled condenser
is evaporated and superheated by the heat energy ab- coil and fans where the heat is removed. The fully con-
sorbed from the chilled liquid passing through the densed and subcooled liquid passes through the expan-
cooler shell. Low pressure vapor enters at the compres- sion valve where pressure is reduced and further cool-
sor where pressure and superheat are increased. The ing takes place before returning to the cooler.

JOHNSON CONTROLS 33
 FORM 150.72-NM2 (811)
SECTION 2 – PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

34 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.72-NM2 (811)
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011

SECTION 3 – HANDLING AND STORAGE

DELIVERY AND STORAGE Major damage must be reported immediately to your
local Johnson Controls representative.
To ensure consistent quality and maximum reliability,
all units are tested and inspected before leaving the fac- MOVING THE CHILLER
tory. Units are shipped completely assembled and con-
taining refrigerant under pressure. Units are shipped Prior to moving the unit, ensure that the installation
without export crating unless crating has been speci- site is suitable for installing the unit and is easily ca-
fied on the Sales Order. pable of supporting the weight of the unit and all as-
sociated services.
If the unit is to be put into storage, prior to installation,
The units are designed to be lifted using cables. A
3
the following precautions should be observed:
spreader bar or frame should be used in order to pre-
• The chiller must be “blocked” so that the base is vent damage to the unit from the lifting chains.
not permitted to sag or bow.
Units are provided with lifting eyes in the sides of the
• Ensure that all openings, such as water connec- base frame, which can be attached to directly using
tions, are securely capped. shackles or safety hooks.
• Do not store where exposed to ambient air tem- The unit must only be lifted by the base
peratures exceeding 110 °F (43 °C). frame at the points provided. Never move
• The condensers should be covered to protect the the unit on rollers, or lift the unit using a
fins from potential damage and corrosion, particu- forklift truck.
larly where building work is in progress.
• The unit should be stored in a location where there Care should be taken to avoid damaging the condenser
is minimal activity in order to limit the risk of ac- cooling fins when moving the unit.
cidental physical damage.
Lifting Weights
• To prevent inadvertent operation of the pressure
For details of weights and weight distribution, refer to
relief devices the unit must not be steam cleaned.
the data shipped in the chiller information packet and
• It is recommended that the unit is periodically in- unit nameplate.
spected during storage.
The unit should be lifted by inserting
INSPECTION hooks through the holes provided in unit
base rails. Spreader bars should be used
Remove any transit packing and inspect the unit to en-
to avoid crushing the unit frame rails
sure that all components have been delivered and that
with the lifting chains (see Figure 7 on
no damage has occurred during transit. If any damage
page 36).
is evident, it should be noted on the carrier’s freight bill
and a claim entered in accordance with the instructions
given on the advice note.

JOHNSON CONTROLS 35
 FORM 150.72-NM2 (811)
SECTION 3 – HANDLING AND STORAGE
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011

Rigging Instructions Never lift the chiller using a forklift or

Use spreader bars to avoid lifting chains hitting the by hooking to the top rails. Use only the
chiller. lifting holes provided.

Lifting Instructions are placed on a label on the chiller

and on the shipping bag.

TYPICAL LIFTING ARRANGEMENT - 8 FAN MODELS LD13137

LD13140

TYPICAL LIFTING ARRANGEMENT - 4 FAN MODELS

Figure 7 - UNIT RIGGING/LIFTING

36 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.72-NM2 (811)
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011

SECTION 4 – INSTALLATION
To ensure warranty coverage, this equip- LOCATION AND CLEARANCES
ment must be commissioned and serviced
by an authorized Johnson Controls These units are designed for outdoor installations on
service mechanic or a qualified service ground level, rooftop, or beside a building. Location
person experienced in chiller installation. should be selected for minimum sun exposure and to
Installation must comply with all appli- insure adequate supply of fresh air for the condenser.
cable codes, particularly in regard to elec- The units must be installed with sufficient clearances
trical wiring and other safety elements for air entrance to the condenser coil, for air discharge
such as relief valves, HP cutout settings, away from the condenser, and for servicing access.
design working pressures, and ventilation In installations where winter operation is intended and
requirements consistent with the amount snow accumulations are expected, additional height
and type of refrigerant charge. must be provided to ensure normal condenser air flow.
Lethal voltages exist within the control Clearances are listed in Figure 27 on page 101. 4
panels. Before servicing, open and tag
all disconnect switches. Foundation
INSTALLATION CHECKLIST The unit should be mounted on a flat and level foun-
dation, floor, or rooftop capable of supporting the en-
The following items, 1 through 5, must be checked be- tire operating weight of the equipment. See “PHYSI-
fore placing the units in operation. CAL DATA (ENGLISH)” on page 48 for operating
1. Inspect the unit for shipping damage. weight. If the unit is elevated beyond the normal reach
of service personnel, a suitable catwalk must be capa-
2. Rig unit using spreader bars. ble of supporting service personnel, their equipment,
3. Open the unit only to install water piping sys- and the compressors.
tem. Do not remove protective covers from water
Ground Level Locations
connections until piping is ready for attachment.
Check water piping to ensure cleanliness. It is important that the units be installed on a substantial
base that will not settle. A one piece concrete slab with
4. Pipe unit using good piping practice (see ASHRAE footers extended below the frost line is highly recom-
handbook section 215 and 195). mended. Additionally, the slab should not be tied to the
5. Check to see that the unit is installed and oper- main building foundations as noise and vibration may
ated within limitations (Refer “OPERATIONAL be transmitted. Mounting holes (5/8” dia.) are provided
LIMITATIONS (ENGLISH)” on page 45). in the steel channel for bolting the unit to its foundation
(see “DIMENSIONS (ENGLISH)” on page 94).
The following pages outline detailed procedures to be
followed to install and start-up the chiller. For ground level installations, precautions should be
taken to protect the unit from tampering by or injury to
HANDLING unauthorized persons. Screws and/or latches on access
panels will prevent casual tampering. However, further
These units are shipped as completely assembled units
safety precautions such as a fenced-in enclosure or
containing full operating charge, and care should be
locking devices on the panels may be advisable.
taken to avoid damage due to rough handling.
Rooftop Locations
INSPECTION
Choose a spot with adequate structural strength to
Immediately upon receiving the unit, it should be in-
safely support the entire weight of the unit and service
spected for possible damage which may have occurred
personnel. Care must be taken not to damage the roof.
during transit. If damage is evident, it should be noted
in the carrier’s freight bill. A written request for inspec- Consult the building contractor or architect if the roof
tion by the carrier’s agent should be made at once. See is bonded. Roof installations should have wooden
“Instruction” manual, Form 50.15-NM for more infor- beams (treated to reduce deterioration), cork, rubber,
mation and details. or spring type vibration isolators under the base to min-
imize vibration.
JOHNSON CONTROLS 37
 FORM 150.72-NM2 (811)
SECTION 4 – INSTALLATION
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011

Noise Sensitive Locations A small valve or valves should be installed at the high-
Efforts should be made to assure that the chiller is not est point or points in the chilled water piping to allow
located next to occupied spaces or noise sensitive areas any trapped air to be purged. Vent and drain connec-
where chiller noise level would be a problem. Chiller tions should be extended beyond the insulation to make
noise is a result of compressor and fan operation. them accessible.
The piping to and from the cooler must be designed to
SPRING ISOLATORS (OPTIONAL)
suit the individual installation. It is important that the
When ordered, four (4) isolators will be furnished. following considerations be observed:
Identify the isolator, locate at the proper mounting 1. The chilled liquid piping system should be laid
point, and adjust per instructions. out so that the circulating pump discharges di-
rectly into the cooler. The suction for this pump
COMPRESSOR MOUNTING should be taken from the piping system return line
The compressors are mounted on four (4) rubber iso- and not the cooler. This piping scheme is recom-
lators. The mounting bolts should not be loosened or mended, but is not mandatory.
adjusted at installation of the chiller. 2. The inlet and outlet cooler connection sizes are
provided in Table 5 on page 48 (Physical Data).
REMOTE COOLER OPTION
3. A strainer, preferably 40 mesh, must be installed
Not available at this time. in the cooler inlet line just ahead of the cooler.
This is important to protect the cooler from en-
CHILLED LIQUID PIPING
trance of large particles which could cause dam-
General – When the unit(s) has been located in its fi- age to the evaporator.
nal position, the unit water piping may be connected.
Normal installation precautions should be observed in 4. All chilled liquid piping should be thoroughly
order to receive maximum operating efficiencies. Pip- flushed to free it from foreign material before
ing should be kept free of all foreign matter. All chilled the system is placed into operation. Use care not
water evaporator piping must comply in all respects to flush any foreign material into or through the
with local plumbing codes and ordinances. cooler.
5. As an aid to servicing, thermometers and pressure
Since elbows, tees and valves decrease pump capacity,
gauges should be installed in the inlet and outlet
all piping should be kept as straight and as simple as
water lines.
possible. All piping must be supported independent
of the chiller. 6. The chilled water lines that are exposed to out-
door ambients should be wrapped with supple-
Consideration should be given to com- mental heater cable and insulated to protect
pressor access when laying out water against freeze-up during low ambient periods, and
piping. Routing the water piping too close to prevent formation of condensation on lines in
to the unit could make compressor servic- warm humid locations. As an alternative, ethylene
ing/replacement difficult. glycol should be added to protect against freeze-
up during low ambient periods.
Hand stop valves should be installed in all lines to fa-
7. A chilled water flow switch, (either by YORK or
cilitate servicing.
others) MUST be installed in the leaving water
Piping to the inlet and outlet connections of the chiller piping of the cooler. There should be a straight
should include high-pressure rubber hose or piping horizontal run of at least 5 diameters on each side
loops to ensure against transmission of water pump vi- of the switch. Adjust the flow switch paddle to the
bration. The necessary components must be obtained size of the pipe in which it is to be installed (see
in the field. manufacturer’s instructions furnished with the
Drain connections should be provided at all low points switch). The switch is to be wired to Terminals 13
to permit complete drainage of the cooler and system and 14 of XTBC1 located in the control panel, as
water piping. shown on the unit wiring diagram.

38 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.72-NM2 (811)
SECTION 4 – INSTALLATION
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011

The Flow Switch MUST NOT be used General Requirements

to start and stop the chiller (i.e. starting The following duct work recommendations are intend-
and stopping the chilled water pump). It ed to ensure satisfactory operation of the unit. Failure
is intended only as a safety switch. to follow these recommendations could cause damage
to the unit, or loss of performance, and may invalidate
the warranty.
PIPEWORK ARRANGEMENT
The following are suggested pipework arrangements When ducting is to be fitted to the fan discharge it is
for single unit installations, for multiple unit installa- recommended that the duct should be the same cross-
tions, each unit should be piped as shown. sectional area as the fan outlet and straight for at least
three feet (1 meter) to obtain static regain from the fan.
Recommendations of the Building Services Re- Duct work should be suspended with flexible hang-
search Association. ers to prevent noise and vibration being transmitted to
the structure. A flexible joint is also recommended be-
tween the duct attached to the fan and the next section
for the same reason. Flexible connectors should not be 4
allowed to concertina.
The unit(s) is not designed to take structural loading.
No significant amount of weight should be allowed to
rest on the fan outlet flange, deck assemblies or con-
denser coil module. No more than 3 feet (1 meter) of
light construction duct work should be supported by
the unit. Where cross winds may occur, any duct work
LD06596
must be supported to prevent side loading on the unit.

ISOLATING VALVE - NORMALLY OPEN If the ducts from two or more fans are to be combined
into a common duct, back-flow dampers should be fit-
ISOLATING VALVE - NORMALLY CLOSED ted in the individual fan ducts. This will prevent re-
circulation of air when only one of the fans is running.
Units are supplied with outlet guards for safety and to
FLOW REGULATING VALVE
prevent damage to the fan blades. If these guards are
removed to fit duct work, adequate alternative precau-
tions must be taken to ensure persons cannot be harmed
FLOW MEASUREMENT DEVICE or put at risk from rotating fan blades.

WIRING
STRAINER Liquid Chillers are shipped with all factory-mounted
controls wired for operation.
Field Wiring – Power wiring must be provided
PRESSURE TAPPING
through a fused disconnect switch to the unit terminals
(or optional molded disconnect switch) in accordance
with N.E.C. or local code requirements. Minimum cir-
FLOW SWITCH cuit ampacity and maximum dual element fuse size are
given in the Electrical Data tables.
LD06597A
FLANGED CONNECTION
Copper power wiring only should be used for supply-
ing power to the chiller. This is recommended to avoid
Figure 8 - CHILLED LIQUID SYSTEM safety and reliability issues resulting from connection

JOHNSON CONTROLS 39
 FORM 150.72-NM2 (811)
SECTION 4 – INSTALLATION
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011

failure at the power connections to the chiller. Alumi- tive contacts will open when the unit is shut down on
num wiring is not recommended due to thermal char- a unit fault, or locked out on a system fault. Field con-
acteristics that may cause loose terminations result- nections are at XTBC2 - Terminals 29 to 30 (system 1),
ing from the contraction and expansion of the wiring. and Terminals 31 to 32 (system 2).
Aluminum oxide may also build up at the termination
Remote Start/Stop Contacts
causing hot spots and eventual failure. If aluminum
wiring is used to supply power to the chiller, AL-CU To remotely start and stop the chiller, dry contacts can
compression fittings should be used to transition from be wired across terminals 13 and 51 on XTBC1. Refer
aluminum to copper. This transition should be done in to Figure 4 on page 25, Figure 10 on page 43 and
an external box separate to the power panel. Copper unit wiring diagram.
conductors can then be run from the box to the chiller.
Remote Emergency Cutoff
A 120-1-60, 15 amp source must be supplied for the
control panel through a fused disconnect when a con- Immediate shutdown of the chiller can be accom-
trol panel transformer (optional) is not provided (Refer plished by opening a field-installed dry contact to
to Figure 9 on page 42). break the elec­trical circuit between Terminals 5 to L on
terminal block XTBC2 . The unit is shipped with a fac-
See unit wiring diagrams for field and power wiring tory jumper installed between Terminals 5 to L, which
connections, chilled water pump starter contacts, alarm must be removed if emergency shutdown contacts are
contacts, compressor run status contacts, PWM input, installed. Refer to Figure 10 on page 43 and unit wir-
and load limit input. Refer to “SECTION 8 – UNIT ing diagram.
OPERATION” on page 153 for a detailed description
of operation concerning aforementioned contacts and Remote Temp Reset Input
inputs. The Remote Temp Reset input allows reset of the
chilled liquid set­point by supplying a voltage or current
Evaporator Pump Start Contacts
signal field wiring should be connected to XTBC1 –
Terminal block XTBC2 – Terminals 23 (115VAC) to Terminals A+ to A-. A detailed explanation is provided
24, are nor­mally- open contacts that can be used to in “SECTION 7 – UNIT CONTROLS” on page 123.
switch field supplied power to provide a start signal Refer to Figure 3 on page 24, Figure 4 on page 25
to the evapo­rator pump contactor. The contacts will be and unit wiring diagram.
closed when any of the following conditions occur:
Load Limit Input
1. Low Leaving Chilled Liquid Fault
Load limiting is a feature that prevents the unit from
2. Any compressor is running loading beyond a desired value. The unit can be “load
3. Daily schedule is not programmed OFF and the limited” either 33%, 40%, 50%, 66% or 80%, depend-
Unit Switch is ON ing on the number of compressors on unit. The field
The pump will not run if the micro panel has been connections are wired to XTBC1 – Terminals 13 to 21,
powered up for less than 30 seconds, or if the pump and work in conjunction with the PWM inputs. A de-
has run in the last 30 seconds, to prevent pump motor tailed explanation is provided in “SECTION 7 – UNIT
overheating. Refer to Figure 11 on page 44 and unit CONTROLS” on page 123. Refer to Figure 4 on page
wiring dia­gram. 25, Figure 10 on page 43 and unit wiring diagram.

System Run Contacts When using the Load Limit feature, the
PWM feature will not function – SIMUL-
Contacts are available to monitor system status. Nor- TANEOUS OPERATION OF LOAD
mally‑open auxiliary contacts from each com­pressor LIMITING AND TEM­P ERATURE
contactor are wired in parallel with XTBC2 – Termi- RESET (PWM INPUT) CANNOT BE
nals 25 to 26 for system 1, and XTBC2 – Terminals DONE.
27 to 28 for system 2. Refer to Figure 4 on page 25,
Figure 11 on page 44 and unit wiring diagram. Flow Switch Input

Alarm Status Contacts The flow switch is field wired to XTBC1 Terminals
13 and 14. See Figure 4 on page 25 and unit wiring
Normally‑open contacts are available for each re­ diagram.
frigerant system. These normally‑open contacts close
when the system is functioning normally. The respec-
40 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.72-NM2 (811)
SECTION 4 – INSTALLATION
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011

COMPRESSOR HEATERS RELIEF VALVES

Compressor heaters are standard. ZP103, ZP120 and Relief valves are located on both the high and low pres-
ZP137 compressors utilize 90W heaters; ZP180 com- sure side of the piping. High side relief valve pressure
pressors utilize 70W heaters; ZP235 compressors uti- setting is 650 PSIG. Low side relief valve pressure
lize 120W heaters. If power is OFF more than two setting is 450 PSIG.
hours, the crankcase heaters must be energized for 18
– 24 hours prior to restarting a compressor. This will HIGH PRESSURE CUTOUT
assure that liquid slugging and oil dilution does not A high pressure cutout is installed in the discharge pip-
damage the compressors on start. ing of each system. The cutout opens at 585 PSIG plus
or minus 10 PSIG and closes at 440 PSIG plus or mi-
nus 25 PSIG.

JOHNSON CONTROLS 41
 FORM 150.72-NM2 (811)
SECTION 4 – INSTALLATION
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011

SINGLE-POINT SUPPLY CONNECTION – TERMINAL BLOCK, NON-FUSED

DISCONNECT SWITCH OR CIRCUIT BREAKER

Power Panel Control Panel

14

13 XTBC1
Terminal Block, MICROPANEL
NF Disconnect SW
or Circuit Breaker

Flow Switch
1L1 1L2 1L3
GRD

L 2
XTBC2

Field Provided 120-1-60

Micropanel Power Supply if
Control Transformer not supplied.
Field Field supplied control power wiring
LD13141
Provided must be run in separate grounded
Unit Power conduit. Never run control wiring
LD13141
See electrical note 9 Supply in the same conduit with power
wiring.

It is possible that multiple sources of The unit evaporator heater uses 120VAC.
power can be supplying the unit power Disconnecting 120VAC power from the
panel. To prevent serious injury or unit, at or below freezing temperatures,
death, the technician should verify can result in damage to the evaporator
that NO LETHAL VOLTAGES are and unit as a result of the chilled liquid
present inside the panel AFTER dis- freezing.
connecting power, PRIOR to working
on equipment.

Figure 9 - SINGLE-POINT SUPPLY CONNECTION – TERMINAL BLOCK, NON-FUSED DISCONNECT

SWITCH OR CIRCUIT BREAKER OR CIRCUIT BREAKER

42 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.72-NM2 (811)
SECTION 4 – INSTALLATION
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011

USER CONTROL WIRING INPUTS

A-
INTERNAL
INTERNALWIRING
WIRINGTO
TOOPTIONAL
OPTIONALREMOTE
REMOTETEMP.
TEMP.RESET
RESETBOARD
BOARD
A+
14
FLOW SWITCH
13
50
13
21
REMOTE UNLOAD STEP 1 4
13
20
PWM REMOTE TEMP RESET
13
19 INTERNAL WIRING TO 2-KCR CONTROL RELAY
13
18 INTERNAL WIRING TO 1-KCR CONTROL RELAY
13
51
REMOTE START / STOP
13
XTBC1 LD13130

All externally supplied contacts must be The unit evaporator heater uses 120VAC.
capable of switching 24VDC / 115 VAC. Disconnecting 120VAC power from the
Gold contacts are recommended. If sup- unit, at or below freezing temperatures,
plied contacts are from a Relay / Contac- can result in damage to the evaporator
tor (Inductive Load), the coil of the Relay and unit as a result of the chilled liquid
/ Contactor must be suppressed. Typical freezing.
suppressor is P/N 031-00808-000.

It is possible that multiple sources of

power can be supplying the unit power
panel. To prevent serious injury or death,
the technician should verify that NO
LETHAL VOLTAGES are present inside
the panel AFTER disconnecting power,
PRIOR to working on equipment.

Figure 10 - CONTROL WIRING INPUTS

JOHNSON CONTROLS 43
 FORM 150.72-NM2 (811)
SECTION 4 – INSTALLATION
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011

USER CONTROL WIRING OUTPUTS

140 INTERNAL WIRING TO EVAPORATOR HEATER

123 INTERNAL WIRING TO HOT GAS SOLENOID VALVE
32
SYSTEM 2 ALARM DRY CONTACTS (OPEN = ALARM)
31
30
SYSTEM 1 ALARM DRY CONTACTS (OPEN = ALARM)
29
28
SYSTEM 2 RUN DRY CONTACTS (CLOSE = RUN)
27
26
SYSTEM 1 RUN DRY CONTACTS (CLOSE = RUN)
25
24 CONTACTS
EVAPORATOR PUMP DRY (CLOSE
CONTACTS = RUN)
(CLOSE = RUN
115VAC 23 BASED ON DAILY SCHEDULE)

Normally jumpered. 5 INTERNAL 120 VAC WIRING TO F1 FUSE

Can be used as
EMERGENCY STOP L INTERNAL 120 VAC WIRING (TYPICALLY FROM CONTROL TRANSFORMER)
contacts from an 2 INTERNAL NEUTRAL WIRING
external source.
2 INTERNAL NEUTRAL WIRING (TYPICALLY FROM CONTROL TRANSFORMER)
2 INTERNAL NEUTRAL WIRING
GND
LD13242
XTBC2

All chiller supplied contacts are rated at It is possible that multiple sources of
115VAC, 100VA, resistive load only, and power can be supplying the unit power
must be suppressed at the load by user panel. To prevent serious injury or death,
if powering an inductive load (Relay / the technician should verify that NO
Contactor Coil). Typical suppressor LETHAL VOLTAGES are present inside
P/N is 031-00808-000. the panel AFTER disconnecting power,
PRIOR to working on equipment.
The unit evaporator heater uses 120VAC.
Disconnecting 120VAC power from the
unit, at or below freezing temperatures,
can result in damage to the evaporator
and unit as a result of the chilled liquid
freezing.

Figure 11 - CONTROL WIRING OUTPUTS

44 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.72-NM2 (811)
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011

SECTION 5 – TECHNICAL DATA

OPERATIONAL LIMITATIONS (ENGLISH)
Table 2 - TEMPERATURES AND FLOWS

TEMPERATURE AIR ON CONDENSER (°F)

UNIT DESIGNA- WATER FLOW WATER FLOW
TION (GPM) MIN (GPM) MAX
MIN (°F) MAX (°F) MIN MAX

YLAA0070 40 55 60 285 0 125

YLAA0080 40 55 100 355 0 125

YLAA0090 40 55 140 625 0 125

YLAA0091 40 55 100 385 0 125

YLAA0101 40 55 100 385 0 125

YLAA0115 40 55 100 385 0 125

YLAA0120 40 55 150 625 0 125

YLAA0135 40 55 120 625 0 125

YLAA0150 40 55 120 625 0 125

YLAA0155 40 55 150 625 0 125
5
Notes:
1. For leaving brine temperature below 40°F (4.4°C), contact your nearest Johnson Controls Office for application requirements.
2. For leaving water temperature higher than 55°F (12.8°C), contact the nearest Johnson Controls Office for application guidelines. 3. The
evaporator is protected against freezing to -20°F (-28.8°C) with an electric heater as standard.
3. For operation at temperatures below 25°F (-3.9°C), the optional Low Ambient Kit will need to be installed on the system (for YLAA0014­0080
models only).
4. For operation at temperatures above 115°F (46.1°C), the optional High Ambient Kit will need to be installed on the system.

Excessive flow will cause damage to the Voltage Limitations

cooler. Do not exceed maximum cooler The following voltage limitations are absolute and
flow. Special care should be taken when operation beyond these limitations may cause serious
multiple chillers are fed by a single pump. damage to the compressor.

Table 3 - VOLTAGE LIMITATIONS

UNIT POWER MIN. MAX.
200-3-60 180 220
230-3-60 207 253
380-3-60 355 415
460-3-60 414 506
575-3-60 517 633

JOHNSON CONTROLS 45
 FORM 150.72-NM2 (811)
SECTION 5 – TECHNICAL DATA
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011

HEAT EXCHANGER FLOW, GPM

YLAA Evaporator Pressure Drop (IP Units)

100.0

B F
Pressure Drop (ft H2O)

10.0

A E
C

1.0
10 100 1000
Water Flow Rate (GPM) Pressure drop Curve

EVAPORATOR YLAA MODELS

A 70SE
B 80SE
C 91HE,101HE, 115SE
D 120SE, 155SE
E 90SE
F 135SE, 150SE

Table 4 - ETHYLENE & PROPYLENE GLYCOL CORRECTION FACTORS

ETHYLENE GLYCOL PROPYLENE GLYCOL
% COMPR GPM F/ PRESS FREEZE % COMPR GPM F/ PRESS FREEZE
TONS TONS
WEIGHT KW TON DROP PT WEIGHT KW TON DROP PT
10.0 1.0 1.0 24.3 1.0 26.2 10.0 1.0 1.0 24.0 1.0 26.0
20.0 1.0 1.0 25.1 1.1 17.9 20.0 1.0 1.0 24.3 1.1 19.0
30.0 1.0 1.0 25.9 1.2 6.7 30.0 1.0 1.0 24.9 1.3 9.0
40.0 1.0 1.0 26.9 1.4 -8.1 40.0 1.0 1.0 25.6 1.4 -6.0
50.0 1.0 1.0 28.0 1.6 -28.9 50.0 0.9 1.0 26.6 1.7 -28.0
Note: Water Pressure Drop Curves may extend past the minimum and maximum water flow ranges.

46 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.72-NM2 (811)
SECTION 5 – TECHNICAL DATA
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

JOHNSON CONTROLS 47
 FORM 150.72-NM2 (811)
SECTION 5 – TECHNICAL DATA
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011

PHYSICAL DATA (ENGLISH)

YLAA0070_ – YLAA0175_ 60Hz
Table 5 - PHYSICAL DATA (ENGLISH)
MODEL NUMBER YLAA
REFRIGERANT R-410A STANDARD EFFICIENCY UNITS
070SE 0080SE 0090SE 0100SE 0115SE 0120SE 0135SE 0150SE 0155SE 0170SE
General Unit Data
Nominal Tons, R-410A 71.8 77.7 85.8 95.8 113.9 119.7 127.3 140.4 143.1 167.9
Length 116.1 116.1 116.1 142.7 142.7 142.7 187.7 187.7 187.7 232.7
Width 88 88 88 88 88 88 88 88 88 88
Height 94.2 94.2 94.2 94.2 94.2 94.2 94.2 94.2 94.2 94.2
Number of Refrigerant
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
Circuits
Refrigerant Charge, Operating
R-410A, Circuit 1 / Circuit
51 / 50 54 / 52 57 / 57 55 / 58 62 / 58 65 / 62 81 / 71 81 / 73 83 / 76 90 / 87
2, lbs
Oil Charge, Circuit 1 / 2.58 / 3.28 / 3.28 / 3.28 / 3.33/ 3.33/ 4.99 / 4.99 / 4.99 / 4.99 /
Circuit 2, Gallons 2.58 2.58 2.76 3.33 3.33 3.33 2.76 3.33 3.33 4.99
Shipping Weight 4112 4541 4949 5407 5644 5921 6803 6958 7152 7972
Operating Weight 4450 4948 5435 5835 6072 6473 7260 7415 7705 8429
Compressors, Scroll Type
Compressors Per Circuit 3/3 3/3 3/2 3/2 2/2 3/2 3/2 3/2 3/2 3/3
Compressors Per Unit 6 6 5 5 4 4 5 5 5 6
Nominal Tons Per Compressor
Circuit 1 13 15 15 15 32 32 32 32 3 32
Circuit 2 13 13 15/32 32 32 32 15/32 32 32 32
Condenser
Total Face Area Per
106.9 106.9 106.9 133.6 160.3 160.3 213.8 213.8 213.8 267.2
Square Foot
Number of Rows 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Fins per Inch 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20
Condenser Fans, Low Sound
Number of Fans, Circuit
2/2 2/2 2/2 3/2 3/3 3/3 4/4 4/4 4/4 5/5
1 / Circuit 2
Fan HP 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
Fan RPM 1160 1160 1160 1160 1160 1160 1160 1160 1160 1160
Total Chiller CFM 62400 62400 62400 78000 93600 93600 124800 124800 124800 156000
Evaporator
Water Volume, Gallons 40 49 58 51 51 66 55 55 66 55
Maximum Water Side
150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150
Pressure, PSIG
Maximum Refrigerant
450 450 450 450 450 450 450 450 450 450
Side Pressure, PSIG
Minimum Chiller Water
60 100 140 100 100 150 120 120 150 120
Flow Rate, GPM
Maximum Chiller Water
285 355 625 385 385 625 625 625 625 625
Flow Rate, GPM
Water Connections Size,
6 6 8 6 6 8 8 8 8 8
Inches
48 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.72-NM2 (811)
SECTION 5 – TECHNICAL DATA
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011

TABLE 5 – PHYSICAL DATA (ENGLISH) (CONT’D)

MODEL NUMBER YLAA
REFRIGERANT R-410A HIGH EFFICIENCY UNITS
0091HE 0101HE 0125HE 0141HE 0156HE 0175HE
General Unit Data
Nominal Tons, R-410A 88.1 98.3 117 130.6 145.6 174.2
Length 142.7 142.7 187.7 187.7 232.7 232.7
Width 88 88 88 88 88 88
Height 94.2 94.2 94.2 94.2 94.2 94.2
Number of Refrigerant
2 2 2 2 2 2
Circuits
Refrigerant Charge, Operating
R-410A, Circuit 1 / Circuit
59 / 55 55 / 71 75 / 71 83 / 73 90 / 82 94 / 92
2, lbs
Oil Charge, Circuit 1 /
2.76 / 2.76 3.28/3.33 3.33/3.33 4.99 / 2.76 4.99 / 3.33 4.99 / 4.99
Circuit 2, Gallons
Shipping Weight 5334 5569 6485 6997 7582 8313
5
Operating Weight 5762 5997 6913 7549 8039 8956
Compressors, Scroll Type
Compressors Per Circuit 2/2 3/2 2/2 3/2 3/2 3/3
Compressors Per Unit 4 5 4 5 5 6
Nominal Tons Per Compressor
Circuit 1 15/32 5 32 32 32 32
Circuit 2 15/32 32 32 15/32 32 32
Condenser
Total Face Area Per
160.3 160.3 213.8 213.8 267.2 267.2
Square Foot
Number of Rows 1 1 1 1 1 1
Fins per Inch 20 20 20 20 20 20
Condenser Fans, Low Sound
Number of Fans, Circuit
3/3 4/2 4/4 4/4 4/6 5/5
1 / Circuit 2
Fan HP 2 2 2 2 2 2
Fan RPM 1160 1160 1160 1160 1160 1160
Total Chiller CFM 93600 93600 124800 124800 156000 156000
Evaporator
Water Volume, Gallons 51 51 51 66 55 77
Maximum Water Side
150 150 150 150 150 150
Pressure, PSIG
Maximum Refrigerant
450 450 450 450 450 450
Side Pressure, PSIG
Minimum Chiller Water
100 100 100 150 120 120
Flow Rate, GPM
Maximum Chiller Water
385 385 385 625 625 625
Flow Rate, GPM
Water Connections Size,
6 6 6 8 8 8
Inches

JOHNSON CONTROLS 49
 FORM 150.72-NM2 (811)
SECTION 5 – TECHNICAL DATA
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011

ELECTRICAL DATA
Table 6 - MICRO PANEL POWER SUPPLY

CONTROL OVER CURRENT PROTECTION,

UNIT VOLTAGE MCA
POWER SEE NOTE B NF DISC SW
UNIT NOTE A
MODELS W/O MIN MAX
VOLTAGE
CONTROL 115-1-60/50
15A 10A 15A 30 A / 240V
TRANS
-17 200-1-60 15A 10A 15A 30 A / 240V
-28 230-1-60 15A 10A 15A 30 A / 240V
MODELS W/
-40 380-1-60 15A 10A 15A 30 A / 480V
CONTROL
-46 460-1-60 15A 10A 15A 30 A / 480V
TRANS
-50 380/415-1-60 15A 10A 15A 30A / 415V
-58 575-1-60 15A 10A 15A 30 A / 600V
A. Minimum #14 AWG, 75 °C, Copper Recommended
B. Minimum and Maximum Over Current Protection, Dual Element Fuse or Circuit Breaker

It is possible that multiple sources of The unit evaporator heater uses 120VAC.
power can be supplying the unit power Disconnecting 120VAC power from the
panel. To prevent serious injury or death, unit, at or below freezing temperatures,
the technician should verify that NO can result in damage to the evaporator
LETHAL VOLTAGES are present inside and unit as a result of the chilled liquid
the panel AFTER disconnecting power, freezing.
PRIOR to working on equipment.

Table 7 - VOLTAGE RANGE

VOLTAGE RANGE
VOLTAGE CODE UNIT POWER MIN. MAX.
-17 200-3-60 180 220
-28 230-3-60 207 253
-40 380/415-3-60 342 440
-46 460-3-60 414 506
-50 380/415-3-50 342 440
-58 575-3-60 517 633

50 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.72-NM2 (811)
SECTION 5 – TECHNICAL DATA
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011

ELECTRICAL NOTES
NOTES:
1. Minimum Circuit Ampacity (MCA) is based on of the rated load amps for all other loads includ-
125% of the rated load amps for the largest mo- ed in the circuit. Otherwise, HACR‑type circuit
tor plus 100% of the rated load amps for all other breakers must be used. Maximum HACR circuit
loads included in the circuit, per N.E.C. Article breaker rating is based on 225% of the rated load
430‑24. If the optional Factory Mounted Con- amps for the largest motor plus 100% of the rated
trol Transformer is provided, add the following load amps for all other loads included in the cir-
MCA values to the electrical tables for the system cuit.
providing power to the transformer: ‑17, add 2.5
6. The “INCOMING WIRE RANGE” is the mini-
amps; ‑28, add 2.3 amps; ‑40, add 1.5 amps, ‑46,
mum and maximum wire size that can be ac-
add 1.3 amps; ‑58, add 1 amps.
commodated by the unit wiring lugs. The (2)
2. The minimum recommended disconnect switch is preceding the wire range indicates the number of
based on 115% of the rated load amps for all loads termination points available per phase of the wire
included in the circuit, per N.E.C. Article 440. range specified. Actual wire size and number of
wires per phase must be determined based on the
3. Minimum fuse size is based upon 150% of the
National Electrical Code, using copper connec-
rated load amps for the largest motor plus 100%
tors only. Field wiring must also comply with lo-
of the rated load amps for all other loads included
cal codes.
in the circuit to avoid nuisance trips at start‑up due
to lock rotor amps. It is not recommended in ap- 7. A ground lug is provided for each compressor
plications where brown outs, frequent starting and system to accommodate a field grounding con- 5
stopping of the unit, and/or operation at ambient ductor per N.E.C. Table 250‑95. A control circuit
temperatures in excess of 95ºF (35ºC) is antici- grounding lug is also supplied.
pated.
8. The supplied disconnect is a “Disconnecting
4. Maximum fuse size is based upon 225% of the Means” as defined in the N.E.C. 100, and is in-
rated load amps for the largest motor plus 100% tended for isolating the unit for the available pow-
of the rated load amps for all other loads included er supply to perform maintenance and trouble-
in the circuit, per N.E.C. Article 440-22. shooting. This disconnect is not intended to be a
Load Break Device.
5. Circuit breakers must be UL listed and CSA certi-
fied and maximum size is based on 225% of the 9. Field Wiring by others which complies to the Na-
rated load amps for the largest motor plus 100% tional Electrical Code and Local Codes.

LEGEND VOLTAGE CODE

ACR-LINE ACROSS THE LINE START -17 = 200-3-60
C.B. CIRCUIT BREAKER -28 = 230-3-60
D.E. DUAL ELEMENT FUSE -40 = 380-3-60
-46 = 460-3-60
DISC SW DISCONNECT SWITCH
-50 = 380/415-3-50
FACT MOUNT CB FACTORY MOUNTED CIRCUIT BREAKER
-58 = 575-3-60
FLA FULL LOAD AMPS
HZ HERTZ
MAX MAXIMUM
MCA MINIMUM CIRCUIT AMPACITY
MIN MINIMUM
MIN NF MINIMUM NON FUSED
RLA RATED LOAD AMPS
S.P. WIRE SINGLE POINT WIRING
UNIT MTD SERV SW UNIT MOUNTED SERVICE (NON-FUSED DISCONNECT
LRA LOCKED ROTOR AMPS

JOHNSON CONTROLS 51
 FORM 150.72-NM2 (811)
SECTION 5 – TECHNICAL DATA
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011

Table 8 - ELECTRICAL DATA W/O PUMPS

MIN MIN MAX

VOLTAGE N/F DUAL DUAL
CHILLER MODEL MIN CKT. AMPS
CODE DISC ELEM ELEM FUSE
SW FUSE & MAX CB

17 351 400 400 400

28 350 400 400 400
YLAA0070SE 40 186 250 200 200
46 160 200 175 175
58 136 200 150 150
17 366 600 400 400
28 365 600 400 400
YLAA0080SE 40 216 250 225 250
46 173 200 200 200
58 148 200 175 175
17 391 600 450 500
28 390 600 450 450
YLAA0090SE 40 249 400 300 300
46 192 250 225 225
58 168 200 200 200
17 452 600 500 500
28 451 600 500 500
YLAA0100SE 40 286 400 350 350
46 223 250 250 250
58 197 250 225 225
17 511 600 600 600
28 510 600 600 600
YLAA0115SE
40 321 400 350 350
YLAA0120SE
46 256 400 300 300
58 227 250 250 250
17 582 800 700 700
28 581 800 700 700
YLAA0135SE 40 366 600 400 400
46 291 400 350 350
58 257 400 300 300
17 636 800 700 700
28 635 800 700 700
YLAA00150SE
40 399 600 450 450
YLAA0155SE
46 318 400 350 350
58 283 400 300 300
17 761 1000 800 800
28 759 1000 800 800
YLAA0170HE 40 478 600 500 500
46 381 600 400 400
58 338 400 400 400

52 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.72-NM2 (811)
SECTION 5 – TECHNICAL DATA
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011

SYSTEM # 1 SYSTEM # 2
COMPR 1 COMPR 2 COMPR 3 FAN COMPR 1 COMPR 2 COMPR 3 FAN

RLA LRA RLA LRA RLA LRA QTY FLA LRA RLA LRA RLA LRA RLA LRA QTY FLA LRA

51 300 51 300 51 300 2 7.6 31 51 300 51 300 51 300 2 7.6 31

51 300 51 300 51 300 2 7.4 37 51 300 51 300 51 300 2 7.4 37
27 139 27 139 27 139 2 4.5 22 27 139 27 139 27 139 2 4.5 22
23 150 23 150 23 150 2 4.0 19 23 150 23 150 23 150 2 4.0 19
20 109 20 109 20 109 2 2.9 15 20 109 20 109 20 109 2 2.9 15
56 425 56 425 56 425 2 7.6 31 51 300 51 300 51 300 2 7.6 31
56 425 56 425 56 425 2 7.4 37 51 300 51 300 51 300 2 7.4 37
36 239 36 239 36 239 2 4.5 22 27 139 27 139 27 139 2 4.5 22
27 187 27 187 27 187 2 4.0 19 23 150 23 150 23 150 2 4.0 19
24 148 24 148 24 148 2 2.9 15 20 109 20 109 20 109 2 2.9 15
56 425 56 425 56 425 2 7.6 31 110 599 56 425 2 7.6 31
56 425 56 425 56 425 2 7.4 37 110 599 56 425 2 7.4 37
36 239 36 239 36 239 2 4.5 22 69 358 36 239 2 4.5 22
27 187 27 187 27 187 2 4.0 19 55 310 27 187 2 4.0 19
24 148 24 148 24 148 2 2.9 15 49 239 24 148 2 2.9 15
56
56
425
425
56
56
425
425
56
56
425
425
2
2
7.6
7.4
31
37
110
110
599
599
110
110
599
599
3
3
7.6
7.4
31
37
5
36 239 36 239 36 239 2 4.5 22 69 358 69 358 3 4.5 22
27 187 27 187 27 187 2 4.0 19 55 310 55 310 3 4.0 19
24 148 24 148 24 148 2 2.9 15 49 239 49 239 3 2.9 15
110 599 110 599 3 7.6 31 110 599 110 599 3 7.6 31
110 599 110 599 3 7.4 37 110 599 110 599 3 7.4 37
69 358 69 358 3 4.5 22 69 358 69 358 3 4.5 22
55 310 55 310 3 4.0 19 55 310 55 310 3 4.0 19
49 239 49 239 3 2.9 15 49 239 49 239 3 2.9 15
110 599 110 599 110 599 4 7.6 31 110 599 56 425 4 7.6 31
110 599 110 599 110 599 4 7.4 37 110 599 56 425 4 7.4 37
69 358 69 358 69 358 4 4.5 22 69 358 36 239 4 4.5 22
55 310 55 310 55 310 4 4.0 19 55 310 27 187 4 4.0 19
49 239 49 239 49 239 4 2.9 15 49 239 24 148 4 2.9 15
110 599 110 599 110 599 4 7.6 31 110 599 110 599 4 7.6 31
110 599 110 599 110 599 4 7.4 37 110 599 110 599 4 7.4 37
69 358 69 358 69 358 4 4.5 22 69 358 69 358 4 4.5 22
55 310 55 310 55 310 4 4.0 19 55 310 55 310 4 4.0 19
49 239 49 239 49 239 4 2.9 15 49 239 49 239 4 2.9 15
109.6 599 109.6 599 109.6 599 5 7.6 30.9 109.6 599 110.0 599 109.6 599 5 7.6 30.9
109.6 599 109.6 599 109.6 599 5 7.4 37.0 109.6 599 110.0 599 109.6 599 5 7.4 37.0
69.2 358 69.2 358 69.2 358 5 4.5 22.3 69.2 358 69.2 358 69.2 358 5 4.5 22.3
54.5 310 54.5 310 54.5 310 5 4.0 19.0 54.5 310 54.5 310 54.5 310 5 4.0 19.0
49.4 239 49.4 239 49.4 239 5 2.9 14.6 49.4 239 49.4 239 49.4 239 5 2.9 14.6

JOHNSON CONTROLS 53
 FORM 150.72-NM2 (811)
SECTION 5 – TECHNICAL DATA
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011

TABLE 8 - ELECTRICAL DATA W/O PUMPS (CONT’D)

MIN MIN MAX

VOLTAGE N/F DUAL DUAL
CHILLER MODEL MIN CKT. AMPS
CODE DISC ELEM ELEM FUSE
SW FUSE & MAX CB

17 404 600 450 500

28 403 600 450 500
YLAA0091HE 40 255 400 300 300
46 200 250 225 250
58 176 250 200 225
17 460 600 500 500
28 458 600 500 500
YLAA0101HE 40 291 400 350 350
46 227 250 250 250
58 200 250 225 225
17 527 600 600 600
28 525 600 600 600
YLAA0125HE 40 330 400 350 350
46 264 400 300 300
58 233 400 250 250
17 582 800 700 700
28 581 800 700 700
YLAA0141HE 40 366 600 400 400
46 291 400 350 350
58 257 400 300 300
17 651 800 700 700
28 649 800 700 700
YLAA0156HE 40 408 600 450 450
46 326 400 350 350
58 288 400 350 350
17 761 1000 800 800
28 759 1000 800 800
YLAA0175HE 40 478 600 500 500
46 381 600 400 400
58 338 400 400 400

54 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.72-NM2 (811)
SECTION 5 – TECHNICAL DATA
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011

SYSTEM # 1 SYSTEM # 2
COMPR 1 COMPR 2 COMPR 3 FAN COMPR 1 COMPR 2 COMPR 3 FAN

RLA LRA RLA LRA RLA LRA QTY FLA LRA RLA LRA RLA LRA RLA LRA QTY FLA LRA

109.6 599 55.8 425 3 7.6 30.9 109.6 599 55.8 425 3 7.6 30.9
109.6 599 55.8 425 3 7.4 37.0 109.6 599 55.8 425 3 7.4 37.0
69.2 358 36.0 239 3 4.5 22.3 69.2 358 36.0 239 3 4.5 22.3
54.5 310 26.9 187 3 4.0 19.0 54.5 310 26.9 187 3 4.0 19.0
49.4 239 23.7 148 3 2.9 14.6 49.4 239 23.7 148 3 2.9 14.6
55.8 425 55.8 425 55.8 425 2 7.6 30.9 109.6 599 109.6 599 4 7.6 30.9
55.8 425 55.8 425 55.8 425 2 7.4 37.0 109.6 599 109.6 599 4 7.4 37.0
36.0 239 36.0 239 36.0 239 2 4.5 22.3 69.2 358 69.2 358 4 4.5 22.3
26.9 187 26.9 187 26.9 187 2 4.0 19.0 54.5 310 54.5 310 4 4.0 19.0
23.7 148 23.7 148 23.7 148 2 2.9 14.6 49.4 239 49.4 239 4 2.9 14.6
109.6 599 109.6 599 4 7.6 30.9 109.6 599 110.0 599 4 7.6 30.9
109.6 599 109.6 599 4 7.4 37.0 109.6 599 110.0 599 4 7.4 37.0
69.2 358 69.2 358 4 4.5 22.3 69.2 358 69.2 358 4 4.5 22.3
54.5 310 54.5 310 4 4.0 19.0 54.5 310 54.5 310 4 4.0 19.0
49.4 239 49.4 239 4 2.9 14.6 49.4 239 49.4 239 4 2.9 14.6
109.6
109.6
599
599
109.6
109.6
599
599
109.6
109.6
599
599
5
5
7.6
7.4
30.9
37.0
109.6
109.6
599
599
55.8
55.8
425
425
3
3
7.6
7.4
30.9
37.0
5
69.2 358 69.2 358 69.2 358 5 4.5 22.3 69.2 358 36.0 239 3 4.5 22.3
54.5 310 54.5 310 54.5 310 5 4.0 19.0 54.5 310 26.9 187 3 4.0 19.0
49.4 239 49.4 239 49.4 239 5 2.9 14.6 49.4 239 23.7 148 3 2.9 14.6
109.6 599 109.6 599 109.6 599 6 7.6 30.9 109.6 599 109.6 599 4 7.6 30.9
109.6 599 109.6 599 109.6 599 6 7.4 37.0 109.6 599 109.6 599 4 7.4 37.0
69.2 358 69.2 358 69.2 358 6 4.5 22.3 69.2 358 69.2 358 4 4.5 22.3
54.5 310 54.5 310 54.5 310 6 4.0 19.0 54.5 310 54.5 310 4 4.0 19.0
49.4 239 49.4 239 49.4 239 6 2.9 14.6 49.4 239 49.4 239 4 2.9 14.6
109.6 599 109.6 599 109.6 599 5 7.6 30.9 109.6 599 110.0 599 109.6 599 5 7.6 30.9
109.6 599 109.6 599 109.6 599 5 7.4 37.0 109.6 599 110.0 599 109.6 599 5 7.4 37.0
69.2 358 69.2 358 69.2 358 5 4.5 22.3 69.2 358 39.2 358 69.2 358 5 4.5 22.3
54.5 310 54.5 310 54.5 310 5 4.0 19.0 54.5 310 54.5 310 54.5 310 5 4.0 19.0
49.4 239 49.4 239 49.4 239 5 2.9 14.6 49.4 239 49.4 239 49.4 239 5 2.9 14.6

JOHNSON CONTROLS 55
 FORM 150.72-NM2 (811)
SECTION 5 – TECHNICAL DATA
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011

Table 9 - WIRING LUGS

CHILLER TERMINAL NON FUSED DISCONNECT
VOLTAGE CIRCUIT BREAKER LUGS
MODEL BLOCK LUGS SWITCH LUGS
200 1) #4 - 500 kcmil (2)250 - 500kcmil & (3)2/0 - 400kcmil (2)250 - 500kcmil & (3)2/0 - 400kcmil
230 1) #4 - 500 kcmil (2)250 - 500kcmil & (3)2/0 - 400kcmil (2)250 - 500kcmil & (3)2/0 - 400kcmil
YLAA0070 380 1) #4 - 500 kcmil (1) #6 - 350 kcmil (1) #6 - 350 kcmil
460 1) #4 - 500 kcmil (1) #6 - 350 kcmil (1) #6 - 350 kcmil
575 1) #4 - 500 kcmil (1) #6 - 350 kcmil (1) #6 - 350 kcmil
200 1) #4 - 500 kcmil (2)250 - 500kcmil & (3)2/0 - 400kcmil (2)250 - 500kcmil & (3)2/0 - 400kcmil
230 1) #4 - 500 kcmil (2)250 - 500kcmil & (3)2/0 - 400kcmil (2)250 - 500kcmil & (3)2/0 - 400kcmil
YLAA0080 380 1) #4 - 500 kcmil 250 - 500kcmil & (2)3/0 - 250kcmil 250 - 500kcmil & (2)3/0 - 250kcmil
460 1) #4 - 500 kcmil (1) #6 - 350 kcmil (1) #6 - 350 kcmil
575 1) #4 - 500 kcmil (1) #6 - 350 kcmil (1) #6 - 350 kcmil
200 2) #6 - 500 kcmil (2)250 - 500kcmil & (3)2/0 - 400kcmil (2)250 - 500kcmil & (3)2/0 - 400kcmil
230 2) #6 - 500 kcmil (2)250 - 500kcmil & (3)2/0 - 400kcmil (2)250 - 500kcmil & (3)2/0 - 400kcmil
YLAA0090 380 1) #4 - 500 kcmil 250 - 500kcmil & (2)3/0 - 250kcmil 250 - 500kcmil & (2)3/0 - 250kcmil
460 1) #4 - 500 kcmil (1) #6 - 350 kcmil (1) #6 - 350 kcmil
575 1) #4 - 500 kcmil (1) #6 - 350 kcmil (1) #6 - 350 kcmil
200 2) #6 - 500 kcmil (2)250 - 500kcmil & (3)2/0 - 400kcmil (2)250 - 500kcmil & (3)2/0 - 400kcmil
230 2) #6 - 500 kcmil (2)250 - 500kcmil & (3)2/0 - 400kcmil (2)250 - 500kcmil & (3)2/0 - 400kcmil
YLAA0091 380 1) #4 - 500 kcmil 250 - 500kcmil & (2)3/0 - 250kcmil 250 - 500kcmil & (2)3/0 - 250kcmil
460 1) #4 - 500 kcmil (1) #6 - 350 kcmil (1) #6 - 350 kcmil
575 1) #4 - 500 kcmil (1) #6 - 350 kcmil (1) #6 - 350 kcmil
200 2) #6 - 500 kcmil (2)250 - 500kcmil & (3)2/0 - 400kcmil (2)250 - 500kcmil & (3)2/0 - 400kcmil
P1: 230 2) #6 - 500 kcmil (2)250 - 500kcmil & (3)2/0 - 400kcmil (2)250 - 500kcmil & (3)2/0 - 400kcmil
YLAA0101
380 1) #4 - 500 kcmil 250 - 500kcmil & (2)3/0 - 250kcmil 250 - 500kcmil & (2)3/0 - 250kcmil
P2:
YLAA0100 460 1) #4 - 500 kcmil 250 - 500kcmil & (2)3/0 - 250kcmil 250 - 500kcmil & (2)3/0 - 250kcmil
575 1) #4 - 500 kcmil (1) #6 - 350 kcmil (1) #6 - 350 kcmil
P1: 200 2) #6 - 500 kcmil (2)250 - 500kcmil & (3)2/0 - 400kcmil 2)250 - 500kcmil & (3)2/0 - 400kcmil
YLAA0115 230 2) #6 - 500 kcmil (2)250 - 500kcmil & (3)2/0 - 400kcmil 2)250 - 500kcmil & (3)2/0 - 400kcmil
&
380 1) #4 - 500 kcmil 250 - 500kcmil & (2)3/0 - 250kcmil 250 - 500kcmil & (2)3/0 - 250kcmil
YLAA0120
460 1) #4 - 500 kcmil 250 - 500kcmil & (2)3/0 - 250kcmil 250 - 500kcmil & (2)3/0 - 250kcmil
P2:
YLAA0125 575 1) #4 - 500 kcmil 250 - 500kcmil & (2)3/0 - 250kcmil 250 - 500kcmil & (2)3/0 - 250kcmil
200 2) #6 - 500 kcmil (2)250 - 500kcmil & (3)2/0 - 400kcmil 2)250 - 500kcmil & (3)2/0 - 400kcmil
P1: 230 2) #6 - 500 kcmil (2)250 - 500kcmil & (3)2/0 - 400kcmil 2)250 - 500kcmil & (3)2/0 - 400kcmil
YLAA0135
380 1) #4 - 500 kcmil (2)250 - 500kcmil & (3)2/0 - 400kcmil 250 - 500kcmil & (2)3/0 - 250kcmil
P2:
YLAA0141 460 1) #4 - 500 kcmil 250 - 500kcmil & (2)3/0 - 250kcmil 250 - 500kcmil & (2)3/0 - 250kcmil
575 1) #4 - 500 kcmil 250 - 500kcmil & (2)3/0 - 250kcmil 250 - 500kcmil & (2)3/0 - 250kcmil
P1: 200 2) #6 - 500 kcmil (2)250 - 500kcmil & (3)2/0 - 400kcmil 2)250 - 500kcmil & (3)2/0 - 400kcmil
YLAA0150 230 2) #6 - 500 kcmil (2)250 - 500kcmil & (3)2/0 - 400kcmil 2)250 - 500kcmil & (3)2/0 - 400kcmil
&
380 2) #6 - 500 kcmil (2)250 - 500kcmil & (3)2/0 - 400kcmil 2)250 - 500kcmil & (3)2/0 - 400kcmil
YLAA0155
460 1) #4 - 500 kcmil 250 - 500kcmil & (2)3/0 - 250kcmil 250 - 500kcmil & (2)3/0 - 250kcmil
P2:
YLAA0156 575 1) #4 - 500 kcmil 250 - 500kcmil & (2)3/0 - 250kcmil 250 - 500kcmil & (2)3/0 - 250kcmil
200 2) #6 - 500 kcmil (4) 4/0 - 500kcmil 2)250 - 500kcmil & (3)2/0 - 400kcmil
P2: 230 2) #6 - 500 kcmil (4) 4/0 - 500kcmil 2)250 - 500kcmil & (3)2/0 - 400kcmil
YLAA0170
380 2) #6 - 500 kcmil (2)250 - 500kcmil & (3)2/0 - 400kcmil 2)250 - 500kcmil & (3)2/0 - 400kcmil
&
YLAA0175 460 2) #6 - 500 kcmil (2)250 - 500kcmil & (3)2/0 - 400kcmil 2)250 - 500kcmil & (3)2/0 - 400kcmil
575 1) #4 - 500 kcmil (2)250 - 500kcmil & (3)2/0 - 400kcmil 250 - 500kcmil & (2)3/0 - 250kcmil
56 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.72-NM2 (811)
SECTION 5 – TECHNICAL DATA
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

JOHNSON CONTROLS 57
 FORM 150.72-NM2 (811)
SECTION 5 – TECHNICAL DATA
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011

Table 10 - ELECTRICAL DATA W/ PUMPS

MIN. MIN DUAL MAX DUAL
CHILLER PUMP VOLTAGE PUMP MIN N/F
CKT ELEM FUSE & ELEM FUSE&
MODEL MODEL CODE FLA DISC SW
AMPS MIN CB MAX CB
17 15.4 366 600 400 400
28 13.9 364 600 400 400
YLAA0070SE A, K 40 8.1 194 250 225 225
46 6.95 167 200 175 175
58 5.56 142 200 150 150
17 21.4 372 600 400 400
28 20.4 371 600 400 400
YLAA0070SE B 40 12 198 250 225 225
46 10.2 171 200 200 200
58 8.2 144 200 150 150
17 32.2 383 600 400 400
28 28.4 379 600 400 400
YLAA0070SE C 40 15.4 202 250 225 225
46 14.2 175 200 200 200
58 11.4 147 200 175 150
17 41.7 393 600 450 450
28 36.3 387 600 400 400
YLAA0070SE D, M, N 40 22.03 208 250 225 225
46 18.2 179 200 200 200
58 14.5 150 200 175 175
17 27.1 378 600 400 400
28 24.5 375 600 400 400
YLAA0070SE L 40 14.8 201 250 225 225
46 12.3 173 200 200 200
58 9.84 146 200 175 175
17 15.4 381 600 400 400
28 13.9 379 600 400 400
YLAA0080SE A, K 40 8.1 224 250 250 250
46 6.95 180 200 200 200
58 5.56 154 200 175 175
17 21.4 387 600 450 450
28 20.4 385 600 400 400
YLAA0080SE B 40 12 228 400 250 250
46 10.2 183 250 200 200
58 8.2 157 200 175 175
17 32.2 398 600 450 450
28 28.4 393 600 450 450
YLAA0080SE C 40 15.4 231 400 250 250
46 14.2 187 250 200 200
58 11.4 160 200 175 175
17 41.7 407 600 450 450
28 36.3 401 600 450 450
YLAA0080SE D, M, N 40 22.03 238 400 250 250
46 18.2 191 250 200 200
58 14.5 163 200 175 175
17 27.1 393 600 450 450
28 24.5 389 600 450 450
YLAA0080SE L 40 14.8 231 400 250 250
46 12.3 185 250 200 200
58 9.84 158 200 175 175

58 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.72-NM2 (811)
SECTION 5 – TECHNICAL DATA
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011

SYSTEM # 1 SYSTEM # 2
COMPR 1 COMPR 2 COMPR 3 FAN COMPR 1 COMPR 2 COMPR 3 FAN
RLA LRA RLA LRA RLA LRA QTY FLA LRA RLA LRA RLA LRA RLA LRA QTY FLA LRA
51 300 51 300 51 300 2 7.6 31 51 300 51 300 51 300 2 7.6 31
51 300 51 300 51 300 2 7.4 37 51 300 51 300 51 300 2 7.4 37
27 139 27 139 27 139 2 4.5 22 27 139 27 139 27 139 2 4.5 22
23 150 23 150 23 150 2 4.0 19 23 150 23 150 23 150 2 4.0 19
20 109 20 109 20 109 2 2.9 15 20 109 20 109 20 109 2 2.9 15
51 300 51 300 51 300 2 7.6 31 51 300 51 300 51 300 2 7.6 31
51 300 51 300 51 300 2 7.4 37 51 300 51 300 51 300 2 7.4 37
27 139 27 139 27 139 2 4.5 22 27 139 27 139 27 139 2 4.5 22
23 150 23 150 23 150 2 4.0 19 23 150 23 150 23 150 2 4.0 19
20 109 20 109 20 109 2 2.9 15 20 109 20 109 20 109 2 2.9 15
51 300 51 300 51 300 2 7.6 31 51 300 51 300 51 300 2 7.6 31
51 300 51 300 51 300 2 7.4 37 51 300 51 300 51 300 2 7.4 37
27 139 27 139 27 139 2 4.5 22 27 139 27 139 27 139 2 4.5 22
23 150 23 150 23 150 2 4.0 19 23 150 23 150 23 150 2 4.0 19
20 109 20 109 20 109 2 2.9 15 20 109 20 109 20 109 2 2.9 15
51 300 51 300 51 300 2 7.6 31 51 300 51 300 51 300 2 7.6 31
51 300 51 300 51 300 2 7.4 37 51 300 51 300 51 300 2 7.4 37
27 139 27 139 27 139 2 4.5 22 27 139 27 139 27 139 2 4.5 22
23 150 23 150 23 150 2 4.0 19 23 150 23 150 23 150 2 4.0 19 5
20 109 20 109 20 109 2 2.9 15 20 109 20 109 20 109 2 2.9 15
51 300 51 300 51 300 2 7.6 31 51 300 51 300 51 300 2 7.6 31
51 300 51 300 51 300 2 7.4 37 51 300 51 300 51 300 2 7.4 37
27 139 27 139 27 139 2 4.5 22 27 139 27 139 27 139 2 4.5 22
23 150 23 150 23 150 2 4.0 19 23 150 23 150 23 150 2 4.0 19
20 109 20 109 20 109 2 2.9 15 20 109 20 109 20 109 2 2.9 15
56 425 56 425 56 425 2 7.6 31 51 300 51 300 51 300 2 7.6 31
56 425 56 425 56 425 2 7.4 37 51 300 51 300 51 300 2 7.4 37
36 239 36 239 36 239 2 4.5 22 27 139 27 139 27 139 2 4.5 22
27 187 27 187 27 187 2 4.0 19 23 150 23 150 23 150 2 4.0 19
24 148 24 148 24 148 2 2.9 15 20 109 20 109 20 109 2 2.9 15
56 425 56 425 56 425 2 7.6 31 51 300 51 300 51 300 2 7.6 31
56 425 56 425 56 425 2 7.4 37 51 300 51 300 51 300 2 7.4 37
36 239 36 239 36 239 2 4.5 22 27 139 27 139 27 139 2 4.5 22
27 187 27 187 27 187 2 4.0 19 23 150 23 150 23 150 2 4.0 19
24 148 24 148 24 148 2 2.9 15 20 109 20 109 20 109 2 2.9 15
56 425 56 425 56 425 2 7.6 31 51 300 51 300 51 300 2 7.6 31
56 425 56 425 56 425 2 7.4 37 51 300 51 300 51 300 2 7.4 37
36 239 36 239 36 239 2 4.5 22 27 139 27 139 27 139 2 4.5 22
27 187 27 187 27 187 2 4.0 19 23 150 23 150 23 150 2 4.0 19
24 148 24 148 24 148 2 2.9 15 20 109 20 109 20 109 2 2.9 15
56 425 56 425 56 425 2 7.6 31 51 300 51 300 51 300 2 7.6 31
56 425 56 425 56 425 2 7.4 37 51 300 51 300 51 300 2 7.4 37
36 239 36 239 36 239 2 4.5 22 27 139 27 139 27 139 2 4.5 22
27 187 27 187 27 187 2 4.0 19 23 150 23 150 23 150 2 4.0 19
24 148 24 148 24 148 2 2.9 15 20 109 20 109 20 109 2 2.9 15
56 425 56 425 56 425 2 7.6 31 51 300 51 300 51 300 2 7.6 31
56 425 56 425 56 425 2 7.4 37 51 300 51 300 51 300 2 7.4 37
36 239 36 239 36 239 2 4.5 22 27 139 27 139 27 139 2 4.5 22
27 187 27 187 27 187 2 4.0 19 23 150 23 150 23 150 2 4.0 19
24 148 24 148 24 148 2 2.9 15 20 109 20 109 20 109 2 2.9 15

JOHNSON CONTROLS 59
 FORM 150.72-NM2 (811)
SECTION 5 – TECHNICAL DATA
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011

TABLE 10 - ELECTRICAL DATA W/ PUMPS (CONT’D)

MIN. MIN DUAL MAX DUAL

CHILLER PUMP VOLTAGE PUMP MIN N/F
CKT ELEM FUSE & ELEM FUSE&
MODEL MODEL CODE FLA DISC SW
AMPS MIN CB MAX CB
17 15.4 406 600 450 500
28 13.9 404 600 450 500
YLAA0090SE A, K 40 8.1 257 400 300 300
46 7 199 250 225 250
58 5.6 174 200 200 200
17 21.4 412 600 450 500
28 20.4 410 600 450 500
YLAA0090SE B 40 12 261 400 300 300
46 10.2 202 250 225 250
58 8.2 176 200 200 225
17 41.7 432 600 500 500
28 36.3 426 600 500 500
YLAA0090SE D, M, N 40 22 271 400 300 300
46 18.2 210 250 225 250
58 14.5 183 200 200 225
17 54.7 445 600 500 500
28 49.5 439 600 500 500
YLAA0090SE E 40 29.1 278 400 300 300
46 24.8 217 250 250 250
58 19.8 188 250 225 225
17 27.1 418 600 450 500
28 24.5 414 600 450 500
YLAA0090SE L 40 14.8 263 400 300 300
46 12.3 204 250 225 250
58 9.8 178 200 200 225
17 15.4 419 600 450 500
28 13.9 417 600 450 500
YLAA0091HE A, K 40 8.1 263 400 300 300
46 7 207 250 225 250
58 5.6 182 200 200 225
17 21.4 425 600 500 500
28 20.4 423 600 500 500
YLAA0091HE B 40 12 267 400 300 300
46 10.2 211 250 225 250
58 8.2 184 200 200 225
17 41.7 446 600 500 500
28 36.3 439 600 500 500
YLAA0091HE D, M, N 40 22 277 400 300 300
46 18.2 219 250 250 250
58 14.5 190 250 225 225
17 54.7 459 600 500 500
28 49.5 452 600 500 500
YLAA0091HE E 40 29.1 284 400 350 350
46 24.8 225 250 250 250
58 19.8 196 250 225 225
17 27.1 431 600 500 500
28 24.5 427 600 500 500
YLAA0091HE L 40 14.8 270 400 300 300
46 12.3 213 250 250 250
58 9.8 186 200 200 225

60 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.72-NM2 (811)
SECTION 5 – TECHNICAL DATA
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011

SYSTEM # 1 SYSTEM # 2
COMPR 1 COMPR 2 COMPR 3 FAN COMPR 1 COMPR 2 COMPR 3 FAN
RLA LRA RLA LRA RLA LRA QTY FLA LRA RLA LRA RLA LRA RLA LRA QTY FLA LRA
56 425 56 425 56 425 2 7.6 31 110 599 56 425 2 7.6 31
56 425 56 425 56 425 2 7.4 37 110 599 56 425 2 7.4 37
36 239 36 239 36 239 2 4.5 22 69 358 36 239 2 4.5 22
27 187 27 187 27 187 2 4.0 19 55 310 27 187 2 4.0 19
24 148 24 148 24 148 2 2.9 15 49 239 24 148 2 2.9 15
56 425 56 425 56 425 2 7.6 31 110 599 56 425 2 7.6 31
56 425 56 425 56 425 2 7.4 37 110 599 56 425 2 7.4 37
36 239 36 239 36 239 2 4.5 22 69 358 36 239 2 4.5 22
27 187 27 187 27 187 2 4.0 19 55 310 27 187 2 4.0 19
24 148 24 148 24 148 2 2.9 15 49 239 24 148 2 2.9 15
56 425 56 425 56 425 2 7.6 31 110 599 56 425 2 7.6 31
56 425 56 425 56 425 2 7.4 37 110 599 56 425 2 7.4 37
36 239 36 239 36 239 2 4.5 22 69 358 36 239 2 4.5 22
27 187 27 187 27 187 2 4.0 19 55 310 27 187 2 4.0 19
24 148 24 148 24 148 2 2.9 15 49 239 24 148 2 2.9 15
56 425 56 425 56 425 2 7.6 31 110 599 56 425 2 7.6 31
56 425 56 425 56 425 2 7.4 37 110 599 56 425 2 7.4 37
36 239 36 239 36 239 2 4.5 22 69 358 36 239 2 4.5 22
27 187 27 187 27 187 2 4.0 19 55 310 27 187 2 4.0 19 5
24 148 24 148 24 148 2 2.9 15 49 239 24 148 2 2.9 15
56 425 56 425 56 425 2 7.6 31 110 599 56 425 2 7.6 31
56 425 56 425 56 425 2 7.4 37 110 599 56 425 2 7.4 37
36 239 36 239 36 239 2 4.5 22 69 358 36 239 2 4.5 22
27 187 27 187 27 187 2 4.0 19 55 310 27 187 2 4.0 19
24 148 24 148 24 148 2 2.9 15 49 239 24 148 2 2.9 15
110 599 56 425 3 7.6 31 110 599 56 425 3 7.6 31
110 358 56 425 3 7.4 37 110 599 56 425 3 7.4 37
69 310 36 239 3 4.5 22 69 358 36 239 3 4.5 22
55 239 27 187 3 4.0 19 55 310 27 187 3 4.0 19
49 310 24 148 3 2.9 15 49 239 24 148 3 2.9 15
110 599 56 425 3 7.6 31 110 599 56 425 3 7.6 31
110 358 56 425 3 7.4 37 110 599 56 425 3 7.4 37
69 310 36 239 3 4.5 22 69 358 36 239 3 4.5 22
55 239 27 187 3 4.0 19 55 310 27 187 3 4.0 19
49 310 24 148 3 2.9 15 49 239 24 148 3 2.9 15
110 599 56 425 3 7.6 31 110 599 56 425 3 7.6 31
110 358 56 239 3 7.4 37 110 599 56 425 3 7.4 37
69 310 36 187 3 4.5 22 69 358 36 239 3 4.5 22
55 239 27 148 3 4.0 19 55 310 27 187 3 4.0 19
49 310 24 425 3 2.9 15 49 239 24 148 3 2.9 15
110 599 56 425 3 7.6 31 110 599 56 425 3 7.6 31
110 358 56 425 3 7.4 37 110 599 56 425 3 7.4 37
69 310 36 239 3 4.5 22 69 358 36 239 3 4.5 22
55 239 27 187 3 4.0 19 55 310 27 187 3 4.0 19
49 310 24 148 3 2.9 15 49 239 24 148 3 2.9 15
110 599 56 425 3 7.6 31 110 599 56 425 3 7.6 31
110 358 56 425 3 7.4 37 110 599 56 425 3 7.4 37
69 310 36 239 3 4.5 22 69 358 36 239 3 4.5 22
55 239 27 187 3 4.0 19 55 310 27 187 3 4.0 19
49 310 24 148 3 2.9 15 49 289 24 148 3 2.9 15

JOHNSON CONTROLS 61
 FORM 150.72-NM2 (811)
SECTION 5 – TECHNICAL DATA
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011

TABLE 10 - ELECTRICAL DATA W/ PUMPS (CONT’D)

MIN. MIN DUAL MAX DUAL

CHILLER PUMP VOLTAGE PUMP MIN N/F
CKT ELEM FUSE & ELEM FUSE&
MODEL MODEL CODE FLA DISC SW
AMPS MIN CB MAX CB
17 21.4 481 600 600 600
28 20.4 479 600 600 600
YLAA0101HE B, F 40 12 303 400 350 350
46 10.2 238 400 300 300
58 8.2 208 250 225 250
17 41.7 501 600 600 600
28 36.3 495 600 600 600
YLAA0101HE D, O 40 22 313 400 350 350
46 18.2 246 400 300 300
58 14.5 214 250 250 250
17 54.7 514 600 600 600
28 49.5 508 600 600 600
YLAA0101HE E, P 40 29.1 320 400 350 350
46 24.8 252 400 300 300
58 19.8 219 250 250 250
17 15.4 475 600 600 600
28 13.9 472 600 500 500
YLAA0101HE K 40 8.1 299 400 350 350
46 7 234 400 250 250
58 5.6 205 250 225 250
17 27.1 487 600 600 600
28 24.5 483 600 600 600
YLAA0101HE L 40 14.8 306 400 350 350
46 12.3 240 400 300 300
58 9.8 209 250 225 250
17 21.4 532 600 600 600
28 20.4 530 600 600 600
YLAA0115SE
F 40 12 333 400 400 400
YLAA020SE
46 10.2 265 400 300 300
58 8.2 235 400 250 250
17 32.2 543 600 600 600
28 28.4 538 600 600 600
YLAA0115SE
C 40 15.4 336 400 400 400
YLAA020SE
46 14.2 269 400 300 300
58 11.4 238 400 300 300
17 41.7 552 800 600 600
28 36.3 546 600 600 600
YLAA0115SE
D, M, N 40 22 343 400 400 400
YLAA020SE
46 18.2 273 400 300 300
58 14.5 241 400 300 300
17 54.7 565 800 600 600
28 49.5 559 800 600 600
YLAA0115SE
E, P 40 29.1 350 400 400 400
YLAA020SE
46 24.8 280 400 300 300
58 19.8 247 400 300 300
17 15.4 526 600 600 600
28 13.9 523 600 600 600
YLAA0115SE
K 40 8.1 329 400 350 350
YLAA020SE
46 7 262 400 300 300
58 5.6 282 400 250 250

62 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.72-NM2 (811)
SECTION 5 – TECHNICAL DATA
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011

SYSTEM # 1 SYSTEM # 2
COMPR 1 COMPR 2 COMPR 3 FAN COMPR 1 COMPR 2 COMPR 3 FAN
RLA LRA RLA LRA RLA LRA QTY FLA LRA RLA LRA RLA LRA RLA LRA QTY FLA LRA
56 425 56 425 56 425 2 7.6 31 110 599 110 599 4 7.6 31
56 425 56 425 56 425 2 7.4 37 110 599 110 599 4 7.4 37
36 239 36 239 36 239 2 4.5 22 69 358 69 358 4 4.5 22
27 187 27 187 27 187 2 4.0 19 55 310 55 310 4 4.0 19
24 148 24 148 24 148 2 2.9 15 49 239 49 239 4 2.9 15
56 425 56 425 56 425 2 7.6 31 110 599 110 599 4 7.6 31
56 425 56 425 56 425 2 7.4 37 110 599 110 599 4 7.4 37
36 239 36 239 36 239 2 4.5 22 69 358 69 358 4 4.5 22
27 187 27 187 27 187 2 4.0 19 55 310 55 310 4 4.0 19
24 148 24 148 24 148 2 2.9 15 49 239 49 239 4 2.9 15
56 425 56 425 56 425 2 7.6 31 110 599 110 599 4 7.6 31
56 425 56 425 56 425 2 7.4 37 110 599 110 599 4 7.4 37
36 239 36 239 36 239 2 4.5 22 69 358 69 358 4 4.5 22
27 187 27 187 27 187 2 4.0 19 55 310 55 310 4 4.0 19
24 148 24 148 24 148 2 2.9 15 49 239 49 239 4 2.9 15
56 425 56 425 56 425 2 7.6 31 110 599 110 599 4 7.6 31
56 425 56 425 56 425 2 7.4 37 110 599 110 599 4 7.4 37
36 239 36 239 36 239 2 4.5 22 69 358 69 358 4 4.5 22
27 187 27 187 27 187 2 4.0 19 55 310 55 310 4 4.0 19 5
24 148 24 148 24 148 2 2.9 15 49 239 49 239 4 2.9 15
56 425 56 425 56 425 2 7.6 31 110 599 110 599 4 7.6 31
56 425 56 425 56 425 2 7.4 37 110 599 110 599 4 7.4 37
36 239 36 239 36 239 2 4.5 22 69 358 69 358 4 4.5 22
27 187 27 187 27 187 2 4.0 19 55 310 55 310 4 4.0 19
24 148 24 148 24 148 2 2.9 15 49 239 49 239 4 2.9 15
110 599 110 599 3 7.6 31 110 599 110 599 3 7.6 31
110 599 110 599 3 7.4 37 110 599 110 599 3 7.4 37
69 358 69 358 3 4.5 22 69 358 69 358 3 4.5 22
55 310 55 310 3 4.0 19 55 310 55 310 3 4.0 19
49 239 49 239 3 2.9 15 49 239 49 239 3 2.9 15
110 599 110 599 3 7.6 31 110 599 110 599 3 7.6 31
110 599 110 599 3 7.4 37 110 599 110 599 3 7.4 37
69 358 69 358 3 4.5 22 69 358 69 358 3 4.5 22
55 310 55 310 3 4.0 19 55 310 55 310 3 4.0 19
49 239 49 239 3 2.9 15 49 239 49 239 3 2.9 15
110 599 110 599 3 7.6 31 110 599 110 599 3 7.6 31
110 599 110 599 3 7.4 37 110 599 110 599 3 7.4 37
69 358 69 358 3 4.5 22 69 358 69 358 3 4.5 22
55 310 55 310 3 4.0 19 55 310 55 310 3 4.0 19
49 239 49 239 3 2.9 15 49 239 49 239 3 2.9 15
110 599 110 599 3 7.6 31 110 599 110 599 3 7.6 31
110 599 110 599 3 7.4 37 110 599 110 599 3 7.4 37
69 358 69 358 3 4.5 22 69 358 69 358 3 4.5 22
55 310 55 310 3 4.0 19 55 310 55 310 3 4.0 19
49 239 49 239 3 2.9 15 49 239 49 239 3 2.9 15
110 599 110 599 3 7.6 31 110 599 110 599 3 7.6 31
110 599 110 599 3 7.4 37 110 599 110 599 3 7.4 37
69 358 69 358 3 4.5 22 69 358 69 358 3 4.5 22
55 310 55 310 3 4.0 19 55 310 55 310 3 4.0 19
49 289 49 289 3 2.9 15 49 289 49 289 3 2.9 15

JOHNSON CONTROLS 63
 FORM 150.72-NM2 (811)
SECTION 5 – TECHNICAL DATA
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011

TABLE 10 - ELECTRICAL DATA W/ PUMPS (CONT’D)

MIN. MIN DUAL MAX DUAL
CHILLER PUMP VOLTAGE PUMP MIN N/F
CKT ELEM FUSE & ELEM FUSE&
MODEL MODEL CODE FLA DISC SW
AMPS MIN CB MAX CB
17 27.1 538 600 600 600
28 24.5 534 600 600 600
YLAA0115SE L 40 14.8 336 400 400 400
46 12.3 268 400 300 300
58 9.8 237 400 250 250
17 21.4 604 800 700 700
28 20.4 601 800 700 700
YLAA0135SE F 40 12 378 600 400 400
46 10.2 301 400 350 350
58 8.2 265 400 300 300
17 32.2 615 800 700 700
28 28.4 609 800 700 700
YLAA0135SE C 40 15.4 382 600 400 450
46 14.2 305 400 350 350
58 11.4 268 400 300 300
17 41.7 624 800 700 700
28 36.3 617 800 700 700
YLAA0135SE D, M, N 40 22 388 600 450 450
46 18.2 309 400 350 350
58 14.5 271 400 300 300
17 54.7 637 800 700 700
28 49.5 630 800 700 700
YLAA0135SE E, R 40 29.1 395 600 450 450
46 24.8 315 400 350 350
58 19.8 277 400 300 300
17 15.4 598 800 700 700
28 13.9 595 800 700 700
YLAA0135SE K 40 8.1 374 600 400 400
46 7 297 400 350 350
58 5.6 262 400 300 300
17 32.2 668 800 700 700
28 28.4 663 800 700 700
YLAA0150SE
G 40 15.4 414 600 450 450
YLAA0155SE
46 14.2 332 400 350 350
58 11.4 294 400 350 350
17 27.1 663 800 700 700
28 24.5 659 800 700 700
YLAA0150SE
H, L 40 14.8 414 600 450 450
YLAA0155SE
46 12.3 330 400 350 350
58 9.8 292 400 350 350
17 41.7 678 800 800 800
28 36.3 671 800 700 700
YLAA0150SE
I, M 40 22 421 600 450 450
YLAA0155SE
46 18.2 336 400 350 350
58 14.5 297 400 350 350
17 54.7 691 800 800 800
28 49.5 684 800 800 800
YLAA0150SE
J, R 40 29.1 428 600 450 450
YLAA0155SE
46 24.8 343 400 400 400
58 19.8 302 400 350 350

64 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.72-NM2 (811)
SECTION 5 – TECHNICAL DATA
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011

SYSTEM # 1 SYSTEM # 2
COMPR 1 COMPR 2 COMPR 3 FAN COMPR 1 COMPR 2 COMPR 3 FAN
RLA LRA RLA LRA RLA LRA QTY FLA LRA RLA LRA RLA LRA RLA LRA QTY FLA LRA
110 599 110 599 3 7.6 31 110 599 110 599 3 7.6 31
110 599 110 599 3 7.4 37 110 599 110 599 3 7.4 37
69 358 69 358 3 4.5 22 69 358 69 358 3 4.5 22
55 310 55 310 3 4.0 19 55 310 55 310 3 4.0 19
49 239 49 239 3 2.9 15 49 239 49 239 3 2.9 15
110 599 110 599 110 599 4 7.6 31 110 599 56 425 4 7.6 31
110 599 110 599 110 599 4 7.4 37 110 599 56 425 4 7.4 37
69 358 69 358 69 358 4 4.5 22 69 358 36 239 4 4.5 22
55 310 55 310 55 310 4 4.0 19 55 310 27 187 4 4.0 19
49 239 49 239 49 239 4 2.9 15 49 239 24 148 4 2.9 15
110 599 110 599 110 599 4 7.6 31 110 599 56 425 4 7.6 31
110 599 110 599 110 599 4 7.4 37 110 599 56 425 4 7.4 37
69 358 69 358 69 358 4 4.5 22 69 358 36 239 4 4.5 22
55 310 55 310 55 310 4 4.0 19 55 310 27 187 4 4.0 19
49 239 49 239 49 239 4 2.9 15 49 239 24 148 4 2.9 15
110 599 110 599 110 599 4 7.6 31 110 599 56 425 4 7.6 31
110 599 110 599 110 599 4 7.4 37 110 599 56 425 4 7.4 37
69 358 69 358 69 358 4 4.5 22 69 358 36 239 4 4.5 22
55 310 55 310 55 310 4 4.0 19 55 310 27 187 4 4.0 19 5
49 239 49 239 49 239 4 2.9 15 49 239 24 148 4 2.9 15
110 599 110 599 110 599 4 7.6 31 110 599 56 425 4 7.6 31
110 599 110 599 110 599 4 7.4 37 110 599 56 425 4 7.4 37
69 358 69 358 69 358 4 4.5 22 69 358 36 239 4 4.5 22
55 310 55 310 55 310 4 4.0 19 55 310 27 187 4 4.0 19
49 239 49 239 49 239 4 2.9 15 49 239 24 148 4 2.9 15
110 599 110 599 110 599 4 7.6 31 110 599 56 425 4 7.6 31
110 599 110 599 110 599 4 7.4 37 110 599 56 425 4 7.4 37
69 358 69 358 69 358 4 4.5 22 69 358 36 239 4 4.5 22
55 310 55 310 55 310 4 4.0 19 55 310 27 187 4 4.0 19
49 239 49 239 49 239 4 2.9 15 49 239 24 148 4 2.9 15
110 599 110 599 110 599 4 7.6 31 110 599 110 599 4 7.6 31
110 599 110 599 110 599 4 7.4 37 110 599 110 599 4 7.4 37
69 358 69 358 69 358 4 4.5 22 69 358 69 358 4 4.5 22
55 310 55 310 55 310 4 4.0 19 55 310 55 310 4 4.0 19
49 239 49 239 49 239 4 2.9 15 49 239 49 239 4 2.9 15
110 599 110 599 110 599 4 7.6 31 110 599 110 599 4 7.6 31
110 599 110 599 110 599 4 7.4 37 110 599 110 599 4 7.4 37
69 358 69 358 69 358 4 4.5 22 69 358 69 358 4 4.5 22
55 310 55 310 55 310 4 4.0 19 55 310 55 310 4 4.0 19
49 239 49 239 49 239 4 2.9 15 49 239 49 239 4 2.9 15
110 599 110 599 110 599 4 7.6 31 110 599 110 599 4 7.6 31
110 599 110 599 110 599 4 7.4 37 110 599 110 599 4 7.4 37
69 358 69 358 69 358 4 4.5 22 69 358 69 358 4 4.5 22
55 310 55 310 55 310 4 4.0 19 55 310 55 310 4 4.0 19
49 239 49 239 49 239 4 2.9 15 49 239 49 239 4 2.9 15
110 599 110 599 110 599 4 7.6 31 110 599 110 599 4 7.6 31
110 599 110 599 110 599 4 7.4 37 110 599 110 599 4 7.4 37
69 358 69 358 69 358 4 4.5 22 69 358 69 358 4 4.5 22
55 310 55 310 55 310 4 4.0 19 55 310 55 310 4 4.0 19
49 289 49 289 49 289 4 2.9 15 49 289 49 289 4 2.9 15

JOHNSON CONTROLS 65
 FORM 150.72-NM2 (811)
SECTION 5 – TECHNICAL DATA
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011

ELECTRICAL NOTES AND LEGEND

DESIGNATION DESCRIPTION DESIGNATION DESCRIPTION

ACC ACCESSORY - MF MOTOR FAN
- ADIS DISPLAY BOARD - MP MOTOR PUMP
- AMB MICRO BOARD NU NOT USED
- BAMB AMBIENT PE PROTECTIVE EARTH
- BDAT DISCHARGE AIR TEMPERATURE PULSE WIDTH MODULATION TEMP RE-
PWM
SET or REMOTE UNLOAD 2nd STEP
- BDP DISCHARGE PRESSURE
- QCB CIRCUIT BREAKER
- BECT ENTRING CHILLED TEMPERATURE
MANUAL MOTOR STARTER
LEAVING CHILLED TEMPERATURE - QMMSC
- BLCT COMPRESSOR
NOT FITTED ON REMOTE EVAP UNITS
- QMMSP MANUAL MOTOR STARTER PUMP
-BMP MOTOR PROTECTOR COMPRESSOR
- QSD SWITCH DISCONNECT
- BSP SUCTION PRESSURE
R RESISTOR
- CPF CAPACITOR POWER FACTOR
RED RED
- ECH CRANKCASE HEATER
RP RUN PERMISSIVE
- EEH EVAPORATOR HEATER
RU REMOTE UNLOAD 1st STEP
- EHRH HEAT RECOVERY HEATER
SCH THERMOSTAT CRANKCASE HEATER
- EPH PUMP HEATER
SCR SCREEN
- EXT EXTERNAL TO CONTROL PANEL
- SF FLOW SWITCH
-F FUSE
- SKP KEYPAD
- FHP HIGH PRESSURE CUTOUT
- SOA SWITCH OFF AUTO
- FSC FAN SPEED CONTROLLER
- SZT ZONE THERMOSTAT
FAN SPEED INHIBIT TWO SPEED
- FSI
FAN OPTION ONLY -T TRANSFORMER
GND GROUND - TC TRANSFORMER CURRENT
G/Y GREEN / YELLOW - UBR BRIGDE RECFIFIER
J PLUG BOARD CONNECTOR - WHT WHITE
-K CIRCUIT BOARD RELAY PLUGS BETWEEN POW./MICROBOARD.
- XP
SECTION
FAN CONTACTOR LINE
- KF
(INCLUDING COIL SUPPRESSOR) - XTBC TERMINAL BLOCK CUSTOMER
FAN CONTACTOR HIGH SPEED - XTBF TERMINAL BLOCK FACTORY
- KFH
(INCLUDING COIL SUPPRESSOR)
- YESV EVAPORATOR SOLENOID VALVE
FAN CONTACTOR LOW SPEED
- KFL HOT GAS SOLENOID VALVE (INCLUDING
(INCLUDING COIL SUPPRESSOR) - YHGSV
COIL SUPPRESSOR)
- KFOL FAN OVERLOAD
LIQUID LINE SOLENOID VALVE FIELD
- KFS RELAY FAN SPEED - YLLSV MOUNTED AND WIRED ON REMOTE
EVAP. UNITS
- KH HEATER RELAY
- ZCPR COMPRESSOR
COMPRESSOR CONTACTOR (INCLUD-
- KM
ING COIL SUPPRESSOR) NB NOTE WELL {SEE NOTE}
- KCR CONTROL RELAY
WIRING AND ITEMS SHOWN THUS ARE
PUMP CONTACTOR PART STANDARD YORK ACCESSORIES
- KP
(INCLUDING COIL SUPPRESSOR)
WIRING AND ITEMS SHOWN THUS ARE
- KT RELAY TIMER NOT SUPPLIED BY YORK
-M COMPRESSOR MOTOR ITEMS THUS ENCLOSED FORM A COM-
PONENTS OR SETS OF COMPONENTS

035-21966-101 REVG

66 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.72-NM2 (811)
SECTION 5 – TECHNICAL DATA
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011

ELECTRICAL NOTES AND LEGEND (CONT’D)

035-21966-101 REV I
GENERAL
a. This drawing is based on IEC symbols.
Field wiring to be in accordance with the relevant electrical code as well as all other applicable codes and specifica-
b.
tions.
c. All sources of supply shown on this diagram to be taken from one main isolator, not shown or supplied by YORK.
Green and yellow wire is used for earth, multi-colored cable used for low voltage. Red wire used for AC Control, blue
d. wire for neutral, black wire for AC and DC power. Orange wire should be used for interlock control wiring supplied by
external source.
Legend designation depicts component abbreviations. Number prefix located, if applicable, on schematic circuit,
e.
refers to system thereon, E.G. = 1-FHP2 refers to high pressure cutout no 2 on system no 1.
All wiring to control section voltage free contacts requires a supply provided by the customer maximum voltage 120
volts. The customer must take particular care when deriving the supplies for the voltage free terminals with regard to
a common point of isolation. Thus, these circuits when used must be fed via the common point of isolation the voltage
f.
to these circuits is removed when the common point of isolation to the unit is opened. This common point of isolation
is not supplied by YORK. The YORK voltage free contacts are rated at 100va. All inductive devices {relays} switch by
the YORK voltage free contacts must have their coil suppressed using standard R/C suppressors.
g. Customer voltage free contacts connected to terminal 13 must be rated at 30V 5ma.
No controls {relays etc.} Should be mounted in any section of the control panel. Additionally, control wiring not con-
h. nected to the YORK control panel should not be run through the panel. If these precautions are not followed, electrical
noise could cause malfunctions or damage to the unit and its controls.
I. 120/14.3 - (Signal IN/OUT) i.e. 120 is wire # and 14.3 refers to SHT. 14 column 3.
5
Notes
Refer to installation commissioning operation and maintenance manual for customer connections and customer con-
1
nection notes, non compliance to these instructions will invalidate unit warranty.
Wiring and components for compressor 3 only fitted when unit has 3 compressors on the system. 1-BMP3 is replaced
2
by a link across terminals 134 & 135. 2-BMP3 is replaced by a link across terminals 234 & 235.
3
4 Fitted on units with hot gas bypass option.
5 EMS option is wired as shown.
6 This wiring must be used for old display 031-0110-000.
7 Network connection point.
8 Printer port.
9 Remote emergency stop can be wired between terminal l and 5 after removing link.
10 Power factor correction accessory. Power factor correction fitted to each compressor contactor.
Not fitted on compressors with internal motor protection. For system 1 terminals 132 & 133, 133 & 134 and 134 & 135
11
are linked. For system 2 terminals 232 & 233, 233 & 234 and 234 & 235 are linked.
12 Only fitted on systems with 3 or 4 fans.
13 Only fitted on systems with 4 fans.
14 Only fitted on systems with 5 fans.
15 Only fitted on systems with 6 fans.
16 Input switch disconnect (standard on CE units) or circuit breaker option replaces input terminal block.
17 Input switch disconnect & individual system circuit breaker option replaces input terminal block.
115V control circuit requires a 115V supply unless control circuit transformer -T2 & -F3 are fitted (standard on CE
18
units).
For optional hydro kit. Heater -EPH is fitted and wired as shown. On single pump -KP1, -QMMSP1 & -MP1 are fitted &
19
wired as shown. On two pump hydro kits -KP2, -QMMSP2 & -MP2 are also fitted and wired as shown.
20 Current measurement option wired as show.
21 Only fitted on systems with single speed fans.
22 Only fitted on systems with two speed fans.
23 Optional compressor manual motors starters (standard on CE units).

JOHNSON CONTROLS 67
 FORM 150.72-NM2 (811)
SECTION 5 – TECHNICAL DATA
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011

ELECTRICAL NOTES AND LEGEND (CONT’D)

24 See sheet 3 of connection diagram for power input options.
25 Alternate connections shown for different two speed motor types.
26 Only fitted on systems with a maximum of 4 fans.
27 220/230V units require a separate fuse for units w/4 or more fans per system.
28 Low ambient kit -FSC for fan -MF1 is only fitted on systems with less than 4 fans.
29 Only fitted on YLAA0091.
30 Only fitted on YLAA0090, 0091 & 0135.
31 Input dual point circuit breaker option replaces input terminal block.
32 Field installed on remote evaporator units.
33 Fitted on units with single phase motors only.
34 Fitted on units with low ambient option only.
35 Only fitted on units with an acoustic kit.
36 Only fitted on heat recovery units.
37 Only fitted on condensing units.
38 Omitted on condensing units.
39 Fitted on units with low ambient option using single phase motors (50hz only).
40 Fitted on units with high airflow fan option only.
41 Part of e-link kit option.
42 Part of temp. sensor kit (on condensing units only).
When the compressors motor protection (-bmp) includes phase reversal the extra -bmp terminals and three wires are
43
fitted as shown in the compressor terminal box as detailed for 1-zcpr1 (copeland).
When the compressors motor protection (-bmp) includes phase reversal the extra -bmp terminals and three wires are
44
fitted as shown in the compressor terminal box as detailed for bitzer.

68 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.72-NM2 (811)
SECTION 5 – TECHNICAL DATA
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

JOHNSON CONTROLS 69
 FORM 150.72-NM2 (811)
SECTION 5 – TECHNICAL DATA
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011

WIRING DIAGRAMS

ELEMENTARY WIRING DIAGRAMS

035-21583-101 REV F

See Figure 23 on page 92 for Single / Dual Point Wiring Options.

Figure 12 - ELEMENTARY WIRING DIAGRAM

70 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.72-NM2 (811)
SECTION 5 – TECHNICAL DATA
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011

JOHNSON CONTROLS 71
 FORM 150.72-NM2 (811)
SECTION 5 – TECHNICAL DATA
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011

035-21583-102 REV F

Figure 13 - ELEMENTARY WIRING DIAGRAM

72 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.72-NM2 (811)
SECTION 5 – TECHNICAL DATA
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011

JOHNSON CONTROLS 73
 FORM 150.72-NM2 (811)
SECTION 5 – TECHNICAL DATA
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011

CONDENSER FAN MAPPING AND SEQUENCING

035-21589-107 REV D

Figure 14 - CONDENSER FAN MAPPING AND SEQUENCING

74 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.72-NM2 (811)
SECTION 5 – TECHNICAL DATA
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011

JOHNSON CONTROLS 75
 FORM 150.72-NM2 (811)
SECTION 5 – TECHNICAL DATA
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011

COMPRESSOR WIRING
035-21589-106 REV H

Figure 15 - COMPRESSOR WIRING

76 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.72-NM2 (811)
SECTION 5 – TECHNICAL DATA
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011

JOHNSON CONTROLS 77
 FORM 150.72-NM2 (811)
SECTION 5 – TECHNICAL DATA
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011

POWER OPTIONS CONNECTION DIAGRAM

035-21589-103 REV B

035-21589-103 REVB

LD13234A

Figure 16 - POWER OPTIONS CONNECTION DIAGRAM

78 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.72-NM2 (811)
SECTION 5 – TECHNICAL DATA
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011

LD13901

JOHNSON CONTROLS 79
 FORM 150.72-NM2 (811)
SECTION 5 – TECHNICAL DATA
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011

POWER PANEL

035-21589-101 REV C

Figure 17 - POWER PANEL

80 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.72-NM2 (811)
SECTION 5 – TECHNICAL DATA
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011

JOHNSON CONTROLS 81
 FORM 150.72-NM2 (811)
SECTION 5 – TECHNICAL DATA
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011

FAN WIRING
035-21583-103 REV B

Figure 18 - FAN WIRING, STANDARD LOW SOUND OR ULTRA QUIET, YLAA0070 - YLAA0135,
YLAA0150 AND YLAA0155

82 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.72-NM2 (811)
SECTION 5 – TECHNICAL DATA
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011

JOHNSON CONTROLS 83
 FORM 150.72-NM2 (811)
SECTION 5 – TECHNICAL DATA
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011

FAN WIRING (CONT’D)

035-21583-115 REV A

Figure 19 - FAN WIRING, STANDARD LOW SOUND OR ULTRA QUIET, YLAA0141

84 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.72-NM2 (811)
SECTION 5 – TECHNICAL DATA
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011

JOHNSON CONTROLS 85
 FORM 150.72-NM2 (811)
SECTION 5 – TECHNICAL DATA
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011

FAN WIRING (CONT’D)

035-21583-104 REV B

Figure 20 - FAN WIRING, STANDARD LOW SOUND OR ULTRA QUIET, YLAA0070 - YLAA0175

86 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.72-NM2 (811)
SECTION 5 – TECHNICAL DATA
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011

JOHNSON CONTROLS 87
 FORM 150.72-NM2 (811)
SECTION 5 – TECHNICAL DATA
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011

FAN WIRING (CONT’D)

035-21583-118 REV A

Figure 21 - FAN WIRING, HIGH AIR FLOW

88 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.72-NM2 (811)
SECTION 5 – TECHNICAL DATA
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011

JOHNSON CONTROLS 89
 FORM 150.72-NM2 (811)
SECTION 5 – TECHNICAL DATA
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011

MICRO PANEL CONNECTIONS

035-21589-102 REV F

Figure 22 - MICRO PANEL CONNECTIONS

90 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.72-NM2 (811)
SECTION 5 – TECHNICAL DATA
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011

JOHNSON CONTROLS 91
 FORM 150.72-NM2 (811)
SECTION 5 – TECHNICAL DATA
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011

SINGLE AND DUAL POINT WIRING OPTIONS

035-21583-102 REV A

SINGLE POINT WIRING OPTIONS

DUAL POINT WIRING OPTIONS

Figure 23 - SINGLE AND DUAL POINT WIRING OPTIONS

92 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.72-NM2 (811)
SECTION 5 – TECHNICAL DATA
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011

PUMP WIRING

Figure 24 - PUMP WIRING LD13237

JOHNSON CONTROLS 93
 FORM 150.72-NM2 (811)
SECTION 5 – TECHNICAL DATA
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011

DIMENSIONS (ENGLISH)
FOUR FAN UNITS
DIMENSIONS – YLAA0070 TO 0090 (ENGLISH)

H
F

R1 R2
W C1 C2
L

Water Connection Sizes are shown in the Physical

Data Table, see Table 5 on page 48
4F an_assya

L W H
YLAA Model F P D C1 C2 R2 R1
(length) (width) (height)
YLAA0070SE 116.0 88.3 94.2 88.5 42.8 13.4 19.0 84.5 68.3 23.0
YLAA0080SE 116.0 88.3 94.2 88.5 42.8 15.0 18.6 85.0 68.3 23.0
YLAA0090SE 116.0 88.3 94.2 88.5 42.8 16.3 19.6 83.0 68.3 23.0

NOTE:
Placement on a level surface of free of obstructions (including snow, for winter operation) or air circulation ensures rated performance, reliable
operation, and ease of maintenance. Site restrictions may compromise minimum clearances indicated below, resulting in unpredictable airflow
patterns and possible diminished performance. Johnson Control’s unit controls will optimize operation without nuisance high-pressure safety
cutouts; however, the system designer must consider potential performance degradation. Access to the unit control center assumes the unit is
no higher than on spring isolators. Recommended minimum clearances: Side to wall – 6'; rear to wall – 6'; control panel to end wall – 4'0'';
top – no obstructions allowed; distance between adjacent units – 10'. No more than one adjacent wall may be higher than the unit.

94 JOHNSON CONTROLS
 FORM 150.72-NM2 (811)
SECTION 5 – TECHNICAL DATA
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011

DIMENSIONS – YLAA0100 (ENGLISH)

FIVE FAN UNITS

L
5/8” DIA. MOUNTING HOLES (TYP)

I1 I2
(TYP)

F H

W R2 R1
C1
C2 TYP

Five Fan Units

L W H
YLAA Model F P D C1 C2 R2 R1
(length) (width) (height)
YLAA0100SE 143.5 88.3 94.2 88.5 42.8 15 18.6 85.5 96 23.0

NOTE:
Placement on a level surface of free of obstructions (including snow, for winter operation) or air circulation ensures rated performance, reliable
operation, and ease of maintenance. Site restrictions may compromise minimum clearances indicated below, resulting in unpredictable airflow
patterns and possible diminished performance. Johnson Control’s unit controls will optimize operation without nuisance high-pressure safety
cutouts; however, the system designer must consider potential performance degradation. Access to the unit control center assumes the unit is
no higher than on spring isolators. Recommended minimum clearances: Side to wall – 6'; rear to wall – 6'; control panel to end wall – 4'0'';
top – no obstructions allowed; distance between adjacent units – 10'. No more than one adjacent wall may be higher than the unit.

JOHNSON CONTROLS 95
 FORM 150.72-NM2 (811)
SECTION 5 – TECHNICAL DATA
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011

DIMENSIONS – YLAA0091 TO 0120 (ENGLISH)

SIX FAN UNITS

C1 C2
W
L
R1 R2
TYP TYP

Water Connection Sizes are shown in the Physical 6F an_assya

Data Table, see Table 5 on page 48

L W H
YLAA Model F P D C1 C2 R2 R1
(length) (width) (height)
YLAA0091HE 143.5 88.3 94.2 89.5 42.8 15.0 18.6 85.0 96.0 23.0
YLAA0101HE 143.5 88.3 94.2 89.5 42.8 15.0 18.6 85.0 96.0 23.0
YLAA0115SE 143.5 88.3 94.2 89.5 42.8 15.0 18.6 85.0 96.0 23.0
YLAA0120SE 143.5 88.3 94.2 89.5 42.8 17.3 22.0 102.0 96.0 23.0

NOTE:
Placement on a level surface of free of obstructions (including snow, for winter operation) or air circulation ensures rated performance, reliable
operation, and ease of maintenance. Site restrictions may compromise minimum clearances indicated below, resulting in unpredictable airflow
patterns and possible diminished performance. Johnson Control’s unit controls will optimize operation without nuisance high-pressure safety
cutouts; however, the system designer must consider potential performance degradation. Access to the unit control center assumes the unit is
no higher than on spring isolators. Recommended minimum clearances: Side to wall – 6'; rear to wall – 6'; control panel to end wall – 4'0'';
top – no obstructions allowed; distance between adjacent units – 10'. No more than one adjacent wall may be higher than the unit.

96 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.72-NM2 (811)
SECTION 5 – TECHNICAL DATA
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011

DIMENSIONS – YLAA01255 - 0155 (ENGLISH)

EIGHT FAN UNITS

Water connection sizes are shown in

Physical Data, see Table 5 on page
48

5
F H

R3 R2 R1
W C1 C2 (TYP)
L

8Fan_assyax

L W H
YLAA Model F P D C1 C2 R3 R2 R1
(length) (width) (height)
YLAA0125HE 187.5 88.3 94.2 88.5 42.8 15 18.6 85 58 66 39
YLAA0135SE 187.5 88.3 94.2 88.5 42.8 16.3 19.6 83 58 66 39
YLAA0141HE 187.5 88.3 94.2 88.5 42.8 17.3 22.1 102 58 66 39
YLAA0150SE 187.5 88.3 94.2 88.5 42.8 16.3 19.6 83 58 66 39
YLAA0155SE 187.5 88.3 94.2 88.5 42.8 17.3 22 102 58 66 39

NOTE:
Placement on a level surface of free of obstructions (including snow, for winter operation) or air circulation ensures rated performance, reliable
operation, and ease of maintenance. Site restrictions may compromise minimum clearances indicated below, resulting in unpredictable airflow
patterns and possible diminished performance. Johnson Control’s unit controls will optimize operation without nuisance high-pressure safety
cutouts; however, the system designer must consider potential performance degradation. Access to the unit control center assumes the unit is
no higher than on spring isolators. Recommended minimum clearances: Side to wall – 6'; rear to wall – 6'; control panel to end wall – 4'0'';
top – no obstructions allowed; distance between adjacent units – 10'. No more than one adjacent wall may be higher than the unit.

JOHNSON CONTROLS 97
 FORM 150.72-NM2 (811)
SECTION 5 – TECHNICAL DATA
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011

DIMENSIONS – YLAA0156 - 0175 (ENGLISH)

TEN FAN UNITS

5/8" DIA. MOUNTING HOLES (TYP)

I1 I2 I3
(TYP)

F H

R2 R1
(TYP)
C1
W C2
TEN FAN UNIT

L W H
YLAA MODEL F P D C1 C2 R4 R3 R2 R1
(LENGTH) (WIDTH) (HEIGHT)
YLAA0156HE 232.7 88.3 94.2 88.5 42.8 16.3 19.6 83 58 43 83 23
YLAA0170SE 232.7 88.3 94.2 88.5 42.8 16.3 19.6 83 58 43 83 23
YLAA0175HE 232.7 88.3 94.2 88.5 42.8 17.3 22.1 102 58 43 83 23

NOTE:
Placement on a level surface of free of obstructions (including snow, for winter operation) or air circulation ensures rated performance, reliable
operation, and ease of maintenance. Site restrictions may compromise minimum clearances indicated below, resulting in unpredictable airflow
patterns and possible diminished performance. Johnson Control’s unit controls will optimize operation without nuisance high-pressure safety
cutouts; however, the system designer must consider potential performance degradation. Access to the unit control center assumes the unit is
no higher than on spring isolators. Recommended minimum clearances: Side to wall – 6'; rear to wall – 6'; control panel to end wall – 4'0'';
top – no obstructions allowed; distance between adjacent units – 10'. No more than one adjacent wall may be higher than the unit.

98 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.72-NM2 (811)
SECTION 5 – TECHNICAL DATA
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011

WEIGHT DISTRIBUTION AND ISOLATOR Whenever the isolator option is ordered, the isolators
MOUNTING POSITIONS will be shipped loose with the chiller. Packed with
the isolators and also in the control panel informa-
General tion packet is a drawing and table specifically for each
Weights of specific chiller models vary significantly as chiller, based on the option selection. The drawing and
options are added. As a result, total weights, weights at table will be similar to the two samples shown below
individual isolator positions, and actual isolator selec- and on the following page. The drawing will show the
tion at each position cannot be published due to the isolator locations along with the weight in pounds and
vast number of possible combinations. This informa- kilograms at the specific location, isolator position,
tion will be available when the specific chiller/ option and location measurements for each isolator.
selection is made from the local Johnson Controls sales
office. Be aware, weights will change with each op- Sample Isolator Location Drawings
tion along with possible isolator changes. Weights and See Figure 25 below and Figure 26 on page 100 for
isolators may need to be recalculated when the option sample printouts supplied in the isolator package and
selections are changed. in the chiller panel literature packets.

Order No: 082181210101 UNIT SHIPPING KG LBS.

Line No: 1 WEIGHT
Product: YLAA (Display on unit data
2032 4480
Model: YLAA0070SE17XAA nameplate)
5
Volatage: 17
Remote clr: X
Sound encl: X
L1 L2
Control Panel

0
LD13276
R1 R2
0 Y

Top View
X

X DISTANCE Y DISTANCE
OPERATING WEIGHT
LOCATION INCHES (MM) INCHES (MM) VENDOR NUMBER
LBS (KG)

R1 19.5 (495.3) 1.36 (34.5) ND-D / Yellow 1092 (495.3)

L1 19.5 (495.3) 86.86 (2206.2) ND-D / Yellow 1406 (637.8)
R2 96.1 (2440.9) 1.36 (34.5) ND-D / Yellow 1015 (460.4)
L2 96.1 (2440.9) 86.86 (2206.2) ND-D / Yellow 1304 (591.5)

Figure 25 - SAMPLE PRINTOUT SUPPLIED IN THE ISOLATOR PACKAGE AND IN THE CHILLER PANEL
LITERATURE PACKET

JOHNSON CONTROLS 99
 FORM 150.72-NM2 (811)
SECTION 5 – TECHNICAL DATA
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011

Order No: 082533060301 UNIT SHIPPING KG LBS.

Line No: 1 WEIGHT
Product: YLAA (Display on unit data
2631 5801
Model: YLAA0101HE46XAA nameplate)

Volatage: 46
Remote clr: X
Sound encl: X

L1 L2
Control Panel

0
R1 R2
0 Y
LD13276

Top View
X

X DISTANCE Y DISTANCE
OPERATING WEIGHT
LOCATION INCHES (MM) INCHES (MM) VENDOR NUMBER
LBS (KG)

R1 7.6 (193.0) 1.36 (34.5) ND-D / Yellow 1312 (595.1)

L1 7.6 (193.0) 86.86 (2206.2) ND-DS / Yellow 1843 (836.0)
R2 124.76 (3168.9) 1.36 (34.5) ND-D / Yellow 1280 (580.6)
L2 124.76 (3168.9) 86.86 (2206.2) ND-DS / Yellow 1793 (813.3)

Figure 26 - SAMPLE PRINTOUT SUPPLIED IN THE ISOLATOR PACKAGE AND IN THE CHILLER PANEL
LITERATURE PACKET

100 JOHNSON CONTROLS

FORM 150.72-NM2 (811)
SECTION 5 – TECHNICAL DATA
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011

CLEARANCES
See Figure 27 below for minimum clearances for all
YLAA units.

(2 m)
5
(1.3 m) (2 m)
(2 m)

NOTES:
1. No obstructions allowed above the unit.
2. Only one adjacent wall may be higher than the unit.
3. Adjacent units should be 10 feet (3 Meters) apart.

Figure 27 - UNIT CLEARANCES – ALL MODELS

JOHNSON CONTROLS 101

 FORM 150.72-NM2 (811)
SECTION 5 – TECHNICAL DATA
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011

ISOLATOR LOCATIONS

A
I1, I5 I2, I6
TYP TYP

AVM LOCATIONS
YLAA MODEL I1 I2 I5 I6 A B
YLAA0070SE 19.5 76.6 19.5 76.6 1.4 85.5
YLAA0080SE 19.5 76.6 19.5 76.6 1.4 85.5
YLAA0090SE 19.5 76.6 19.5 76.6 1.4 85.5

A
I1, I5 I2, I6
TYP TYP

YLAA MODEL I1 I2 I5 I6 A B
YLAA0091HE 7.6 117.2 7.6 117.2 1.4 85.5
YLAA0100SE 7.6 117.2 7.6 117.2 1.4 85.5
YLAA0101HE 7.6 117.2 7.6 117.2 1.4 85.5
YLAA0115SE 7.6 117.2 7.6 117.2 1.4 85.5
YLAA0120SE 7.6 117.2 7.6 117.2 1.4 85.5
NOTE: All dimensions in inches.
102 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.72-NM2 (811)
SECTION 5 – TECHNICAL DATA
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011

ISOLATOR LOCATIONS (CONT’D)

5
A
I1, I5 I2, I6 I3, I7
TYP TYP TYP

YLAA MODEL I1 I2 I3 I5 I6 I7 A B
YLAA0091HE 7.6 69 80 7.6 69 80 1.4 85.5
YLAA0100SE 7.6 69 80 7.6 69 80 1.4 85.5
YLAA0101HE 7.6 69 80 7.6 69 80 1.4 85.5
YLAA0115SE 7.6 69 80 7.6 69 80 1.4 85.5
YLAA0120SE 7.6 69 80 7.6 69 80 1.4 85.5

NOTE: All dimensions in inches.

JOHNSON CONTROLS 103

 FORM 150.72-NM2 (811)
SECTION 5 – TECHNICAL DATA
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011

ISOLATOR LOCATIONS (CONT’D)

I1, I5 I2, I6 I3, I7 I4, I8

A
CONTROL PANEL END

YLAA MODEL I1 I2 I3 I4 I5 I6 I7 I8 A B
YLAA0156HE 7.6 69 72.5 63.6 7.6 69 72.5 63.6 1.4 85.5
YLAA0170SE 7.6 69 72.5 63.6 7.6 69 72.5 63.6 1.4 85.5
YLAA0175HE 7.6 69 72.5 63.6 7.6 69 72.5 63.6 1.4 85.5

NOTE: All dimensions in inches.

104 JOHNSON CONTROLS

FORM 150.72-NM2 (811)
SECTION 5 – TECHNICAL DATA
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011

ISOLATOR INFORMATION
For Units Shipped On Or After June 15, 2008
One Inch Deflection Spring Isolator Cross-reference
CP

5/8"

Ø1/2"

H"

C"
T"
B" L" 5
D"
W"
LD13759A

MOUNT DIMENSION DATA (INCHES)

TYPE W D L B C T H
CP1 3 5/8 7-3/4 6-1/2 4-3/4 1/2 5-5/8
CP2 3 5/8 10-1/2 9-1/4 7-3/4 9/16 6

MODEL NUMBER RATED CAPACITY (LBS) DEFLECTION RATED (IN) COLOR CODE
CP1-1D-85 85 1.360 LT. PURPLE
CP1-1D-120 120 1.200 DK. YELLOW
CP1-1D-175 175 1.170 DK. BLUE
CP1-1D-250 250 1.400 YELLOW
CP1-1D-340 340 1.130 RED
CP1-1D-510 510 1.020 BLACK
CP1-1D-675 675 1.320 DK. PURPLE
CP1-1D-900 900 1.020 DK. GREEN
CP1-1D-1200 1200 0.900 GRAY
CP1-1D-1360 1360 0.770 WHITE
CP1-1D-1785N 1785 0.880 GRAY/RED

MODEL NUMBER RATED CAPACITY (LBS) DEFLECTION RATED (IN) COLOR CODE
CP2-1D-1020 1020 1.020 BLACK
CP2-1D-1350 1350 1.320 DK. PURPLE
CP2-1D-1800 1800 1.020 DK. GREEN
CP2-1D-2400 2400 0.900 GRAY
CP2-1D-2720 2720 0.770 WHITE
CP2-1D-3570N 3570 0.880 GRAY / RED

JOHNSON CONTROLS 105

 FORM 150.72-NM2 (811)
SECTION 5 – TECHNICAL DATA
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011

ONE INCH DEFLECTION SPRING ISOLATORS INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS

Units shipped on or after June 15, 2008

1. Read instructions in their entirety before begin- 6. The adjustment process can only begin after the
ning installation. equipment or machine is at its full operating
weight.
2. Isolators are shipped fully assembled and are to be
positioned in accordance with the submittal draw- 7. Adjust each isolator in sequence by turning spring
ings or as otherwise recommended. adjusting bolt (“D”) one full counterclockwise
turn at a time. Repeat this procedure on all isola-
3. Set isolators on floor, housekeeping pad or sub-
tors, one at a time.
base, ensuring that all isolators centerlines match
the equipment mounting holes. The VMC group 8. Continue adjusting each isolator until a minimum
recommends that the isolator base (“B”) be in- of 1/4” clearance is achieved between the lower
stalled on a level surface. Shim or grout as re- housing and upper housing. (See drawing below).
quired, leveling all isolator bases to the same
9. Fine adjust isolators to level equipment.
elevation (1/4-inch maximum difference can be
tolerated). 10. Installation is complete.
4. Bolt or anchor all isolators to supporting structure
utilizing base slotted holes (“C”).
5. Place equipment on top of isolators making sure
that mounting holes of the equipment line up with
isolator positioning pin (“H”).

LD13790

106 JOHNSON CONTROLS

FORM 150.72-NM2 (811)
SECTION 5 – TECHNICAL DATA
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011

SEISMIC ISOLATOR CROSS-REFERENCE

Units shipped on or after June 15, 2008
Y2RS
5" 1-1/8"

5/8" 2-3/4"
2-3/4"
12"

3/8" GAP
5/8-11UNC
Ø3/4" TYP. (4)
TYP.(4)

3/4"
7/8"

1/2" LIMIT
STOP &
NUT 8-3/8"
OPER.
HEIGHT
12-1/4"
14"

3-1/2" LD13761A
3/8"

5"

NOTES:

Notes: 1. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES, INTERPRET PER ANSI Y14.

2. STANDARD FINISH: HOUSING-POWDER COATED (COLOR:BLACK), SPRING-POWDER COATED (COLOR: SEE T
HARDWARE ZINC-ELECTROPLATE.
3. EQUIPMENT MUST BE BOLTED OR WELDED TO THE TOP PLATE TO MEET ALLOWABLE SEISMIC RATINGS.
1. All dimensions are in inches, interpret per ANSI 3. Equipment must be bolted or welded to the top
4. ALL SPRINGS ARE DESIGNED FOR 50% OVERLOAD CAPACITY WITH EXCEPTION OF THE 2D-3280N & 2D-2870
5
5. REFER TO PAGE FOR INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS.
Y14. 6. CONSULT FACTORY FOR CONCRETE INSTALLATION. plate to meet allowable seismic ratings.
2. Standard finish: housing-powder coated (color, 4. All springs are designed for 50% overload capac-
black), spring-powder coated (color, see table be- ity with exception of the 2D-3280N and 2D-2870.
low) hardware - zinc-electroplate.
5. Refer to next page for installation instructions.
6. Consult factory for concrete installation.

MODEL Y2RSI-2D SEISMICALLY RESTRAINED VIBRATION ISOLATOR FOR 2” DEFLECTION

ALLOWABLE
SEISMIC RATED LOAD RATED DE- SPRING RATE SOLID LOAD
COLOR CODE G RATING
MOUNT SIZE (LBS) FLECTION (IN) (LBS/IN) (LBS)
HORIZONTAL
Y2RSI-2D-150 150 2.4 62 234 WHITE 34.7
Y2RSI-2D-320 320 2.3 140 490 YELLOW 16.3
Y2RSI-2D-460 460 2.3 200 688 GREEN 11.3
Y2RSI-2D-710 710 2.2 330 1072 DK BROWN 7.3
Y2RSI-2D-870 870 1.9 460 1312 RED 6
Y2RSI-2D-1200N 1200 1.9 638 1818 RED/BLACK 4.3
Y2RSI-2D-1450 1450 1.8 900 2450 TAN 3.6
Y2RSI-2D-1690 1690 1.7 1140 2892 PINK 3.1
Y2RSI-2D-2000N 2000 1.7 1318 3342 PINK/BLACK 2.6
Y2RSI-2D-2640N 2640 1.5 1854 4283 PINK/GRAY 2
PINK/GRAY/
Y2RSI-2D-2870N 3080 1.5 2004 4629 1.7
ORANGE
PINK/GRAY/DK
Y2RSI-2D-3280N 3740 1.8 2134 4930 1.4
BROWN

JOHNSON CONTROLS 107

 FORM 150.72-NM2 (811)
SECTION 5 – TECHNICAL DATA
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011

SEISMIC ISOLATOR INSTALLATION AND ADJUSTMENT

Units shipped on or after June 15, 2008

1. Read instructions in their entirety before begin- equipment or bracket to the top plate (“A”) of iso-
ning installation. lator with a minimum of 3/8 fillet welds 2" long @
3" on center for a minimum total weld of 10". (All
2. Isolators are shipped fully assembled and are to be
sides of equipment or bracket resting on top plate
positioned in accordance with the submittal draw-
(“A”) must be welded).
ings or as otherwise recommended.
7. The adjustment process can only begin after the
3. Set isolators on floor, housekeeping pad, or sub-
equipment or machine is at its full operating
base, ensuring that all isolator centerlines match
weight.
the equipment mounting holes. The VMC group
recommends that the isolator base plates (“B”) be 8. Back off each of the (4) limit stop lock nuts (“F”)
installed on a level surface. Shim or grout as re- on isolators 1/2".
quired, leveling all isolator base plates to the same
9. Adjust each isolator in sequence by turning spring
elevation (1/4-inch maximum difference can be
adjusting nuts (“G”) one full clockwise turn at a
tolerated).
time. Repeat this procedure on all isolators, one
4. Bolt or anchor all isolators to supporting structure at a time. Check the limit stop lock nuts (“F”)
utilizing base plate thru holes (“C”) or weld base periodically to ensure that clearance between the
plate to supporting structure with 3/8 fillet weld washer and rubber grommet is maintained. Stop
2" long @ 4" on center around entire base plate or adjustment of isolator only when the top plate
as engineered for specific load and or field condi- (“A”) has risen just above the shim (“E”).
tions.
10. Remove all spacer shims (“E”).
5. Isolators are shipped to the job site with (2) re-
11. Fine adjust isolators to level equipment.
movable spacer shims (“E”) between the top plate
and the housing. These shims must be in place 12. Adjust all limit stop lock nuts (“F”) per isolator,
when the equipment is positioned over the isola- maintaining a 1/4 to 3/8-inch gap. The limit stop
tors. nuts must be kept at this gap to ensure uniform
bolt loading during uplift (as the case when equip-
6. With all shims (“E”) in place, position equipment
ment is drained).
on top of plate (“A”) of isolator. Bolt equipment
securely to top plate of isolator using a minimum 13. Installation is complete.
of (2) 5/8 UNC A325 grade 5 SAE bolts or weld

("A") ("E") CL ("G") ("E") ("A") CL

GROMMET

1/4 - 3/8 GAP EQUIPMENT

("F")
WASHER ("E")
("F")

("C")
("C")
("B")

LD13763B

108 JOHNSON CONTROLS

 FORM 150.72-NM2 (811)
SECTION 5 – TECHNICAL DATA
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011

DURALENE ISOLATOR CROSS-REFERENCE

Units shipped on or after June 15, 2008

RD-Style DW

Isolators

CD

LD13760A
MOLDED
DURULENE

HF ø AD THRU
TYP 2 PLACES

BT

AL
W
L

1. All dimensions are inches, interpreted per ANSI 4. AL = Mounting hole center to center spacing.
Y14. Notes:
1. All dimensions are inches, interpreted per ANSI Y14. 5. HF = Free height of mount, prior to loading. Op- 5
2. Refer to Page 98 for installation instructions.
2. Refer to next page for installation
3. Mount molded instructions.
in weather resistant duralene compound aserating height
standard. Also available calculated
in other materials by the free height less
such as natural rubber, extreme high temperature silicone, high-damped silicone, nitrile and EDPM.
4. AL = Mounting hole center to center spacing. the static deflection under load. All dimensions
3. Mount molded in weather 5. HFresistant
= Free heightduralene
of mount, priorcom-
to loading. Operating height calculated by the free height less the
static deflection under load. All dimensions for reference only.for reference only.
pound as standard. Also6.available in other materi-
Hardware zinc-electroplated.

als such as natural rubber, extreme high tempera- 6. Hardware zinc-electroplated.

ture silicone, high-damped silicone, nitrile and
EDPM.

MOUNT DIMENSION DATA (INCHES)

TYPE L W HF AL AD BT CD DW
RD1-WR 3.13 1.75 1.25 2.38 0.34 0.19 5/16-18 UNC X 3/4 1.25
RD2-WR 3.88 2.38 1.75 3.00 0.34 0.22 3/8-16 UNC X 1 1.75
RD3-WR 5.50 3.38 2.88 4.13 0.56 0.25 1/2-13 UNC X 1 2.50
RD4-WR 6.25 4.63 2.75 5.00 0.56 0.38 1/2-13 UNC X 1 3.00

RATED RATED DE- RATED RATED DE-

DURO DURO
MODEL NUMBER CAPACITY FLECTION MODEL NUMBER CAPACITY FLECTION
(± 5) (± 5)
(LBS) (IN) (LBS) (IN)
RD2-LIGHT BLUE-WR 35 0.4 30 RD3-Brown-WR 250 0.5 40
RD2-BROWN-WR 45 0.4 40 RD3-Brick Red-WR 525 0.5 50
RD2-BRICK RED-WR 70 0.4 50 RD3-Lime-WR 750 0.5 60
RD 2-LIME-WR 120 0.4 60 RD3 Charcoal-WR 1100 0.5 70

RATED RATED DE- RATED RATED DE-

DURO DURO
MODEL NUMBER CAPACITY FLECTION MODEL NUMBER CAPACITY FLECTION
(± 5) (± 5)
(LBS) (IN) (LBS) (IN)
RD2-LIGHT BLUE-WR 135 0.5 30 RD4-BROWN-WR 1500 0.5 40
RD2-BROWN-WR 170 0.5 40 RD4-BRICK RED-WR 2250 0.5 50
RD2-BRICK RED-WR 240 0.5 50 RD4-LIME-WR 3000 0.5 60
RD 2-LIME-WR 380 0.5 60 RD4 CHARCOAL-
4000 0.5 70
RD2 CHARCOAL-WR 550 0.5 70 WR

JOHNSON CONTROLS 109

 FORM 150.72-NM2 (811)
SECTION 5 – TECHNICAL DATA
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011

INSTALLATION OF DURULENE VIBRATION ISOLATORS

Units shipped on or after June 15, 2008

1. Read instructions in their entirety before begin- elevation (1/32-inch maximum difference can be
ning installation. tolerated).
2. Isolators are shipped fully assembled and are to be 4. Bolt or anchor all isolators to supporting structure
positioned in accordance with the submittal draw- utilizing base thru holes (“B”).
ings or as otherwise recommended.
5. Remove top bolt and top washer. Place equip-
3. Set isolators on floor, housekeeping pad, or sub- ment on top of isolators so that mounting holes
base, ensuring that all isolator centerlines match in equipment or base line up with threaded hole
the equipment mounting holes. The VMC group (“C”).
recommends that the isolator base (“A”) be in-
6. Reinstall top bolt and washer and tighten down.
stalled on a level surface. Shim or grout as re-
quired, leveling all isolator bases to the same 7. Installation is complete.

TOP BOLT
("B")
TOP WASHER

D D

("C")
("B")

CL CL ("A")
SECTION D-D
LD13762B

110 JOHNSON CONTROLS

 FORM 150.72-NM2 (811)
SECTION 5 – TECHNICAL DATA
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011

ISOLATOR INFORMATION
For units shipped before June 15, 2008

ONE INCH DEFLECTION SPRING ISOLATOR CROSS REFERENCE

CIP-X-
Illustration shows single spring CIP-B or CIP-C mount.

EQUIPMENT BASE Mounting may be

A operated 1/2" above
Free & Operating
Dowel Pin is 3/8" dia. for Height.
CIP-A & 1/2" thereafter
NOTE-
FERROUS HOUSING
CIP Mounts are not
to be used in seismic
SIDE ACCESS INTERNAL or wind load
ADJUSTMENT BOLT applications. TYPE CIP DIMENSIONS (inches)†
Turn clockwise to load
spring and maintain Free Free Min
& Operating Height. Size A L T W SW HCL HCW MBD SBC Ht. Ht.
FREE & CIP-B 5 3/ 4 8 1/4 1/ 2 2 3/4 7/ 16 6 1/2 11/2 3 /8 7 1/4 61/8 5 1/4
OPERATING CIP-C 6 5/ 8 8 7/8 9/ 16 3 1/2 7/ 16 7 1/4 13/4 3/ 8 7 7/8 63/4 6 3/4
HEIGHT

NON-SKID NEOPRENE †Casting dimensions may vary ±1/8"

ACOUSTICAL ISOLATION PAD L
(Bolting to floor is not necessary for
indoor applications)
T
W

SBC
5
HCL
MAX BOLT
DIA. - MBD

Slot Width - SW
All springs have additional
HCW
travel to solid equal to 50%
of the rated deflection.

BASE PLATE DIMENSIONS

FOR UNITS WITH ALL POINT LOADS LESS THAN 1404 LBS (637 KG)
WEIGHT RANGE WEIGHT RANGE
MODEL NUMBER COLOR YORK P/N
(LBS) (KG)
239 to 384 lbs 108 to 174 kg CIP-B- Red 029-24583-002
384 to 639 lbs 174 to 290 kg CIP-B- White 029-24583-003
639 to 851 lbs 290 to 386 kg CIP-B- Blue 029-24583-004
851 to 1064 lbs 386 to 483 kg CIP-B- Gray 029-24583-005
1064 to 1404 lbs 483 to 637 kg CIP-B- Black 029-24583-006

FOR UNITS WITH ANY POINT LOAD ABOVE 1404 LBS (637 KG)
WEIGHT RANGE WEIGHT RANGE
MODEL NUMBER COLOR YORK P/N
(LBS) (KG)
Up to 851 lbs Up to 386 kg CIP-C- Black 029-24583-007
851 to 1149 lbs 386 to 521 kg CIP-C- Yellow 029-24583-008
1149 to 1489 lbs 521 to 675 kg CIP-C- Red w/Black 029-24583-009
1489 to 1786 lbs 675 to 910 kg CIP-C- Yellow w/ Red 029-24583-010
1786 to 2028 lbs 910 to 920 kg CIP-C- Green w/ Yellow 029-24583-011
2028 to 2254 lbs 920 to 1022 kg CIP-C- Red w/ Red 029-24583-012
2254 to 2936 lbs 1022 to 1332 kg CIP-C- Green w/ Red 029-24583-013

JOHNSON CONTROLS 111

 FORM 150.72-NM2 (811)
SECTION 5 – TECHNICAL DATA
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011

INSTALLATION OF 1” DEFLECTION MOUNTS

Units shipped before June 15, 2008
1. Floor or steel frame should be level and smooth.
5. Complete piping and fill equipment with water,
2. 2For pad installations, isolators do not normally refrigerant, etc.
require bolting. If necessary, anchor isolators to
6. Turn leveling bolt of first isolator four full revolu-
floor through bolt holes in the base plate.
tions and proceed to each mount in turn.
Isolators must be bolted to the substruc-
7. Continue turning leveling bolts until the equip-
ture and the equipment must be bolted to
ment is fully supported by all mountings and the
the isolators when outdoor equipment is
equipment is raised free of the spacer blocks or
exposed to wind forces.
shims. Remove the blocks or shims.
8. Turn the leveling bolt of all mountings in either
3. Lubricate the threads of adjusting bolt. Loosen the direction in order to level the installation.
hold down bolts to allow for isolator adjustment.
9. Tighten the nuts on hold down bolts to permit a
4. Block the equipment 10mm (1/4”) higher than clearance of 2mm (1/8”) between resilient washer
the specified free height of the isolator. To use and underside of channel cap plate.
the isolator as blocking for the equipment, insert
a 10mm (1/4”) shim between the upper load plate 10. Installation is now complete.
and vertical uprights. Lower the equipment on the
blocking or shimmed isolators.

112 JOHNSON CONTROLS

FORM 150.72-NM2 (811)
SECTION 5 – TECHNICAL DATA
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011

NEOPRENE ISOLATOR CROSS-REFERENCE

Units shipped before June 15, 2008
ND-X

“CS”
"CS"CAP SCREW
Cap Screw

DD
“MBD” MAXIUM
Steel Plate - Top & BOLT DIAMETER
SteelBottom.
PlateNeoprene
- Top & "MBD" Max. Bolt Dia.
Bottom Neoprene
covered to prevent
covered to prevent
corosion.
corrosion

BC
BC
H
H LL
5
W
W T LD10569
T

ND

ENGLISH (Inches)
SIZE D H L T W BC CS MBD
ND-C 2-9/16 2-3/ 4 5-1/ 2 1/4 2-5/16 4-1/8 1/2-13 x 1 1/ 2
ND-D 3-3/8 2-3/4 6-1/4 5/16 4 5 1/2-13 x 1 1/ 2
ND-DS 3-3/8 2-3/4 6-1/4 5/16 4 5 1/2-13 x 1 1/ 2

SI (mm)
ND-C 65.1 69.9 139.7 6.4 58.7 101.9 1/2- 13 x 1” 12.7
ND-D 85.7 69.9 158.8 7.9 101.6 127.0 1/2- 13 x 1” 12.7
ND-DS 85.7 69.9 158.8 7.9 101.6 127.0 1/2- 13 x 1” 12.7

WEIGHT RANGE
WEIGHT RANGE (KG) MODEL NUMBER COLOR YORK P/N
(LBS)
UP TO 751 LBS Up to 341 kg ND-C Yellow 029-24584-001
751 TO 1651 LBS 341 to 749 kg ND-D Yellow 029-24584-002
1651 TO 3226 LBS 749 to 1463 kg ND-DS Yellow 029-24584-004

JOHNSON CONTROLS 113

 FORM 150.72-NM2 (811)
SECTION 5 – TECHNICAL DATA
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011

TWO INCH DEFLECTION, SEISMIC SPRING ISOLATOR

CROSS-REFERENCE - SLRS
Units shipped before June 15, 2008

"D" Tap - 4 Holes unless

otherwise requested
E
Vertical Limit E E
Stops-Out of
contact during E
normal operation
H
MBD -Max
Bolt
Diameter
Rubber
Snubbing T
Collar

HCL Adjustment
HCW L Bolt
W

Non-Skid Neoprene Pad-

Lower Internal
Enclosed Neoprene Pad can be removed if
Restraining Steel mounts are welded
Nut Acoustical into position.
Housing Pad LD10509

NOTES: Illustration above shows a SLRS-4-C2 (4 Springs). SLRS-8-2 & C2 have one spring, and SLRS-2-C2 has two springs.
    SLRS-6-C2 has six springs and SLRS-9-C2 has nine springs.

PIN 54 = S

*WEIGHT RANGE (LBS) *WEIGHT RANGE VENDOR P/N COLOR YORK P/N
(KG)
UP TO 358 LBS Up to 162 kg SLRS-2-C2-420 Red 029-24585-006

358-442 LBS 162 to 201 kg SLRS-2-C2-520 White 029-24585-007

443-581 LBS 201 to 264 kg SLRS-2-C2-660 Black 029-24585-008
582-782 LBS 264 to 335 kg SLRS-2-C2-920 Blue 029-24585-009
783-1037 LBS 335 to 471 kg SLRS-2-C2-1220 Green 029-24585-010
1038-1496 LBS 471 to 679 kg SLRS-2-C2-1760 Gray 029-24585-011
1497-2057 LBS 679 to 933 kg SLRS-2-C2-2420 Silver 029-24585-012
2058-2618 LBS 933 to 1188 kg SLRS-2-C2-3080 Gray w/ Red 029-24585-013
2619-3179 LBS 1188 to 1442 kg SLRS-2-C2-3740 Silver w/ Red 029-24585-014
* Value is de-rated by 15%

114 JOHNSON CONTROLS

FORM 150.72-NM2 (811)
SECTION 5 – TECHNICAL DATA
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011

SLRS SEISMIC ISOLATOR INSTALLATION AND ADJUSTMENT

Units shipped before June 15, 2008

1. To install and adjust mounts: 8. 7. Hold lower restraining nut in place and turn
vertical limit stop bolt counter-clockwise until
2. 1. Supports for mountings must be leveled to in-
there is a 1/8" gap between the bolt head and the
stallation's acceptable tolerances.
steel washer.
3. 2. Mountings not subjected to seismic or wind
9. 8. Turn adjustment bolt 8 turns on each mount.
forces do not require bolting to supports.
10. 9. Take one additional complete turn on each ad-
4. 3. Mountings subjected to seismic or wind forces
justment bolt in sequence until the top plate lifts
must be bolted or welded in position.
off of the lower restraining nuts. Take no addition-
5. 4. If mountings are welded in position, remove al turns on that mount. Continue with equal turns
lower friction pad before welding. on the other mounts until the top plates lift off of
the lower restraining nuts of all mounts.
6. 5. Set mountings with top channels held in place
by the lower restraining nuts and limit stops. 11. 10. Hold the limit stop bolt in place and turn the
lower restraining nut clockwise and tighten it
7. 6. Place equipment on mountings and secure by
against the stanchion. Repeat the same procedure
bolting or welding.
on all mounts.
12. 11. Top plate should remain at a fixed elevation,
5
"D" Tap - 4 Holes unless plus or minus 1/8".
otherwise requested
Vertical Limit
Stops-Out of
contact during LIMIT STOP
normal operation BOLT

MBD -Max 1/8"

Bolt
Diameter LOWER
Rubber RESTRAINING
Snubbing BOLTS
Collar
1/4"

Adjustment
Bolt

Non-Skid Neoprene Pad-

Lower Internal
Enclosed Neoprene Pad can be removed if
Restraining Steel mounts are welded SHIPPED & INSTALLED AFTER ADJUSTMENT
Nut Acoustical into position.
Housing Pad

LD10568

JOHNSON CONTROLS 115

 FORM 150.72-NM2 (811)
SECTION 5 – TECHNICAL DATA
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

116 JOHNSON CONTROLS

FORM 150.72-NM2 (811)
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011

SECTION 6 – COMMISSIONING
Commissioning of this unit should only Compressor Oil
be carried out by Johnson Controls Au- To add oil to a circuit – connect a Johnson Controls
thorized personnel. hand oil pump (Part No. 470-10654-000) to the 1/4” oil
charging connection on the compressors with a length
of clean hose or copper line, but do not tighten the flare
nut. Using clean oil of the correct type (“V” oil), pump
Commissioning personnel should be thoroughly famil- oil until all air has been purged from the hose then
iar with the information contained in this literature, in tighten the nut. Stroke the oil pump to add oil to the oil
addition to this section. system. Approximately 1.8 to 2.3 gallons is present in
the each refrigerant system. Oil levels in the oil equal-
Perform the commissioning using the detailed checks izing line sight glass should be between the bottom
outlined in the “EQUIPMENT PRE-STARTUP AND and the middle of the sight glass with the system OFF.
STARTUP CHECKLIST” on page 119 as the com- High oil levels may cause excessive oil carryover in
missioning procedure is carried out. the system. High oil concentration in the system may
cause nuisance trips resulting from incorrect readings
PREPARATION – POWER OFF
on the level sensor and temperature sensors. Tempera-
The following basic checks should be made with the ture sensor errors may result in poor liquid control and
customer power to the unit switched OFF. resultant liquid overfeed and subsequent damage to
the compressor. While running, a visible sign of oil
Inspection splashing in the sight glass is normal.
Inspect unit for installation damage. If found, take ac-
tion and/or repair as appropriate. Fans
Check that all fans are free to rotate and are not dam- 6
Refrigerant Charge aged. Ensure blades are at the same height when ro-
Packaged units are normally shipped as standard with tated. Ensure fan guards are securely fixed.
a full refrigerant operating charge. Check that refrig-
erant pressure is present in both systems and that no Isolation / Protection
leaks are apparent. If no pressure is present, a leak test Verify all sources of electrical supply to the unit are
must be undertaken, the leak(s) located and repaired. taken from a single point of isolation. Check that the
Remote systems and units are supplied with a nitrogen maximum recommended fuse sizes given in “SEC-
holding charge. These systems must be evacuated with TION 5 – TECHNICAL DATA” on page 45 has not
a suitable vacuum pump/recovery unit as appropriate been exceeded.
to below 500 microns.
Control Panel
Do not liquid charge with static water in the cooler.
Check the panel to see that it is free of foreign materi-
Care must also be taken to liquid charge slowly to
als (wire, metal chips, etc.) and clean out if required.
avoid excessive thermal stress at the charging point.
Once the vacuum is broken, charge into the condenser Power Connections
coils with the full operating charge as given in “SEC-
TION 5 – TECHNICAL DATA” on page 45. Check that the customer power cables are connected
correctly to the terminal blocks or optional circuit
Service and Oil Line Valves breaker. Ensure that connections of power cables with-
in the panels to the circuit breaker or terminal blocks
Open each compressor suction, economizer, and dis-
are tight.
charge service valve. If valves are of the back-seat
type, open them fully (counterclockwise) then close Grounding
one turn of the stem to ensure operating pressure is fed
to pressure transducers. Open the liquid line service Verify that the unit’s protective ground terminal(s) are
valve and oil return line ball valve fully in each system. properly connected to a suitable grounding point. En-
sure that all unit internal ground connections are tight.

JOHNSON CONTROLS 117

 FORM 150.72-NM2 (811)
SECTION 6 – COMMISSIONING
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011

Supply Voltage direction of water flow through the cooler. The inlet
Verify that the site voltage supply corresponds to should be at the refrigerant piping connection end of
the unit requirement and is within the limits given in the cooler. Purge air from the top of the cooler using
“SECTION 5 – TECHNICAL DATA” on page 45. the plugged air vent mounted on the top of the cooler
body.
PREPARATION – POWER ON
Flow rates and pressure drops must be within the limits
Perform the commissioning using the given in “SECTION 5 – TECHNICAL DATA” on page
detailed checks outlined in the “EQUIP- 45. Operation outside of these limits is undesirable
MENT PRE-STARTUP AND STARTUP and could cause damage.
CHECKLIST” on page 119 as the com-
missioning procedure is carried out. If mains power must be switched OFF for extended
maintenance or an extended shutdown period, the com-
pressor suction, discharge and economizer service stop
Apply power to the chiller. Turn on the option panel valves should be closed (clockwise). If there is a pos-
circuit breaker if supplied. sibility of liquid freezing due to low ambient tempera-
tures, the coolers should be drained or power should be
The machine is now live! applied to the chiller. This will allow the cooler heater
to protect the cooler from freezing down to –20 °F. Be-
fore placing the unit back in service, valves should be
opened and power must be switched ON (if power is
removed for more than 8 hours) for at least 8 hours (24
hours if ambient temperature is below 86 °F [30 °C])
Switch Settings
before the unit is restarted.
Assure the chiller OFF/ON UNIT switch at the bottom
of the keypad is OFF. Place the optional circuit break- Flow Switch
er handle on the panel door to ON. The customer’s dis- Verify a chilled water flow switch is correctly fitted in
connection devices can now be set to ON. the customer’s piping on the cooler outlet, and wired
Verify the control panel display is illuminated. Assure into the control panel correctly using shielded cable.
the system switches under the SYSTEM SWITCHES There should be a straight run of at least 5 pipe diam-
key are in the OFF position. eters on either side of the flow switch. The flow switch
should be connected to terminals 13 and 14 of XTBC1
Compressor Heaters
on the panel.
Verify the compressor heaters are energized. If the
ambient temperature is above 96 °F (36 °C) the com- Temperature Sensor(s)
pressor heaters must be on for at least 8 hours before Ensure the leaving liquid temperature sensor is coated
start-up to ensure all refrigerant liquid is driven out of with heat conductive compound (Part No. 013-00890-
the compressor and the oil. If the ambient temperature 000) and is inserted to the bottom of the water outlet
is below 86 °F (30 °C), allow 24 hours. sensor well in the cooler. This sensor also provides
some freeze protection and must always be fully in-
Water System
serted in the water outlet sensor well.
Verify the chilled liquid system has been installed cor-
rectly, and has been commissioned with the correct

118 JOHNSON CONTROLS

FORM 150.72-NM2 (811)
SECTION 6 – COMMISSIONING
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011

EQUIPMENT PRE-STARTUP AND STARTUP CHECKLIST

JOB NAME: _____________________________ 7. Check the control panel to ensure it is free of
……
foreign material (wires, metal chips, etc.).
SALES ORDER #: ________________________
8. Visually
…… inspect wiring (power and control).
LOCATION: _____________________________ Wiring MUST meet N.E.C. and local codes.
SOLD BY: ______________________________ 9. Check
…… tightness of power wiring inside the
power panel on both sides of the motor contac-
INSTALLING tors and overloads.
CONTRACTOR: _________________________
10. Check for proper size fuses in main and con-
……
PRE STARTUP trol circuits, and verify overload setting corre-
TECHNICIAN/ sponds with RLA and FLA values in electrical
COMPANY: _____________________________ tables (see Table 8 on page 52 and Table 10
on page 58).
PRE STARTUP DATE:
________________________ 11. Assure 120VAC Control Power to TB1 has 15
……
amp minimum capacity.
CHILLER MODEL #: ______________________
12.Be certain all water temp sensors are inserted
……
SERIAL #: ______________________________ completely in their respective wells and are
coated with heat conductive compound.
Pre Startup
13. Assure that evaporator TXV bulbs are strapped
……
Unit Checks (No Power) onto the suction lines at 4 or 8 o’clock posi-
The following basic checks should be made with the tions or suction temp. sensors if EEVs are in- 6
customer power to the unit switched OFF. stalled.

1. Inspect
…… the unit for shipping or installation Compressor Heaters (Power On – 24 Hours
damage. Prior To Start)
2. Assure that all piping has been completed.
…… 1. Apply 120VAC
…… and verify its value between
Terminals 5 and 2 of XTBC2. The voltage should
3. Visually check for refrigerant piping leaks.
…… be 120VAC plus or minus 10%.
4. Open suction line ball valve, discharge line ball
…… Power must be applied 24 hours prior to start-up.
valve, and liquid line valve for each system.
Each heater should draw approximately 0.5 to1A.
5. The compressor oil level should be maintained
……
so that an oil level is visible or splashing in the Startup
sight glass when fully loaded. At shutdown,
the oil level should be between the bottom and Panel Checks (Power On – Both Unit Switch
middle of the oil equalizing sight glass. Off)
1. 
…… Apply 3-phase power and verify its value.
6. Assure water pumps are ON. Check and adjust
…… Voltage imbalance should be no more than 2%
water pump flow rate and pressure drop across
of the average voltage.
the cooler (see “OPERATIONAL LIMITA-
TIONS (ENGLISH)” on page 45)). Verify 2. Apply
…… 120VAC and verify its value on the
flow switch operation. terminal block in the Power Panel. Make the
measurement between Terminals 5 and 2 of
Excessive flow may cause catastroph-
XTBC2. The voltage should be 120VAC plus
ic damage to the heat exchanger
or minus10%.
(evaporator).

JOHNSON CONTROLS 119

 FORM 150.72-NM2 (811)
SECTION 6 – COMMISSIONING
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011

Table 11 - SETPOINTS ENTRY LIST 5. Prior to this step, turn system 2 OFF (if appli-
……
OPTIONS
cable –refer to Option 2 under “UNIT KEYS”
on page 147 for more information on system
Display Language
switches). Connect a manifold gauge to sys-
Sys 1 Switch
tem 1 suction and discharge service valves.
Sys 2 Switch
Chilled Liquid Place the Unit Switch in the control panel to
* Ambient Control the ON position. As each compressor cycles
Local/Remote Mode
ON, ensure that the discharge pressure rises
and the suction pressure decreases. If this does
Control Mode
not occur, the compressor being tested is op-
Display Units
erating in the reverse direction and must be
* Lead/Lag Control
corrected. After verifying proper compressor
* Fan Control rotation, turn the Unit Switch to “OFF.”
Manual Override
Current Feedback The chilled liquid setpoint may need
** Soft Start
to be temporarily lowered to ensure all
compressors cycle ON.
** Unit Type
** Refrigerant Type
** Expansion Valve Type
COOLING SETPOINTS This unit uses scroll compressors which
Cooling Setpoint can only operate in one direction. Failure
Range to observe this will lead to compressor
EMS-PWM Max. Setpoint failure.
PROGRAM
Discharge Pressure Cutout
Suct. Pressure Cutout 6. Turn
…… system 1 OFF and system 2 ON (refer
Low Amb. Temp. Cutout to “Option 2 – System Switches (two system
Leaving Liquid Temp. Cutout units only)” under “UNIT KEYS” for more in-
Anti-Recycle Time formation on system switches)).
Fan Control ON Pressure Place the Unit Switch in the control panel to
Fan Differential OFF Pressure the ON position. As each compressor cycles
Total # of Compressors ON, ensure that the discharge pressure rises
* Number of Fans/System and the suction pressure decreases. If this does
* Unit/Sys Voltage not occur, the compressor being tested is op-
Unit ID erating in the reverse direction and must be
* Not on All Models corrected. After verifying proper compressor
** Viewable Only rotation, turn the Unit Switch to OFF.
The chilled liquid setpoint may need
3. Program/verify the Cooling Setpoints, Program
…… to be temporarily lowered to ensure all
Setpoints, and unit Options. Record the values
compressors cycle ON.
in Table 11 on page 120. (see “SETPOINTS
KEYS” on page 140 and “UNIT KEYS” on
page 147 for programming instruction).
4. Put the unit into Service Mode (see “SERVICE
……
MODE” on page 163) and cycle each con-
denser fan to ensure proper rotation.

120 JOHNSON CONTROLS

FORM 150.72-NM2 (811)
SECTION 6 – COMMISSIONING
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011

Checking Superheat And Subcooling Assure that superheat is set at a minimum of 10 °F (5.56
The subcooling temperature of each system can be cal- °C) with a single compressor running on each circuit.
culated by recording the temperature of the liquid line 2. Record the suction temperature, suction pres-
……
at the outlet of the condenser and subtracting it from sure, suction saturation temperature, and su-
the liquid line saturation temperature at the liquid stop perheat of each system below:
valve (liquid line saturation temp. is converted from a
temperature/pressure chart). SYS 1 SYS 2
Suction Temp = _______ _______ °F
Example: Suction Pressure = _______ _______ PSIG
Liquid line pressure =
325 PSIG converted to temp. 101 °F Saturation Temp = _______ _______ °F
minus liquid line temp. - 83 °F Superheat = _______ _______ °F
Subcooling = 18 °F Leak Checking

The subcooling should be adjusted to 18 °F at design 1. Leak check compressors, fittings, and piping
……
conditions. to ensure no leaks.
If the unit is functioning satisfactorily during the ini-
.
tial operating period, no safeties trip and the compres-
1. Record the liquid line pressure and its corre-
…… sors cycle to control water temperature to setpoint, the
sponding temperature, liquid line temperature
chiller is ready to be placed into operation.
and subcooling below:
Unit Operating Sequence
SYS 1 SYS 2 The operating sequence described below relates to op-
Liq Line Press = _______ _______ PSIG
eration on a hot water start after power has been ap-
Saturated Temp = _______ _______ °F
Liq Line Temp = _______ _______ °F plied, such as start-up commissioning. When a com- 6
Subcooling = _______ _______ °F pressor starts, internal timers limit the minimum time
before another compressor can start to 1 minute.
After the subcooling is verified, the suction superheat
1. For the chiller system to run, the Flow Switch
should be checked. The superheat should be checked
must be closed, any remote cycling contacts must
only after steady state operation of the chiller has been es-
be closed, the Daily Schedule must not be sched-
tablished, the leaving water temperature has been pulled
uling the chiller OFF, and temperature demand
down to the required leaving water temperature, and the
must be present.
unit is running in a fully loaded condition. Correct super-
heat setting for a system is 10 °F to 15 °F (5.56 °C to 8.33 2. When power is applied to the system, the micro-
°C) 18” (46 cm) from the heat exchanger. processor will start a 2 minute timer. This is the
same timer that prevents an instantaneous start af-
Superheat should typically be set for no less than 10 ter a power failure.
°F with only a single compressor running on a cir-
cuit. The superheat is calculated as the difference be- 3. At the end of the 2 minute timer, the micropro-
tween the actual temperature of the returned refrigerant cessor will check for cooling demand. If all con-
gas in the suction line entering the compressor and the ditions allow for start, a compressor on the lead
temperature corresponding to the suction pressure as system will start and the liquid line solenoid will
shown in a standard pressure/temperature chart. open. Coincident with the start, the anti-coinci-
dent timer will be set and begin counting down-
Example: ward from “60” seconds to “0” seconds.
Suction Temp = 46 °F
minus Suction Press If the unit is programmed for Auto Lead/Lag, the
105 PSIG converted to Temp - 34 °F system with the shortest average run-time of the
Superheat = 12 °F compressors will be assigned as the “lead” sys-
When adjusting the expansion valve (TXV only), the tem. A new lead/lag assignment is made whenever
adjusting screw should be turned not more than one all systems shut down.
turn at a time, allowing sufficient time (approximately 4. Several seconds after the compressor starts, that
15 minutes) between adjustments for the system and systems first condenser fan will be cycled ON
the thermal expansion valve to respond and stabilize.
JOHNSON CONTROLS 121
 FORM 150.72-NM2 (811)
SECTION 6 – COMMISSIONING
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011

(outdoor air temperature more than 25 °F (-4 °C) 7. As the load decreases below setpoint, the com-
or discharge pressure). See “STANDARD CON- pressors will be shut down in sequence. This
DENSER FAN CONTROL” on page 157 for de- will occur at intervals of either 60, 30, or 20 sec-
tails concerning condenser fan cycling. onds based on water temperature as compared
to setpoint, and control mode. See “LEAVING
5. After 1 minute of compressor run time, the next
CHILLED LIQUID CONTROL” on page 153
compressor in sequence will start when a sys-
for a detailed explanation.
tem has to load. Additional compressors will be
started at 60 second intervals as needed to satisfy 8. When the last compressor in a “system” (two or
temperature setpoint. three compressors per system), is to be cycled
OFF, the system will initiate a pump-down. Each
6. If demand requires, the lag system will cycle
“system” has a pump-down feature upon shut-off.
ON with the same timing sequences as the lead
On a non-safety, non-unit switch shutdown, the
system after the lead system has run for five min-
LLSV will be turned OFF and the last compressor
utes. Refer to the section on Capacity Control for
will be allowed to run until the suction pressure
a detailed explanation of system and compressor
falls below the suction pressure cutout or for 180
staging.
seconds, whichever comes first.

122 JOHNSON CONTROLS

FORM 150.72-NM2 (811)
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011

SECTION 7 – UNIT CONTROLS

YORK CONTROL CENTER

LD13283

INTRODUCTION IPU II AND I/O BOARDS

The YORK MicroComputer Control Center is a micro- The IPU and I/O boards are assembled to function as a
processor based control system designed to provide the single microprocessor controller requiring no addition-
entire control for the liquid chiller. The control logic al hardware. The IPU II board contains a coldfire mi-
embedded in the microprocessor based control system croprocessor and is the controller and decision maker
will provide control for the chilled liquid temperatures, in the control panel. The I/O board handles all of the
as well as sequencing, system safeties, displaying sta- chiller I/O (Inputs and Outputs). System inputs from
tus, and daily schedules. The MicroComputer Control pressure transducers and temperature sensors are con-
Center consists of four basic components: nected to the I/O board. The I/O board contains a pro-
cessor capable of reading the inputs and controlling the
1. IPU II and I/O Boards outputs. It communicates through the transition header 7
2. Transformer with the IPU II microprocessor.
3. Display The I/O board circuitry multiplexes the analog inputs,
digitizes them, and constantly scans them to keep
4. Keypad
watch on the chiller operating conditions. The input
The keypad allows programming and accessing set- values are transmitted serially to the IPU II micropro-
points, pressures, temperatures, cutouts, daily sched- cessor board. From this information, the IPU II then
ule, options, and fault information. issues commands to the I/O board relay outputs to
control contactors, solenoids, etc. for Chilled Liquid
Remote cycling, demand limiting and chilled liquid Temperature Control and to react to safety conditions.
temperature reset can be accomplished by field sup- The I/O board converts logic signals to operate relay
plied contacts. outputs to 115VAC levels used by motor contactors,
Compressor starting/stopping and loading/unload- fan contactors, solenoid valves, etc. to control system
ing decisions are performed by the Microprocessor to operation. The low voltage side of all relay coils on the
maintain leaving or return chilled liquid temperature. I/O board are powered by +12V.
These decisions are a function of temperature devia- Keypad commands are actuated upon by the micropro-
tion from setpoint. cessor to change setpoints, cutouts, scheduling, operat-
A Master ON/OFF switch is available to activate or de- ing requirements, and to provide displays. The keypad
activate the unit. and display are connected to the I/O board.

JOHNSON CONTROLS 123

 FORM 150.72-NM2 (811)
SECTION 7 – UNIT CONTROLS
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011

The on-board power supply converts 24VAC from When a key is pressed, such as the OPER DATA key,
75VA, 120/24VAC 50/60Hz UL listed class 2 power system parameters will be displayed and will remain
transformer to +12V, +5V and +3.3V using switching on the display until another key is pressed. The system
and linear voltage regulators located on the I/O and parameters can be scrolled with the use of the ↑ (UP)
IPU II boards. These voltages are used to operate in- and ↓ (DOWN) arrow keys. The display will update all
tegrated circuitry on the board. The 40 character dis- information at a rate of about 1 a second.
play and unit sensors (transducers and temp sensors)
are supplied power for the micro board +5V supply. Display Messages may show characters indicating
24VAC is rectified, but not regulated, to provide un- “greater than” (>) or “less than” (<). These characters
regulated +30VDC to supply all of the digital inputs. indicate the actual values are greater than or less than
the limit values which are being displayed.
The IPU II board contains one green “Power” LED to
indicate that the board is powered up and one red “Sta- KEYPAD
tus” LED to indicate by blinking that the processor is The 12 button non-tactile keypad allows the user to
operating. retrieve vitals system parameters such as system pres-
The I/O board contains one green “Power” LED to in- sures, temperatures, compressor running times and
dicate that the board is powered up and one red “Sta- starts, option information on the chiller, and system
tus” LED to indicate by blinking that the processor setpoints. This data is useful for monitoring chiller op-
is operating. The I/O board also contains two sets of eration, diagnosing potential problems, troubleshoot-
Receiver/Transmit LED’s, one for each available serial ing, and commissioning the chiller.
communication port. The receive LED’s are green, and It is essential the user become familiar with the use of the
the Transmit LED’s are red. keypad and display. This will allow the user to make full
A jumper on the I/O board selects 4 to 20mA or 0 to use of the capabilities and diagnostic features available.
10VDC as the input type on the remote temperature
UNIT SWITCH
reset analog input.
A unit ON/OFF switch is just underneath the keypad.
TRANSFORMER This switch allows the operator to turn the entire unit
A 75VA, 120/240VAC, 50/60Hz transformer is pro- OFF if desired. The switch must be placed in the ON
vided to supply power to the Microprocessor Board, position for the chiller to operate.
which in turn rectifies, filters, and regulates as neces-
BATTERY BACK-UP
sary to supply power to the display, sensors, and trans-
ducers. The IPU II contains a Real Time Clock integrated cir-
cuit chip with an internal battery backup. The purpose
DISPLAY of this battery backup is to assure any programmed
The 40 Character Display (2 lines of 20 characters) is values (setpoints, clock, cutouts, etc.) are not lost dur-
a liquid crystal display used for displaying system pa- ing a power failure regardless of the time involved in a
rameters and operator messages. power cut or shutdown period.

The display in conjunction with the keypad, allows the PROGRAMMING # OF COMPRESSORS
operator to display system operating parameters as well The total number of compressors is programmable un-
as access programmed information already in memory. der the PROGRAM key. Dual (2) system chillers can
The display has a lighted background for night viewing have 4, 5, or 6 compressors.
and for viewing in direct sunlight.

124 JOHNSON CONTROLS

FORM 150.72-NM2 (811)
SECTION 7 – UNIT CONTROLS
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011

STATUS KEY

00066VIP

Unit Status D A I L Y S C H E D U L E
Pressing the STATUS key will enable the operator to S H U T D O W N
determine current chiller operating status. The messag-
es displayed will include running status, cooling de- The DAILY SCHEDULE SHUTDOWN message in-
mand, fault status, external cycling device status. The dicates that the daily/holiday schedule programmed is
display will be a single message relating to the highest keeping the unit from running.
priority message as determined by the microprocessor.
Status messages fall into the categories of General Sta- REMOTE STOP
tus and Fault Status. NO RUN PERM

The following General, Safety, and Warning messages

REMOTE STOP NO RUN PERM shows that a remote
are displayed when the STATUS key is pressed. Fol-
start/stop contact is open in series with the flow switch.
lowing each displayed message is an explanation per-
These contacts are connected to Terminals 51 and 13 of
taining to that particular message.
XTBC1. A 3-second delay is built into the software to 7
General Status Messages prevent nuisance shutdowns due to erroneous signals
on the run permissive input.
In the case of messages which apply to individual
systems, SYS 1 and SYS 2 messages will both be dis- FLOW SWITCH
played and may be different. In the case of single sys- OPEN
tem units, all SYS 2 messages will be blank.
U N I T S W I T C H O F F
FLOW SWITCH OPEN indicates the flow switch con-
S H U T D O W N
tacts connected to Terminals 13 and 14 of XTBC1 are
open. A 3-second delay is built into software to pre-
vent nuisance shutdowns due to erroneous signals from
This message informs the operator that the UNIT switch the flow switch.
on the control panel is in the OFF position which will
not allow the unit to run. S Y S 1 S Y S S W I T C H O F F
S Y S 2 S Y S S W I T C H O F F
R E M O T E C O N T R O L L E D
S H U T D O W N
SYS SWITCH OFF tells that the system switch under
OPTIONS is turned OFF. The system will not be al-
The REMOTE CONTROLLED SHUTDOWN mes- lowed to run until the switch is turned back ON.
sage indicates that either an ISN system or RCC has
turned the unit OFF, not allowing it to run.

JOHNSON CONTROLS 125

 FORM 150.72-NM2 (811)
SECTION 7 – UNIT CONTROLS
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011

S Y S 1 N O C O O L L O A D cutout due to high load or pull down conditions. When

S Y S 2 N O C O O L L O A D the unload point is reached, the microprocessor will
automatically unload the affected system by de ener-
gizing one compressor. The discharge pressure unload
This message informs the operator that the chilled liq-
will occur when the discharge pressure gets within 10
uid temperature is below the point (determined by the
PSIG (0.69 barg) of the programmed discharge pres-
setpoint and control range) that the microprocessor
sure cutout. This will only happen if the system is fully
will bring on a system or that the microprocessor has
loaded and will shut only one compressor OFF. If the
not loaded the lead system far enough into the loading
system is not fully loaded, discharge limiting will not
sequence to be ready to bring the lag system ON. The
go into effect. Reloading the affected system will oc-
lag system will display this message until the loading
cur when the discharge pressure drops to 85% of the
sequence is ready for the lag system to start.
unload pressure and 10 minutes have elapsed.
S Y S 1 C O M P S R U N X
S Y S 1 S U C T L I M I T I N G
S Y S 2 C O M P S R U N X
S Y S 2 S U C T L I M I T I N G

The COMPS RUNNING message indicates that the

When this message appears, suction pressure limiting
respective system is running due to demand. The “X”
is in effect. The suction pressure limit is a control point
will be replaced with the number of compressors in
that limits the loading of a system when the suction
that system that are running.
pressure drops to within 15% above the suction pres-
S Y S 1 A R T I M E R X X S sure cutout. On a standard system programmed for 44
S Y S 2 A R T I M E R X X S PSIG/3.0 Bar suction pressure cutout, the micropro-
cessor would inhibit loading of the affected system
with the suction pressure less than or equal to 1.15 *
The anti-recycle timer message shows the amount of
44 PSIG/3.0 Bar = 50 PSIG/3.5 Bar. The system will
time left on the respective systems anti-recycle timer.
be allowed to load after 60 seconds and after the suc-
This message is displayed when the system is unable to
tion pressure rises above the suction pressure load limit
start due the anti-recycle timer being active.
point.
S Y S 1 A C T I M E R X X S
S Y S 1 L O A D L I M I T X X %
S Y S 2 A C T I M E R X X S
S Y S 2 L O A D L I M I T X X %

The anti-coincidence timer is a software feature that

This message indicates that load limiting is in effect
guards against 2 systems starting simultaneously. This
and the percentage of the limiting in effect. This limit-
assures instantaneous starting current does not become
ing could be due to the load limit/pwm input, ISN or
excessively high due to simultaneous starts. The mi-
RCC controller sending a load limit command.
croprocessor limits the time between compressor starts
to 1 minute regardless of demand or the anti-recycle M
A N
U A L
timer being timed out. The anti-coincidence timer is O V
E R
R I D E
only present on two system units.
S Y S 1 D S C H L I M I T I N G If MANUAL OVERRIDE mode is selected, the STA-
S Y S 2 D S C H L I M I T I N G TUS display will display this message. This will indi-
cate that the Daily Schedule is being ignored and the
chiller will start-up when chilled liquid temperature
When this message appears, discharge pressure limit-
allows, Remote Contacts, UNIT switch and SYSTEM
ing is in effect. The Discharge Pressure Limiting fea-
switches permitting. This is a priority message and can-
ture is integral to the standard software control; howev-
not be overridden by anti-recycle messages, fault mes-
er the discharge transducer is optional on some models.
sages, etc. when in the STATUS display mode. There-
Therefore, it is important to keep in mind that this con-
fore, do not expect to see any other STATUS messages
trol will not function unless the discharge transducer is
when in the MANUAL OVERRIDE mode. MANUAL
installed in the system.
OVERRIDE is to only be used in emergencies or for
The limiting pressure is a factory set limit to keep the servicing. Manual override mode automatically disables
system from faulting on the high discharge pressure itself after 30 minutes.

126 JOHNSON CONTROLS

FORM 150.72-NM2 (811)
SECTION 7 – UNIT CONTROLS
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011

S Y S 1 P U M P I N G D O W N The Suction Pressure Cutout is a software cutout that

S Y S 2 P U M P I N G D O W N helps protect the chiller from an evaporator freeze-up
should the system attempt to run with a low refrigerant
charge or a restriction in the refrigerant circuit.
The PUMPING DOWN message indicates that a com-
pressor in the respective system is presently in the pro- Repeated starts after resetting a low suc-
cess of pumping the system down. When pumpdown is tion pressure fault will cause evaporator
initiated on shutdown, the liquid line solenoid or EEV freeze-up. Whenever a system locks out
will close and a compressor will continue to run. When on this safety or any safety, immediate
the suction pressure decreases to the suction pressure steps should be taken to identify the cause.
cutout setpoint or runs for 180 seconds, whichever
comes first, the compressor will cycle OFF. At system start, the cutout is set to 10% of programmed
value. During the next 3 minutes the cutout point is
Fault Safety Status Messages ramped up to the programmed cutout point. If at any
time during this 3 minutes the suction pressure falls
Safety Status messages appear when safety thresholds
below the ramped cutout point, the system will stop.
in the unit have been exceeded. Safeties are divided
This cutout is completely ignored for the first 30 sec-
into two categories – system safeties and unit safeties.
onds of system run time to avoid nuisance shutdowns,
System safeties are faults that cause the individual sys-
especially on units that utilize a low pressure switch in
tem to be shut down. Unit safeties are faults that cause
place of the suction pressure transducer.
all running compressors to be shut down. Following
are display messages and explanations. After the first 3 minutes, if the suction pressure falls
below the programmed cutout setting, a “transient
System Safeties protection routine” is activated. This sets the cutout at
System safeties are faults that cause individual systems 10% of the programmed value and ramps up the cut-
to be shut down if a safety threshold is exceeded for 3 out over the next 30 seconds. If at any time during this
seconds. They are auto reset faults in that the system 30 seconds the suction pressure falls below the ramped
will be allowed to restart automatically after the fault cutout, the system will stop.
condition is no longer present. However, if 3 faults on
S Y S 1 M P / H P C O F A U L T
the same system occur within 90 minutes, that system
S Y S 2 M P / H P C O F A U L T
will be locked out on the last fault. This condition is
then a manual reset. The system switch (under OP-
7
TIONS key) must be turned OFF and then back on S Y S 1 M P / H P C O I N H I B
to clear the lockout fault. Fault messages will be dis- S Y S 2 M P / H P C O I N H I B
played whenever a system is locked out.
The Motor Protector/Mechanical High Pressure Cutout
S Y S 1 H I G H D S C H P R E S
protect the compressor motor from overheating or the
S Y S 2 H I G H D S C H P R E S
system from experiencing dangerously high discharge
pressure.
The Discharge Pressure Cutout is a software cutout in
the microprocessor and is backed-up by a mechanical This fault condition is present when CR1 (SYS 1) or
high pressure cutout switch located in the refrigerant CR2 (SYS 2) relays de-energize due to the HP switch
circuit. It assures that the system pressure does not ex- or motor protector opening. This causes the respective
ceed safe working limits. The system will shutdown CR contacts to open causing 0VDC to be read on the
when the programmable cutout is exceeded and will be inputs to the microboard. The fault condition is cleared
allowed to restart when the discharge pressure falls 40 when a 30VDC signal is restored to the input.
PSIG below the cutout. Discharge transducers must be The internal motor protector opens at 185 °F to 248 °F
installed for this function to operate. (85 °C to 120 °C) and auto resets. The mechanical HP
S Y S 1 L O W S U C T P R E S S switch opens at 585 PSIG plus or minus 10 PSIG (27.92
S Y S 2 L O W S U C T P R E S S barg plus or minus .69 barg) and closes at 330 PSIG plus
or minus 25 PSIG (22.75 barg plus or minus 1.72 barg).

JOHNSON CONTROLS 127

 FORM 150.72-NM2 (811)
SECTION 7 – UNIT CONTROLS
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011

The compressor is also equipped with a discharge Unit Safeties

temperature sensor for the purpose of sensing inter- Unit safeties are faults that cause all running compres-
nal scroll temperature. This sensor protects the scrolls sors to be shut down. Unit faults are auto reset faults
from overheating due to inadequate cooling that may in that the unit will be allowed to restart automatically
occur when refrigerant charge is low, or superheat is after the fault condition is no longer present.
too high.
U N I T F A U L T :
When the sensor senses a high temperature, it opens L O W A M B I E N T T E M P
the motor protector circuit in the compressor causing
the compressor to shut down.
The Low Ambient Temp Cutout is a safety shutdown
During the first two faults an MP/HP INHIBIT message designed to protect the chiller from operating in a low
will be displayed and the system will not be locked out. ambient condition. If the outdoor ambient temperature
Only after the third fault in 90 minutes will the MP/ falls below the programmable cutout, the chiller will
HPCO FAULT message be displayed. shut down. Restart can occur when temperature rises 2
°F above the cutoff.
Whenever the motor protector or discharge sensor
shuts down a compressor and the system, the inter- U N I T F A U L T :
nal compressor contacts will open for a period of 30 L O W L I Q U I D T E M P
minutes to assure that the motor or scroll temperatures
have time to dissipate the heat and cool down. The MP/
The Low Leaving Chilled Liquid Temp Cutout protects
HP INHIBIT message will be displayed while these
the chiller form an evaporator freeze-up should the
contacts are open or when the HPCO is open. chilled liquid temperature drop below the freeze point.
While this message is displayed, the compressors
This situation could occur under low flow conditions or
will not be permitted to start.
if the micro panel setpoint values are improperly pro-
After 30 minutes, the contacts will close and the sys- grammed. Anytime the leaving chilled liquid tempera-
tem will be permitted to restart. The microprocessor ture (water or glycol) drops below the cutout point, the
will not try to restart the compressors in a system that chiller will shutdown. Restart can occur when chilled
shuts down on this safety for a period of 30 minutes to liquid temperature rises 2 °F above the cutout.
allow the internal compressor to time out.
U N I T F A U L T :
During the 30 minute timeout, the MP/HPCO INHIB 1 1 5 V A C U N D E R V O L T A G E
message will be displayed. The MP/HPCO fault will
only be displayed after 3 shutdowns in 90 minutes, The Under Voltage Safety assures that the system is
indicating the system is locked out and will not not operated at voltages where malfunction of the mi-
restart. croprocessor could result in system damage. When the
115VAC to the micro panel drops below a certain level,
S Y S 1 H I G H M T R C U R R
a unit fault is initiated to safely shut down the unit. Re-
S Y S 2 H I G H M T R C U R R
start is allowed after the unit is fully powered again and
the anti-recycle timers have finished counting down.
When the System Current Feedback option is installed
and selected (Option 11 under OPTIONS key Current U N I T F A U L T :
Feedback), this safety will operate as follows. If the H I G H M T R C U R R
actual feedback voltage of the system proportional to
currents exceeds the programmed trip voltage for 5 When the CURRENT FEEDBACK ONE PER UNIT
seconds, the system will shutdown. option is selected under the OPTIONS key, the unit will
shut down when the voltage exceeds the programmed
This safety will shut down a system if either suction
trip voltage for 5 seconds.
temperature or suction pressure sensors read out of
range high or low. This condition must be present for 3 The trip voltage is programmed at the factory accord-
seconds to cause a system shutdown. The safety locks ing to compressor or unit RLA.
out a system after the first fault and will not allow au-
tomatic restarting. Restart will occur after the anti-recycle timer times out.

128 JOHNSON CONTROLS

FORM 150.72-NM2 (811)
SECTION 7 – UNIT CONTROLS
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011

Unit Warning GRAM key is pressed. Once PROGRAM is pressed

The following messages are not unit safeties and will the anti-recycle timers will be set to the programmed
not be logged to the history buffer. They are unit warn- anti-recycle time to allow the operator time to check
ings and will not auto-restart. Operator intervention is setpoints, and if necessary, reprogram programmable
required to allow a restart of the chiller. values and options.

! ! L O W B A T T E R Y ! ! If a low battery is detected, it should be replaced as

C H E C K P R O G / S E T P / O P T N soon as possible. The programmed values will all be
lost and the unit will be prevented from running on the
next power interruption. The RTC/battery (031-02565-
The Low Battery Warning can only occur at unit pow- 000) is located at U5 on the microboard.
er-up. On micro panel power-up, the RTC battery is
checked. If a low battery is found, all programmed I N C O R R E C T
setpoints, program values, options, time, schedule, and U N I T T Y P E
history buffers will be lost. These values will all be re-
set to their default values which may not be the desired This indicates the condensing unit jumper is installed
operating values. Once a faulty battery is detected, the between J11-12 and J11-7. This jumper must be re-
unit will be prevented from running until the PRO- moved to operate the chiller.

JOHNSON CONTROLS 129

 FORM 150.72-NM2 (811)
SECTION 7 – UNIT CONTROLS
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011

Table 12 - STATUS KEY MESSAGES QUICK REFERENCE LIST

STATUS KEY MESSAGES

General Messages Fault Messages

Unit Switch Off System Safeties Unit Safeties &

Shutdown Warning Messages

Remote Controlled System X High Disch Pressure Low Ambient Temp

Shutdown

Daily Schedule System X Low Suct Pressure Low Liquid Temp

Shutdown

Rem Stop
No Run Permissive System X MP/HPCO Inhibit 115VAC Undervoltage

Flow Switch
Open
Low Battery
System X MP/HPCO Fault
Check Prog/Step/Optn
System X Switch Off (Unit Warning Message)

System X System X HIGH MTR CURR

No Cooling load (Optional) Incorrect Unit Type
(Unit Warning Message)

System X Comps Run

System X AR Timer
High Motor Current

System X AC Timer

System X Disch Limiting

System X Suction Limiting

System X Percentage Load Limiting

LD11297B

Manual Overide Status

System X Pumping Down (on shutdown)

130 JOHNSON CONTROLS

FORM 150.72-NM2 (811)
SECTION 7 – UNIT CONTROLS
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011

DISPLAY/PRINT KEYS

00067VIP

The Display/Print keys allow the user to retrieve sys- following list of operating data screens are viewable
tem and unit information that is useful for monitoring under the OPER DATA key in the order that they are
chiller operation, diagnosing potential problems, trou- displayed. The ↓ (DOWN) arrow key scrolls through
bleshooting, and commissioning the chiller. the displays in the order they appear below:
System and unit information, unit options, setpoints, The chiller MUST be set to be a liquid
and scheduling can also be printed out with the use of chiller (no jumper from J11-7 to J11-12
a printer. Both real-time and history information are on the I/O Board). DO NOT operate the 7
available. chiller if not properly set up.

Oper Data Key

The OPER DATA key gives the user access to unit and
system operating parameters. When the OPER DATA L C H L T = 4 6 . 2 ° F
key is pressed, system parameters will be displayed and R C H L T = 5 7 . 4 ° F °
remain on the display until another key is pressed. After
pressing the OPER DATA key, the various operating This display shows chilled leaving and return liquid
data screens can be scrolled through by using the ↑ (UP) temperatures. The minimum limit on the display for
and ↓ (DOWN) arrow keys or the ENTER/ADV key these parameters are 2.2 °F (-19 °C). The maximum
located under the “ENTRY” section. limit on the display is 140 °F (60 °C).
System 2 information will only be dis- A M B I E N T A I R T E M P
played for 2 system units. = 8 7 . 5 ° F

This display shows the ambient air temperature. The

minimum limit on the display is 0.4 °F (-17.6 °C). The
maximum limit on the display is 131.2 °F (55.1 °C).
With the “UNIT TYPE” set as a liquid chiller (no
jumper from J11-7 to J11-12 on the I/O Board), the

JOHNSON CONTROLS 131

 FORM 150.72-NM2 (811)
SECTION 7 – UNIT CONTROLS
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011

S Y S X S P = 7 2 . 1 P S I G The display of COOLING DEMAND indicates the

D P = 2 2 7 . 0 P
S I G current “step” in the capacity control scheme when in
Return Water Control Mode. The number of available
steps are determined by how many compressors are in
These displays show suction and discharge pressures
the unit. In the above display, the “2” does not mean
for each system. The discharge pressure transducer is
that two compressor are running but only indicates that
optional on some models.
the capacity control scheme is on step 2 of 8. Capacity
If the optional discharge transducer is not installed, the Control is covered in more detail in this publication
discharge pressure would display 0 PSIG (0 barg). which provides specific information on compressor
staging (for Return Water Control only).
The minimum limits for the display are:
T E M P E R R O R X X X . X ° F
• Suction Pressure: 0 PSIG (0 barg) T E M P R A T E X X X . X ° F / M
• Discharge Pressure: 0 PSIG (0 barg)
The maximum limits for the display are: The COOLING DEMAND message will be replaced
with this message when Leaving Chilled liquid control
• Suction Pressure: 400 PSIG (27.58 barg) is selected. This message indicates the temperature er-
• Discharge Pressure: 650 PSIG (44.82 barg) ror and the rate of change of the chilled liquid tempera-
ture.
S Y S X H O U R S 1 = X X X X X
2 = X X X X X, 3 = X X X X X L E A D S Y S T E M I S
S Y S T E M N U M B E R 2

S Y S X S T A R T S 1 = X X X X X
2 = X X X X X, 3 = X X X X X This display indicates the current LEAD system. In
this example system 2 is the LEAD system, making
system 1 the LAG system. The LEAD system can be
The above two messages will appear sequentially for
manually selected or automatic. Refer to the program-
each system. The first display shows accumulated run-
ming under the “Options Key” on page 147. The Lead
ning hours of each compressor for the specific system.
System display will only appear on a two system unit.
The second message shows the number of starts for
each compressor on each system. A unit utilizing hot gas bypass should be
Run times and starts will only be displayed programmed for MANUAL with system
for the actual number of systems and 1 as the lead system. Failure to do so
compressors on the unit. will prevent hot gas operation if system
2 switches to the lead system when pro-
grammed for AUTOMATIC LEAD/LAG.
E V A P O R A T O R H E A T E R
A total of 99,999 hours and starts can be logged before S T A T U S I S = X X
X
the counter rolls over to “0”.
L O A D T I M E R 5 8 S E C This display indicates the status of the evaporator
U N L O A D T I M E R 0 S E C heater. The evaporator heater is controlled by ambient
air temperature. When the ambient temperature drops
below 40 °F the heater is turned ON. When the tem-
This display of the load and unload timers indicate
perature rises above 45 °F the heater is turned OFF. An
the time in seconds until the unit can load or unload.
under voltage condition will keep the heater OFF until
Whether the systems loads or unloads is determined by
full voltage is restored to the system.
how far the actual liquid temperature is from setpoint.
A detailed description of unit loading and unloading is E V
A P
O R
A T
O R W A T
E R
covered under the topic of Capacity Control. P U
M P S T A T
U S = X
X X
X

C O O L I N G D E M A N D
2 O F 8 S T E P S The evaporator pump dry contacts are energized when
any compressor is running, or the unit is not OFF on

132 JOHNSON CONTROLS

FORM 150.72-NM2 (811)
SECTION 7 – UNIT CONTROLS
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011

the daily schedule and the unit switch is ON, or the unit S Y S X C O M P S T A T U S
has shutdown on a Low Leaving Chilled Liquid fault. 1 = X X X 2 = X X X 3 = X X X
However, even if one of above is true, the pump will
not run if the micro panel has been powered up for less
S Y S X R U N T I M E
than 30 seconds or if the pump has run in the last 30
X X - X X - X X - X X D - H - M - S
seconds to prevent pump motor overheating.
E V A P P U M P T O T A L R U N S Y S X L L S V I S O N
H O U R S = X X X X X H O T G A S S O L I S O F F

The Evaporator Pump Total Run Hours display indi- S Y S X F A N S T A G E 3

cates the total pump run hours. Total hours continu-
ally increments similar to Compressor Run Hours. If
dual pumps are fitted, run hours indicates total hours S Y S X A M P S = 3 6 . 0
on both pumps. V O L T S = 0 . 8
A C T I V E R E M O T E C T R L
N O N E The preceding five messages will appear sequentially,
first for system 1, then for system 2.

There are several types of remote systems that can be The first message indicates the system and the associ-
used to control or monitor the unit. The following mes- ated compressors which are running.
sages indicate the type of remote control mode active: The second message indicates the system run time in
NONE – no remote control active. Remote monitoring days – hours – minutes – seconds. Please note that this
may be via ISN. is not accumulated run time but pertains only to the
current system cycle.
ISN – YORK Talk via ISN allows remote load limiting
The third message indicates the system, and whether
and temperature reset through an ISN system.
the liquid line solenoid or EEV pilot solenoid and hot
LOAD LIM – Load limiting enabled using contact clo- gas solenoid are being turned ON by the microboard.
sure. Please note that hot gas is not available for system 2, so
there is no message pertaining to the hot gas solenoid 7
PWM TEMP – EMS temperature reset when system 2 message is displayed.
*Refer to “REMOTE BAS/EMS TEMPERA- The fourth message indicates the stage of condenser
TURE RESET USING A VOLTAGE OR CUR- fan operation that is active.
RENT SIGNAL” on page 161.
See “STANDARD CONDENSER FAN CONTROL”
If the microprocessor is programmed for CURRENT on page 157 for more information.
FEEDBACK ONE PER UNIT under the OPTIONS
key, the display will show up as the first display prior The fifth message displays current as sensed by the op-
to the SYS 1 displays. Total chiller current is displayed tional current feedback circuitry. The display reads out
as shown below: in amps along with the DC feedback voltage from the
module. Current is calculated by:
U N I T A M P S = 5 4 . 0
225A x Actual Volts
V O L T S = 1 . 2
5 Volts
If the microprocessor is programmed for CURRENT
FEEDBACK NONE, no current display will appear. Individual displays will be present for each system, if
CURRENT FEEDBACK ONE PER SYSTEM is pro-
grammed under the OPTIONS key. Combined com-
pressor current for each system is displayed.

JOHNSON CONTROLS 133

 FORM 150.72-NM2 (811)
SECTION 7 – UNIT CONTROLS
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011

Oper Data Quick Reference List Print Key

The following table is a quick reference list for infor- The PRINT key allows the operator to obtain a printout
mation available under the OPER DATA key. of real-time system operating data or a history print-
out of system data at the “instant of the fault” on the
Table 13 - OPERATION DATA last six faults which occurred on the unit. An optional
printer is required for the printout.
Oper Data Key
Operating Data Printout
Pressing the PRINT key and then OPER DATA key
Leaving & Chilled Liquid Temps
allows the operator to obtain a printout of current sys-
tem operating parameters. When the OPER DATA key
Ambient Air Temperature
is pressed, a snapshot will be taken of system operat-
ing conditions and panel programming selections. This
System 1 Discharge & Suction Pressure
data will be temporarily stored in memory and trans-
mission of this data will begin to the printer. A sample
*System X Accumulated Hours Operating Data printout is shown below. (Note: Not all
values are printed for all models.)
*System X Accumulated Starts
YORK INTERNATIONAL CORPORATION
Load and Unload Timers MILLENNIUM LIQUID CHILLER
UNIT STATUS
2:04PM 01 OCT 07
Cooling Demand Steps SYS 1 NO COOLING LOAD
(Return Chilled Liquid Control Only) SYS 2 COMPRESSORS RUNNING 2
OPTIONS
CHILLED LIQUID WATER
Temp Rate & Temp Error AMBIENT CONTROL STANDARD
(Leaving Chilled Liquid Control Only) LOCAL/REMOTE MODE REMOTE
CONTROL MODE LEAVING LIQUID
LEAD/LAG CONTROL AUTOMATIC
Lead System Indicator FAN CONTROL AMB & DSCH PRESS
CURRENT FEEDBACK NONE
Evaporator Heater Status POWER FAILURE RESTART AUTOMATIC
SOFT START ENABLED
EXPANSION VALVE THERMOSTATIC
Evaporator Water Pump Status REMOTE TEMP RESET 4 TO 20 MA
PROGRAM VALUES
DSCH PRESS CUTOUT 570 PSIG
Active Remote Control SUCT PRESS CUTOUT 80 PSIG
SUCT PRESS CUT COOLING 42 PSIG
Current Feedback One Per Unit SUCT PRESS CUT HEATING 31 PSIG
LOW AMBIENT CUTOUT 25.0 DEGF
LEAVING LIQUID CUTOUT 25.0 DEGF
*System X Compressors Status ANTI RECYCLE TIME 600 SECS
FAN CONTROL ON PRESS 425 PSIG
FAN DIFF OFF PRESS 125 PSIG
*System X Run Time NUMBER OF COMPRESSORS 6
NUMBER OF FANS PER SYSTEM 4
* Sys X LLSV & HGSV Status UNIT TRIP VOLTS 3.0
REFRIGERANT TYPE R-22
DEFROST INIT TEMP 41.0 DEGF
*System X Condenser Fan Stage DEFROST INITIATION TIME 60MIN
DEFROST TERMINATION TIME 3MIN
BIVALENT HEAT DELAY TIME 30 MIN
Current Feedback One Per System REMOTE UNIT ID PROGRAMMED 2
YORK HYDRO KIT PUMPS 1 (410a)
* Block of information repeats for each system LD12585
PUMP TOTAL RUN HOURS XXXXX (410a)
UNIT DATA
RETURN LIQUID TEMP 58.2 DEGF
LEAVING LIQUID TEMP 53.0 DEGF
DISCHARGE AIR TEMP 55.3 DEGF

134 JOHNSON CONTROLS

FORM 150.72-NM2 (811)
SECTION 7 – UNIT CONTROLS
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011

See “OPTIONAL PRINTER INSTALLA-

COOLING RANGE 42.0 +/- 2.0 DEGF TION” on page 170 for Printer Installa-
HEATING RANGE 122.0 +/- 2.0 DEGF tion information.
SYS 1 SETPOINT 70 +/- 3 PSIG
SYS 2 SETPOINT 70 +/- 3 PSIG
REMOTE SETPOINT 44.0 DEGF
AMBIENT AIR TEMP 74.8 DEGF
LEAD SYSTEM SYS 2
EVAPORATOR PUMP ON History Printout
EVAPORATOR HEATER OFF
ACTIVE REMOTE CONTROL NONE Pressing the PRINT key and then the HISTORY key
LAST DEFROST SYS X DURATION XXXS
TIME TO SYS X DEFROST XX MIN allows the operator to obtain a printout of information
BIVALENT DELAY REMAINING XX MIN relating to the last 9 Safety Shutdowns which occurred.
UNIT XXX.X AMPS X.X VOLTS The information is stored at the instant of the fault, re-
SOFTWARE VERSION C.M02.13.00
SYSTEM 1 DATA gardless of whether the fault caused a lockout to occur.
COMP STATUS 1=OFF 2=OFF 3=OFF The information is also not affected by power failures
RUN TIME 0- 0- 0- 0 D-H-M-S (long-term internal memory battery backup is built into
TIME YYYYYYY 0- 0- 0- 0 D-H-M-S the circuit board) or manual resetting of a fault lock-
LAST STATE YYYYYYY
SUCTION PRESSURE 105 PSIG out.
DISCHARGE PRESSURE 315 PSIG
SUCTION TEMPERATURE 46.0 DEGF When the HISTORY key is pressed, a printout is trans-
SAT SUCTION TEMP 34.0 DEGF mitted of all system operating conditions which were
SUCTION SUPERHEAT 12.0 DEGF
COOLER INLET REFRIG 31.6 DEGF stored at the “instant the fault occurred” for each of the
DEFROST TEMPERATURE 52.8 DEGF 9 Safety Shutdowns buffers. The printout will begin
LIQUID LINE SOLENOID OFF with the most recent fault which occurred. The most
MODE SOLENOID OFF
HOT GAS BYPASS VALVE OFF recent fault will always be stored as Safety Shutdown
CONDENSER FAN STAGE OFF No. 1. identically formatted fault information will then
EEV OUTPUT 0.0 % be printed for the remaining safety shutdowns.
SYSTEM XXX.X AMPS X.X VOLTS
SYSTEM 2 DATA Information contained in the Safety Shutdown buffers
COMP STATUS 1=ON, 2=OFF, 3=ON
RUN TIME 0-0-1-46 D-H-M-S is very important when attempting to troubleshoot a
TIME YYYYYYY 0-0-0-0 D-H-M-S system problem. This data reflects the system condi-
LAST STATE
SUCTION PRESSURE
YYYYYYY
110 PSIG
tions at the instant the fault occurred and often reveals 7
DISCHARGE PRESSURE 320 PSIG other system conditions which actually caused the
SUCTION TEMPERATURE 49.3 DEGF safety threshold to be exceeded.
SAT SUCTION TEMP 36.0 DEGF
SUCTION SUPERHEAT 13.3 DEGF The history printout is similar to the operational data
COOLER INLET REFRIG 31.6 DEGF printout shown in the previous section. The differences
DEFROST TEMPERATURE 52.8 DEGF
LIQUID LINE SOLENOID ON are in the header and the schedule information. The
MODE SOLENOID ON daily schedule is not printed in a history print.
CONDENSER FAN STAGE 3
EEV OUTPUT 63.2% One example history buffer printout is shown follow-
SYSTEM XXX.X AMPS X.X VOLTS ing. The data part of the printout will be exactly the
DAILY SCHEDULE
S M T W T F S *=HOLIDAY same as the operational data print so it is not repeated
SUN START=00:00AM STOP=00:00AM here. The difference is that the Daily Schedule is not
MON START=00:00AM STOP=00:00AM printed in the history print and the header will be as
TUE START=00:00AM STOP=00:00AM
WED START=00:00AM STOP=00:00AM follows.
THU START=00:00AM STOP=00:00AM
FRI START=00:00AM STOP=00:00AM YORK INTERNATIONAL CORPORATION
SAT START=00:00AM STOP=00:00AM
HOL START=00:00AM STOP=00:00AM MILLENNIUM LIQUID CHILLER
SAFETY SHUTDOWN NUMBER 1
SHUTDOWN @ 3:56PM 29 SEP 07
SYS 1 HIGH DSCH PRESS SHUTDOWN
SYS 2 NO FAULTS

JOHNSON CONTROLS 135

 FORM 150.72-NM2 (811)
SECTION 7 – UNIT CONTROLS
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011

History Displays C O N T R O L M O D E
The HISTORY key gives the user access to many unit L E A V I N G L I Q U I D
and system operating parameters at the time of a unit
or system safety shutdown. When the HISTORY key is Displays the type of chilled liquid control; Leaving or
pressed the following message is displayed. Return.
D I S P L A Y S A F E T Y S H U T- L E A D / L A G C O N T R O L
D O W N N O . 1 ( 1 T O 9 ) X X X X X X X X

While this message is displayed, the ↑ (UP) arrow key Displays the type of lead/lag control; Manual System
can be used to select any of the six history buffers. Buf- 1, Manual System 2 or Automatic. This is only select-
fer number 1 is the most recent, and buffer number 6 is able on 2-system chillers.
the oldest safety shutdown that was saved.
F A N C O N T R O L
After selecting the shutdown number, pressing the EN- D I S C H A R G E P R E S S U R E
TER key displays the following message which shows
when the shutdown occurred.
Displays the type of fan control; Discharge Pressure or
S H U T D O W N O C C U R R E D Ambient and Discharge Pressure.
0 3 : 5 6 P M 2 9 J A N 0 2
M A N U A L O V E R R I D E M O D E
X X X X X X X X X
The ↑ (UP) and ↓ (DOWN) arrow keys are used to
scroll forward and backward through the history buffer
Displays whether Manual Override was Enabled or
to display the shutdown conditions stored at the instant
Disabled.
the fault occurred. The ↓ (DOWN) arrow key scrolls
through the displays in the order they appear below: C U R R E N T F E E D B A C K
X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
U N I T F A U L T :
L O W L I Q U I D T E M P
Displays type of Current Feedback utilized.
Displays the type of fault that occurred. S O F T S T A R T
X X X X X X X
U N I T T Y P E
L I Q U I D C H I L L E R
Displays whether the optional European Soft Start was
installed and selected.
Displays the type of chiller; Liquid, Condensing Unit
or Heat Pump. D I S C H A R G E P R E S S U R E
C U T O U T = X X X X P S I G
C H I L L E D L I Q U I D
X X X X X
Displays the programmed Discharge Pressure Cutout.
Displays the chilled liquid type; Water or Glycol. S U C T I O N P R E S S U R E
C U T O U T = X X X X P S I G
A M B I E N T C O N T R O L
X X X X X X X X X X
Displays the programmed Suction Pressure Cutout.
Displays the type of Ambient Control; Standard or L O W A M B I E N T T E M P
Low Ambient. C U T O U T = X X X . X ° F

L O C A L / R E M O T E M O D E
X X X X X X X X X Displays the programmed Low Ambient Cutout.

Displays Local or Remote control selection.

136 JOHNSON CONTROLS

FORM 150.72-NM2 (811)
SECTION 7 – UNIT CONTROLS
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011

L E A V I N G L I Q U I D T E M P L E A D S Y S T E M I S
C U T O U T = X X X . X ° F S Y S T E M N U M B E R X

Displays the Leaving Liquid Temp. Cutout pro- Displays which system is in the lead at the time of the
grammed. fault.
F A N C O N T R O L O N E V A P O R A T O R H E A T E R
P R E S S U R E = X X X P S I G S T A T U S I S X X
X

Displays the programmed Fan On Pressure. Displays status of the Evaporator Heater at the time of
the fault.
F A N D I F F E R E N T I A L O F F
P R E S S U R E = P S I G E V A P O R A T O R W A T E R
P U M P S T A T U S X X
X X
Displays the programmed Fan Off Differential.
Displays status of Evaporator Water Pump at the time
S Y S 1 T R I P V O L T S
of fault. Status may read ON, OFF or trip.
= X . X V O L T S
E V A P P U M P T O T A L R U N
Displays the programmed High Current Trip Voltage. H O U R S = X X X X

S Y S 2 T R I P V O L T S
Evap Pump total run hours at the time of fault.
= X . X V O L T S
A C T I V E R E M O T E C T R L
Displays the programmed High Current Trip Voltage. X X X X

Y O R
K H Y
D R
O
Displays whether Remote Chiller Control was active
K I T P
U M
P S = X
when the fault occurred.

Indicates the Pump Control option is selected. U N I T A C T U A L A M P S

= X X X . X A M P S
7
L C H L T = X X X . X ° F
R C H L T = X X X . X ° F
This is only displayed when the Current Feedback Op-
tion is one per unit.
Displays the Leaving and Return chilled Liquid Tem-
perature at the time of the fault. S Y S X C O M P S T A T U S
1 = X X X 2 = X X X 3 = X X X
S E T P O I N T = X X X . X ° F
R A N G E = + / - ° F
Displays which Compressors were running in the sys-
tem when the fault occurred.
Displays the programmed Setpoint and Range, if the
chiller is programmed for leaving chilled liquid control. S Y S X R U N T I M E
X X - X X - X X - X X D - H - M - S
S E T P O I N T = X X X . X ° F
R A N G E = + X X . X ° F
Displays the system run time when the fault occurred.

Displays the programmed Setpoint and Range, if the S Y S X S P = X X X X P S I G

chiller is programmed for return chilled liquid control. D P = X X X X P S I G

A M B I E N T A I R T E M P
Displays the system Suction and Discharge Pressure of
= X X X . X ° F
the time of the fault.

Displays the Ambient Temp. at the time of the fault.

JOHNSON CONTROLS 137

 FORM 150.72-NM2 (811)
SECTION 7 – UNIT CONTROLS
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011

S Y S X S U C T = X X X . X ° F der the PROGRAM key, the display will be the first

S A T S U C T = X X X . X ° F display prior to the SYS 1 info. If the microprocessor is
programmed for CURRENT FEEDBACK NONE, no
current display will appear.
Displays the System Suction Temp and Saturated Suc-
tion Temp when an EEV is installed. Displays for System 1 starting with SYS X NUMBER
OF COMPS RUNNING X through SYS X AMPS =
S Y S X L L S V I S X X X
XXX.X VOLTS = X.X will be displayed first, fol-
H O T G A S S O L I S X X X
lowed by displays for System 2.

Displays whether the System Liquid Line Solenoid or Further explanation of the above displays is cov-
Hot Gas Solenoid was energized at the time of the fault. ered under the STATUS, OPER DATA, COOLING
SETPOINTS, PROGRAM, and OPTIONS keys.

S Y S X F A N S T A G E X X X
Software Version
The software version may be viewed by first pressing
Displays the number of Fan Stages in the system active the HISTORY key and then repeatedly pressing the ↓
at the time of the fault. (DOWN) arrow key until you scroll past the first his-
tory buffer choice.
S Y S X A
C T U A L A M P S
= X
X X . X A M
P S D I S P L A Y S A F E T Y S H U T -
D O W N N O . 1 ( 1 T O 6 )
Displays the system Amperage (calculated approxi-
mately) at the time of the fault. After the ↓ (DOWN) arrow key is pressed again, the
software version will appear.
For this message to appear, CURRENT FEEDBACK
ONE PER SYSTEM must be programmed under the C O N T R O L C. M X X. Z Z. Y Y
OPTIONS key. If the microprocessor is programmed I / O C. M X X. 1 8. Y Y
as one CURRENT FEEDBACK ONE PER UNIT un-

138 JOHNSON CONTROLS

FORM 150.72-NM2 (811)
SECTION 7 – UNIT CONTROLS
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011

ENTRY KEYS

00068VIP 7

The Entry Keys allows the user to view, change pro- Enter/Adv Key
grammed values. The ENTRY keys consist of an ↑ (UP) The ENTER/ADV key must be pushed after any change
arrow key, ↓ (DOWN) arrow key, and an ENTER/ADV is made to the cooling setpoints, daily schedule, safety
key. setpoints, chiller options, and the clock. Pressing this
key “enters” the new values into memory. If the EN-
Up and Down Arrow Keys
TER/ADV key is not pressed after a value is changed,
Used in conjunction with the OPER DATA, HISTORY, the changes will not be “entered” and the original val-
COOLING SETPOINTS, SCHEDULE/ADVANCE ues will be used to control the chiller.
DAY, OPTIONS and CLOCK keys, the ↑ (UP) and
↓(DOWN) arrow keys allow the user to scroll through Programming and a description on the use of the ↑ (UP)
the various data screens. Refer to “DISPLAY/PRINT arrow key, and ↓ (DOWN) arrow, and ENTER/ADV
KEYS” on page 131 for specific information on the keys are covered in detail under the SETPOINTS, and
displayed information and specific use of the ↑ (UP) UNIT keys.
and ↓ (DOWN) arrow keys.
The ↑ (UP) arrow key, and ↓ (DOWN) arrow key are
also used for programming the control panel such as
changing numerical or text values when programming
cooling setpoints, setting the daily schedule, changing
safety setpoints, chiller options, and setting the clock.

JOHNSON CONTROLS 139

 FORM 150.72-NM2 (811)
SECTION 7 – UNIT CONTROLS
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011

SETPOINTS KEYS

00069VIP

Programming of the cooling setpoints, daily schedule, Leaving Chilled Liquid Control
and safeties is accomplished by using the keys located S E T P O I N T = 4 5 . 0 ° F
under the SETPOINTS section. R A N G E = +/- 2 . 0 ° F
The three keys involved are labeled COOLING
SETPOINTS, SCHEDULE/ADVANCE DAY, and The above message shows the current chilled water
PROGRAM. temperature SETPOINT at 45.0 °F (notice the cursor
positioned under the number 0). Pressing either the ↑
Following are instructions for programming the respec- (UP) or ↓ (DOWN) arrow will change the setpoint in .5
tive setpoints. The same instruction should be used to °F increments. After using the ↑ (UP) or ↓ (DOWN) ar-
view the setpoints with the exception that the setpoint row keys to adjust to the desired setpoint, the ENTER/
will not be changed. ADV key must be pressed to enter this number into
memory and advance to the RANGE SETPOINT.
Cooling Setpoints
The Cooling Setpoint and Range can be programmed Entry of the setpoint will be indicated by the cursor
by pressing the COOLING SETPOINTS key. The moving under the current RANGE setpoint. The ↑ (UP)
cooling mode (leaving chilled liquid or return chilled and ↓ (DOWN) arrow keys are used to set the RANGE,
liquid) will be displayed for a few seconds, and the set- in .5 °F increments, to the desired RANGE setpoint.
point display entry screen will appear. After adjusting the setpoint, the ENTER/ADV key
must be pressed to enter the data into memory.

140 JOHNSON CONTROLS

FORM 150.72-NM2 (811)
SECTION 7 – UNIT CONTROLS
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011

Notice that the RANGE was programmed for +/- X.X° The following messages illustrate both leaving chilled
F. This indicates the SETPOINT to be in the center of liquid control and return chilled liquid control respec-
the control range. If the control mode has been pro- tively.
grammed for RETURN LIQUID control, the message
R E M S E T P = 4 4 . 0 ° F
below would be displayed in place of the previous
R A N G E = + / - 2 . 0 ° F
message.
When in leaving chilled liquid temperature control, (leaving chilled liquid control)
the microprocessor will attempt to control the leaving
water temperature within the temperature range of the R E M S E T P = 4 4 . 0 ° F
setpoint + or – the range. In the above example, control R A N G E = + 1
0 . 0 ° F
will be in the range of 43 to 47 °F.
(return chilled liquid control)
Return Chilled Liquid Control

S E T P O I N T = 4 5 . 0 ° F The low limit, high limit, and default values for the
R A N G E = + 1 0 . 0 ° F keys under “SETPOINTS” are listed in Table 14 on
page 142.
In return chilled liquid control, the range no longer has Pressing the COOLING SETPOINTS a third time will
a +/- X.X °F, but only a + X.X °F RANGE setpoint. bring up the display that allows the Maximum EMS-
This indicates that the setpoint is not centered within PWM Temperature Reset to be programmed. This
the RANGE but could be described as the bottom of message is shown below.
the control range. A listing of the limits and the pro-
M A X E M S - P W M R E M O T E
grammable values for the COOLING SETPOINTS are
T E M P R E S E T = + 2 0 ° F
shown in Table 14 on page 142.
The SETPOINT and RANGE displays just described The Temp Reset value is the maximum allowable re-
were based on LOCAL control. If the unit was pro- mote reset of the temperature setpoint. The setpoint can
grammed for REMOTE control (under the OPTIONS be reset upwards by the use of an Energy Management
key), the above programmed setpoints would have no System or from the Temperature Reset Option Board.
effect. See “REMOTE BAS/EMS TEMPERATURE RESET
USING A VOLTAGE OR CURRENT SIGNAL” on
7
When in return chilled liquid temperature control, the
microprocessor will turn all compressors OFF at set- page 161 for a detailed explanation of this feature.
point and will turn compressors ON as return chilled As with the other setpoints, the ↑ (Up) arrow and ↓
liquid temperature rises. All compressors will be on at (Down) arrow keys are used to change the Temp Reset
setpoint plus the range. If the range equals the tem- value. After using the ↑ (UP) and ↓ (DOWN) arrows
perature drop across the evaporator when fully loaded, to adjust to the desired setpoint, the ENTER/ADV key
the leaving chilled liquid temperature will remain near must be pressed to enter this number into memory.
the setpoint plus or minus a few degrees as the chiller
loads and unloads according to return chilled liquid SCHEDULE/ADVANCE DAY KEY
temperature.
The SCHEDULE is a seven day daily schedule that
Both LEAVING and RETURN control are described in allows one start/stop time per day. The schedule can
detail under “CAPACITY CONTROL” on page 153. be programmed Monday through Sunday with an al-
ternate holiday schedule available. If no start/stop
Remote Setpoint Control times are programmed, the unit will run on demand,
Pressing the COOLING SETPOINTS key a second providing the chiller is not shut off on a unit or system
time will display the remote setpoint and cooling shutdown. The daily schedule is considered “not pro-
range. This display automatically updates about every grammed” when the times in the schedule are all zeros
2 seconds. Notice that these setpoints are not “locally” (00:00 AM).
programmable, but are controlled by a remote device To set the schedule, press the SCHEDULE/ADVANCE
such as an ISN control, remote reset option board, or DAY key. The display will immediately show the fol-
remote PWM signal. These setpoints would only be lowing display.
valid if the unit was operating in the REMOTE mode.

JOHNSON CONTROLS 141

 FORM 150.72-NM2 (811)
SECTION 7 – UNIT CONTROLS
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011

Table 14 - COOLING SETPOINTS, PROGRAMMABLE LIMITS AND DEFAULTS
SETPOINT KEY MODE LOW LIMIT HIGH LIMIT DEFAULT
40.0°F **70.0°F 44.0°F
WATER COOLING
4.4°C 21.1°C 6.7°C
LEAVING CHILLED LIQUID SETPOINT
10.0°F **70.0°F 44.0°F
GLYCOL COOLING*
-12.2°C 21.1°C 6.7°C
1.5°F 2.5°F 2.0°F
LEAVING CHILLED LIQUID CONTROL RANGE —
0.8°C 1.4°C 1.1°C
40.0°F 70.0°F 44.0°F
WATER COOLING
4.4°C 21.1°C 6.7°C
RETURNED CHILLED LIQUID SETPOINT
10.0°F 70.0°F 44.0°F
GLYCOL COOLING*
-12.2°C 21.1°C 6.7°C
— 4.0°F 20.0°F 10.0°F
RETURN CHILLED LIQUID CONTROL RANGE
2.2°C 11.1°C 5.6°C
MAX EMS-PWM REMOTE TEMPERATURE RE- 2°F 40°F 20°F
—
SET 1.0°C 22.0°C 11.0°C
* Refer to Engineering Guide for operation below 30°F (-1.1°C). Alternate thermal expansion valves must be used below 30°F (-1.1°C).
*When using glycol, Leaving Chilled Liquid Setpoint should not be set below 20°F (-6.7°C).
**Do not exceed 55°F (12.8°C) setpoint before contacting the nearest Johnson Controls Office for application guidelines.

M
O N S T A R T = 0 0 : 0 0 A M After SUN (Sunday) schedule appears on the display
S T O P = 0 0 : 0 0 A M a subsequent press of the SCHEDULE/ADVANCE
DAY key will display the Holiday schedule. This is a
two part display. The first reads:
The line under the 0 is the cursor. If the value is wrong,
it may be changed by using the ↑ (UP) and ↓ (DOWN) H O L S T A R T = 0 0 : 0 0 A M
arrow keys until correct. Pressing the ENTER/ADV S T O P = 0 0 : 0 0 A M
key will enter the times and then move the cursor to
the minute box. The operation is then repeated if nec- The times may be set using the same procedure as de-
essary. This process may be followed until the hour, scribed above for the days of the week. After chang-
minutes, and meridian (AM or PM) of both the START ing the meridian of the stop time, pressing the ENTER/
and STOP points are set. After changing the meridian ADV key will advance the schedule to the following
of the stop time, pressing the ENTER/ADV key will display:
advance the schedule to the next day.
S __
M T W T F S
Whenever the daily schedule is changed H O L I D A Y N O T E D B Y *
for Monday, all the other days will change
to the new Monday schedule. This means
if the Monday times are not applicable The line below the empty space next to the S is the
for the whole week then the exceptional cursor and will move to the next empty space when
days would need to be reprogrammed to the ENTER/ADV key is pressed. To set the Holiday,
the desired schedule. the cursor is moved to the space following the day of
the week of the holiday and the ↑ (UP) arrow key is
To page to a specific day, press the SCHEDULE/AD- pressed. An * will appear in the space signifying that
VANCE DAY key until the desired day appears. The day as a holiday. The * can be removed by pressing the
start and stop time of each day may be programmed ↓ (DOWN) arrow key.
differently using the ↑ (UP) and ↓ (DOWN) arrow, and
ENTER/ADV keys. The Holiday schedule must be programmed weekly –
once the Holiday schedule runs, it will revert to the
normal daily schedule.

142 JOHNSON CONTROLS

FORM 150.72-NM2 (811)
SECTION 7 – UNIT CONTROLS
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011

PROGRAM KEY L O W A M B I E N T T E M P
There are several operating parameters under the PRO- C U T O U T = 2 5 . 0 ° F
GRAM key that are programmable. These setpoints
can be changed by pressing the PROGRAM key, and The LOW AMBIENT TEMP CUTOUT allows the user
then the ENTER/ADV key to enter Program Mode. to select the chiller outside ambient temperature cutout
Continuing to press the ENTER/ADV key will display point. If the ambient falls below this point, the chiller
each operating parameter. While a particular parameter will shut down. Restart can occur when temperature
is being displayed, the ↑ (UP) and ↓ (DOWN) arrow rises 2 °F (1.11 °C) above the cutout setpoint.
keys can be used to change the value. After the value is
changed, the ENTER/ADV key must be pressed to en- L E A V I N G L I Q U I D T E M P
ter the data into memory. Table 15 on page 144 shows C U T O U T = 3 6 . 0 ° F
the programmable limits and default values for each
operating parameter. The LEAVING LIQUID TEMP CUTOUT protects the
chiller from an evaporator freeze-up. Anytime the leav-
Following are the displays for the programmable val- ing chilled liquid temperature drops to the cutout point,
ues in the order they appear: the chiller shuts down. Restart will be permitted when
d D I S C H A R G E P R E S S U R E the leaving chilled liquid temperature rises 2 °F (1.11
C U T O U T = 3 9 5 P S I G °C) above the cutout setpoint.
When water cooling mode is programmed (OPTIONS
DISCHARGE PRESSURE CUTOUT is the discharge key), the value is fixed at 36.0 °F (2.22 °C) and cannot
pressure at which the system will shutdown as moni- be changed. Glycol cooling mode can be programmed
tored by the optional discharge transducer. This is a to values listed in Table 15 on page 144.
software shutdown that acts as a backup for the me-
chanical high pressure switch located in the refrigerant A N T I R E C Y C L E T I M E R
= 6 0 0 S E C
circuit. The system can restart when the discharge pres-
sure drops 40 PSIG (2.76 barg) below the cutout point.
The programmable anti-recycle timer assures that
If the optional discharge pressure transducer is not in- systems do not short cycle, and the compressor mo-
stalled, this programmable safety would not apply. It tors have sufficient time to dissipate heat after a start.
should be noted that every system has a mechanical This timer is programmable under the PROGRAM key
7
high pressure cutout that protects against excessive between 300 and 600 seconds. Whenever possible,
high discharge pressure regardless of whether or not to reduce cycling and motor heating, the anti-recycle
the optional discharge pressure is installed. timer should be adjusted as high as possible. The pro-
S U C T I O N P R E S S U R E grammable anti-recycle timer starts the timer when the
C U T O U T = 80 . 0 P S I G first compressor in a system starts. The timer begins to
count down. If all the compressors in the circuit cycle
OFF, a compressor within the circuit will not be per-
The SUCTION PRESSURE CUTOUT protects the
mitted to start until the anti-recycle timer has timed
chiller from an evaporator freeze-up. If the suction
out. If the lead system has run for less than 5 minutes,
pressure drops below the cutout point, the system will
3 times in a row, the anti-recycle timer will be extended
shut down. Typically, the cutout should be set to 80
to 10 minutes, if currently programmed for less than 10
PSIG (5.52 Bars) form water cooling.
minutes.
There are some exceptions when the suc-
F A N C O N T R O L O N
tion pressure is permitted to temporarily
P R E S S U R E = X X X P S I G
drop below the cutout point. Details are
explained under the topic of SYSTEM
SAFETIES. The Fan Control On Pressure is the programmed pres-
sure value that is used to stage the condenser fans on, in
relation to discharge pressure. Refer to “STANDARD
CONDENSER FAN CONTROL” on page 157 in
“SECTION 7 – UNIT CONTROLS” and Table 21 on
page 159 and Table 22 on page 160.

JOHNSON CONTROLS 143

 FORM 150.72-NM2 (811)
SECTION 7 – UNIT CONTROLS
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011

F A N D I F F E R E N T I A L O F F 15, the chiller may have single or dual systems. Single

P R E S S U R E = X X X P S I G system units can have 2 or 3 compressors, while dual
system units may have 4 or 6 compressors.
The Fan Differential Off Pressure is the programmed This MUST be programmed correctly to
differential pressure value that is used to stage the con- assure proper chiller operation.
denser fans OFF, in relation to discharge pressure. Re-
fer to “STANDARD CONDENSER FAN CONTROL”
on page 157 in “SECTION 8 – UNIT OPERATION”
and Table 21 on page 159 and Table 22 on page 160.
N U
M B
E R O
F F
A N
S
T O T A L N U M B E R O F P E
R S Y
S T
E M = X
C O M P R E S S O R S = 6

The Number of Fans Per System must be programmed

The TOTAL NUMBER OF COMPRESSORS is the as needed to match the number of fans on each system.
total quantity of compressors in the chiller, and deter-
mines the stages of cooling available. Note in Table

Table 15 - PROGRAM KEY LIMITS AND DEFAULT

PROGRAM VALUE MODE LOW LIMIT HIGH LIMIT DEFAULT
325 PSIG 575 PSIG 570 PSIG
DISCHARGE PRESSURE CUTOUT —
22.4 BARG 39.6 BARG 39.3 BARG
80.0 PSIG 120.0 PSIG 80.0 PSIG
WATER COOLING
5.52 BARG 8.27 BARG 5.52 BARG
SUCTION PRESSURE CUTOUT
42.0 PSIG 70.0 PSIG 44.0 PSIG
GLYCOL COOLING
2.9 BARG 4.83 BARG 3.03 BARG
25.0 °F 60.0 °F 25.0 °F
STANDARD AMBIENT
-3.9 °C 15.6 °C -3.9 °C
LOW AMBIENT TEMP. CUTOUT
0 °F 60.0 °F 25.0 °F
LOW AMBIENT
-17.8 °C 15.6 °C -3.9 °C
36 °F
WATER COOLING — —
LEAVING CHILLED LIQUID 2.2 °C
TEMP. CUTOUT -1.0 °F 36.0 °F 36.0 °F
GLYCOL COOLING
-18.3 °C 2.2 °C 2.2 °C
ANTI-RECYCLE TIMER — 300 SEC. 600 SEC. 600 SEC.
360 PSIG 485 PSIG 385 PSIG
FAN CONTROL ON PRESSURE —
24.8 BARG 33.4 BARG 26.5 BARG
80 PSID 160 PSID* 125 PSID
FAN DIFFERENTIAL OFF PRESSURE —
5.51 BARD 11.03 BARD* 8.62 BARD
SINGLE SYSTEM 2 3 3
TOTAL NUMBER OF COMPRESSORS
DUAL SYSTEM 4 6 6
NUMBER OF FANS PER SYSTEM — 2 4 3
UNIT/SYSTEM TRIP VOLTS CURRENT FEEDBACK 0.5 Volts 4.5 Volts 2.5 Volts
REMOTE UNIT ID — 0 7 0
* T
 he minimum discharge pressure allowed is 235 PSIG. The Fan Differential Off Pressure High Limit will be lowered (reduced) to
prevent going below 235 PSIG based on where the fan control On Pressure is programmed.

144 JOHNSON CONTROLS

FORM 150.72-NM2 (811)
SECTION 7 – UNIT CONTROLS
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011

S Y S X T R I P V O L T S The programmed value will be 2.8V. A similar calcula-

= X . X V O L T S tion and programming will be necessary for the other
system in a 2-system chiller.
U N I T T R I P V O L T S
= X . X V O L T S Unit Trip Volts
For total chiller high current trip programming on
Depending on the option, the trip voltage for a 460VAC chillers:
specific system or unit high current trip can be • Add the sum of all the compressors and fan RLA’s
programmed. It also calibrates the current read- in the chiller
out under the OPER DATA key. The approximate
programmed value is calculated using the following • Multiply the sum by 1.25
formulas. • Divide by 225A
System Trip Volts • The resulting voltage is the value that should be
For individual system high current trip programming programmed
on chillers: For example, if fan and compressor RLA’s total 180A:
• Add the sum of the compressor and fan RLA’s in 5V x 180A 1125VA
x 1.25 = = 5.0V
the system 225A 225A
• Multiply the sum by 1.25 The programmed value will be 5.0V.
• Divide by 225A R
E M O T E U N I T I D
P R O G R A M M E D = X
• The resulting voltage is the value that should be
programmed
When communications is required with a BAS or Op-
For example, if fan and compressor RLA’s total 100A: tiView Panel, individual unit IDs are necessary for
5V x 100A 625VA communications with specific chillers on a single RS-
x 1.25 = = 2.8V
225A 225A 485 line. ID 0 - 7 is selectable.
7

JOHNSON CONTROLS 145

 FORM 150.72-NM2 (811)
SECTION 7 – UNIT CONTROLS
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011

Table 16 - SETPOINTS QUICK REFERENCE LIST

Quick Reference Programming Chart

Setpoints Section

Cooling Setpoints Key Schedule/ Program Mode

(press key to adv.) Advance Day Key (press enter to adv.)

Local Leaving Mon. – Sun. Discharge

Water Temp Control & Pressure
(Display Only) Holiday Cutout
Schedule

Chilled Liquid Suction

Setpoint Pressure
& Cutout
Range

Remote Setpoint Low Ambient Temp.

& Cutout
Range
(Display Only)

Leaving Liquid
EMS - PWM Temperature
Remote Temp Cutout
Reset Setpoint

Anti-Recycle
Table 12
Table 16 provides a quick reference of the setpoints list for the Setpoints Keys. Timer

Fan Control
On-Pressure

Fan Differential
Off-Pressure

Total Numbers
of
Compressors

Number of
Fans Per System

SYS / Unit
Trip Volts Option

Remote Unit ID

LD07404c

146 JOHNSON CONTROLS

FORM 150.72-NM2 (811)
SECTION 7 – UNIT CONTROLS
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011

UNIT KEYS

OPTIONS

CLOCK

00070VIP

Options Key or
There are many user programmable options under the S Y S 1 S W I T C H O N
OPTIONS key. The OPTIONS key is used to scroll S Y S 2 S W I T C H O F F
through the list of options by repeatedly pressing the
OPTIONS key. After the selected option has been dis-
played, the ↑ (UP) and ↓ (DOWN) arrow keys are then This turns system 2 OFF.
used to change that particular option. After the option S Y S 1 S W I T C H O F F
is changed, the ENTER/ADV key must be pressed to S Y S 2 S W I T C H O N
enter the data into memory.
Many of the OPTIONS displayed are This turns system 1 OFF.
only programmable under the SERVICE
or
MODE and not under the OPTIONS key.
Options only programmable under the
7
S Y S 1 S W I T C H O F F
SERVICE MODE are noted in the details S Y S 2 S W I T C H O F F
describing the option.
Table 17 on page 152 shows the programmable op- This turns systems 1 and 2 OFF.
tions. Following are the displays in the order they ap-
Turning a system OFF with its system
pear:
switch allows a pumpdown to be per-
Option 1 – Language formed prior to shutdown.

D I S P L A Y L A N G U A G E
E N G L I S H
Option 3 – Chilled Liquid Cooling Type
English, Spanish, French, German, and Italian can be C H I L L E D L I Q U I D
programmed. W A T E R

Option 2 – System Switches (two system

units only) The chilled liquid is water. The Cooling Setpoint can
be programmed from 40 °F to 70 °F (4.4 °C to 21.1 °C)
(Single System Display is similar)
or
S Y S 1 S W I T C H O N
S Y S 2 S W I T C H O N C H I L L E D L I Q U I D
G L Y C O L

This allows both systems to run.

JOHNSON CONTROLS 147

 FORM 150.72-NM2 (811)
SECTION 7 – UNIT CONTROLS
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011

The chilled liquid is glycol. The Cooling Setpoint can be or

programmed from 10 °F to 70 °F (-12.2 °C to 21.1 °C).
C O N T R O L M O D E
Option 4 – Ambient Control Type L E A V I N G L I Q U I D

A M B I E N T C O N T R O L
S T A N D A R D Option 7 – Display Units
D I S P L A Y U N I T S
The low ambient cutout is adjustable from 25 °F to 60 °F I M P E R I A L
(-3.9 °C to 15.6 °C).
or This mode displays system operating values in Impe-
rial units of °F or PSIG.
A M B I E N T C O N T R O L
L O W A M B I E N T or
D I S P L A Y U N I T S
The low ambient cutout is programmable down to 0 °F S I
(-17.8 °C). A low ambient kit MUST be installed for
this option to be chosen. If the kit is NOT installed, This mode displays system operating values in Scien-
and low ambient is selected, low pressure faults and tific International Units of °C or barg.
compressor damage may occur.
Option 8 – Lead/Lag Type (two system units
Option 5 – Local/Remote Control Type only)
L O C A L / R E M O T E M O D E L L E A D / L A G C O N T R O L
L O C A L M A N U A L S Y S 1 L E A D

When programmed for LOCAL, an ISN or RCC con- SYS 1 selected as lead compressor. SYS 1 lead option
trol can be used to monitor only. The micro panel will MUST be chosen if Hot Gas Bypass is installed.
operate on locally programmed values and ignore all
commands from remote devices, or through the RS- or
485 inputs. The chiller will communicate and send data
L E A D / L A G C O N T R O L
to the remote monitoring devices.
M A N U A L S Y S 2 L E A D
or
SYS 2 selected as lead compressor.
L O C A L / R E M O T E M O D E
R E M O T E or
L E A D / L A G C O N T R O L
This mode should be selected when an ISN or RCC
A U T O M A T I C
control is to be used to control the chiller. This mode
will allow the ISN to control the following items: Re-
mote Start/Stop, Cooling Setpoint, Load Limit, and Lead/lag between systems may be selected to help
History Buffer Request. If the unit receives no valid equalize average run hours between systems on chillers
ISN transmission for 5 minutes, it will revert back to with 2 refrigerant systems. Auto lead/lag allows auto-
the locally programmed values. matic lead/lag of the two systems based on an average
run hours of the compressors in each system. A new
Option 6 – Unit Control Mode lead/lag assignment is made whenever all compressors
C O N T R O L M O D E
shut down. The microprocessor will then assign the
R E T U R N L I Q U I D
“lead” to the system with the shortest average run time.

Unit control is based on return chilled liquid temp.

Return Chilled Liquid Control can only be selected on
units that have 4 to 6 compressors (dual system units).

148 JOHNSON CONTROLS

FORM 150.72-NM2 (811)
SECTION 7 – UNIT CONTROLS
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011

Option 9 – Condenser Fan Control Mode or

F A N C O N T R O L C U R R E N T F E E D B A C K

D I S C H A R G E P R E S S U R E O N E P E R S Y S T E M

Condenser fans are controlled by discharge pressure This mode should be selected when an optional 2ACE
only. This mode must be chosen. module is installed to allow individual current moni-
or toring of each system. SYS 1 input is to J7 of the I/O.
SYS 2 input is to J8 of the I/O.
F A N C O N T R O L
A M B I E N T & D S C H P R E S S Option 12 – Power Fail Restart
P O W E R F A I L R E S T A R T
Do not select this option on R-410A chillers. A U T O M A T I C

Option 10 – Manual Override Mode Chiller auto restarts after a power failure.
M A N U A L O V E R R I D E M O D E
D I S A B L E D P O W E R F A I L R E S T A R T
M A N U A L

This option allows overriding of the daily schedule

that is programmed. MANUAL OVERRIDE MODE – After a power failure, the UNIT switch must be tog-
DISABLED indicates that override mode has no effect. gled before restart at the unit is allowed. NORMALLY
MANUAL RESTART should NOT BE SELECTED.
or
Option 13 – Soft Start Enable/Disable
M A N U A L O V E R R I D E M O D E
S O F T S T A R T
E N A B L E D
D I S A B L E D

Manual Override Mode is enabled. This is a service

SOFT START “DISABLED” MUST be selected on all
function and when enabled, will allow the unit to start
chillers.
when shut down on the daily schedule. It will auto- 7
matically be disabled after 30 minutes. This message may not be viewable on non-European
chillers.
Option 11 – Current Feedback Options In-
stalled Option 14 – Unit Type
C U R R E N T F E E D B A C K
U N I T T Y P E
N O N E L I Q U I D C H I L L E R

This mode should be selected when the panel is not The UNIT TYPE message cannot be modified under
equipped with current sensing capability. the unit keys.
or “liquid CHILLER” must be displayed, or
damage to compressors or other compo-
C U R R E N T F E E D B A C K

nents will occur if operated in the HEAT
O N E P E R U N I T
PUMP or CONDENSING UNIT modes.

This mode should be selected when an optional 2ACE

Module is installed to allow combined current moni-
If unit type needs to be changed to make the unit a
toring of all systems by sensing current on the incom-
liquid chiller, remove power and then remove the
ing line.
jumper between J11-7 and J11-12 on the I/O Board.
Reapply power to the micro panel and the micropro-
cessor will store the change.

JOHNSON CONTROLS 149

 FORM 150.72-NM2 (811)
SECTION 7 – UNIT CONTROLS
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011

Option 15 – Refrigerant Type Press the ENTER key and the following message will
R E F R I G E R A N T T Y P E
be displayed until the update has been completed. The
R – 4 1 0 A
keypad and display will not respond during the update.
DO NOT reset or power down the chiller until the up-
date is completed.
Refrigerant type R-410A must be selected under Ser-
vice Mode. Refrigerant type is displayed under the F L A S H C A R D U P D A T I N G
OPTIONS key, but is only programmable in Service P L E A S E W A I T . . .
Mode.
Incorrect programming may cause dam- After the update is completed, an automatic reboot will
age to compressors. occur. If an error occurred, the following message will
appear with the error code and no reboot will occur.
F L A S H C A R D U P D A T E
E R R O R XXXXX

Option 16 – Expansion Valve Type

If the update resulted in an error, the original program
X P A N S I O N
E V A L V E T Y P E will still be active. When an error occurs, assure the
T H E R M O S T A T I C correct Flash Card was utilized. Incorrect chiller soft-
ware will cause an error. If this is not the case, the
Expansion valve type, thermostatic or electronic Flash Card is most likely defective or the IPU and I/O
may be selected under Service Mode. Expansion valve combo board is bad.
type is displayed under the OPTIONS key, but is only
programmable in Service Mode. YLAA chillers will Option 18 – Remote Temperature Reset
typically always be equipped with thermostatic expan- R E M O T E T E M P R E S E T
sion valves. I
N P U T XXXXXXXXXXXXXX

Incorrect programming may cause dam-

age to compressors. Remote Temp Reset input selection is programmable
according to the type of input utilized. The following
options are available:
• DISABLED (default)

Also see the UNIT KEYS PROGRAMMING QUICK • 0.0 – 10.0 (DC)
REFERENCE LIST in Table 17 on page 152. • 2.0 – 10.0V (DC)

Option 17 – Flash Card Update • 0.0 – 20.0 mA

F L A S H C A R D U P D A T E • 4.0 – 20.0 mA
D I S A B L
E D
The options display message for Remote
Temp Reset Input only appears if the
A Flash Card is used to input the operating program Temp Reset Option is enabled under Ser-
into the chiller IPU. A Flash Card is used instead of vice Mode. The option must be enabled
an EPROM. Normally, a Flash Card update is not re- under the Service Mode for the Remote
quired and the message above will be displayed. Temperature Reset to operate.
If the operating software is to be updated, insert the Option 19 – Pump Control
Flash Card into the Flash Card input port. Turn off the
Pump Control is utilized to operate the optional on-
unit switch and set the FLASH CARD UPDATE TO
board pump kit or to control an external pump through
“ENABLED” using the ↑ and ↓ keys.
dry contacts 23 and 24 on Terminal Block XTBC2. To
F L A S H C A R D U P D A T E use this option, the following selection should be made
E N A B L E
D in the Service Mode:

150 JOHNSON CONTROLS

FORM 150.72-NM2 (811)
SECTION 7 – UNIT CONTROLS
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011

Y O R
K H
Y D
R O Clock
K I T P
U M
P S = 1 The CLOCK display shows the current day, time, and
date. Pressing the CLOCK key will show the current
When YORK HYDRO KIT PUMPS = 1, the controls day, time, and date.
will be closed to run the pumps whenever any one of
It is important that the date and time be correct, other-
the following conditions are true:
wise the daily schedule will not function as desired if
• Low Leaving Chilled Liquid Fault programmed. In addition, for ease of troubleshooting
via the History printouts, the day, time, and date should
• Any compressor is running be correct.
• Daily Schedule is ON and Remote Stop is closed. To change the day, time, and date press the CLOCK
Even if one of the above conditions are key. The display will show something similar to the
true, the pump will not run if the chiller following:
has been powered up for less than 30
T O D A Y I S F R I 0 8 : 5 1 A M
seconds; or if the pump has run in the last
2 5 J A N 0 2
30 seconds to prevent pump overheating.

The line under the F is the cursor. If the day is correct,

E X
T E
R N
A L press the ENTER/ADV key. The cursor will move un-
E
V A
P P U
M P der the 0 in 08 hours. If the day is incorrect, press the
↑ (UP) or ↓ (DOWN) arrow keys until the desired day
EXTERNAL EVAP PUMP should be selected if an ex- is displayed and then press the ENTER/ADV key at
ternal pump is being controlled with the chiller pump which time the day will be accepted and the cursor will
contacts. The operation will be the same as YORK move under the first digit of the “2 digit hour”. In a
HDRO KIT PUMPS = 1 similar manner, the hour, minute, meridian, month, day,
and year may be programmed, whenever the cursor is
The following option should not be selected. under the first letter/numeral of the item. Press the ↑
(UP) or ↓ (DOWN) arrow keys until the desired hour,
Y O R
K H
Y D
R O
minute, meridian; day, month, and year are displayed.
K I T P
U M
P S = 2
Pressing the ENTER/ADV key will save the valve and 7
move the cursor on to the next programmable variable.
Option 20 – Pump Selection
The displays for this PUMP SELECTION option
should only appear if “YORK HYDRO KIT PUMPS =
2” are selected under Option 19. Presently, this option
should not be used.

JOHNSON CONTROLS 151

 FORM 150.72-NM2 (811)
SECTION 7 – UNIT CONTROLS
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011

Table 17 - UNIT KEYS OPTIONS PROGRAMMING QUICK REFERENCE LIST

Options Key
Expansion Valve Type
(press Options Key
to adv.) (Thermoplastic or Electric)
(Programmed under Service
Display Language Mode, Viewable Only)
Must be programmed
System Switches for Thermostatic
on/off
Flash Card Update
Chilled Liquid Type
(water or glycol)
Remote Temp Reset

Ambient Control
Pump Control
(standard or low)

Pump Selection
Local/Remote Mode

Unit Control Mode

(Return or Leaving)

Display Units
(English or Metric)

System Lead/Lag Control

(Manual or Automatic)

Fan Control Mode

Manual Override Mode

Current Feedback Option

Power Failure Restart

Soft Start Option

Unit Type
(”Chiller” MUST be Selected
Via No Jumper Installed
(Viewable Only)

Refrigerant Type
R-410A
(Programmed under Service Mode)
Viewable Only)

Table 17 provides a quick reference list for the Unit key setpoints. LD07405d

152 JOHNSON CONTROLS

FORM 150.72-NM2 (811)
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011

SECTION 8 – UNIT OPERATION

CAPACITY CONTROL LEAVING CHILLED LIQUID CONTROL
To initiate the start sequence of the chiller, all run per- The setpoint, when programmed for Leaving Chilled
missive inputs must be satisfied (flow/remote start/stop Liquid Control, is the temperature the unit will control
switch), and no chiller or system faults exist. to within plus or minus the (control) cooling range. The
Setpoint High Limit is the Setpoint plus the Cooling
The first phase of the start sequence is initiated by the Range. The Setpoint Low Limit is the Setpoint minus
Daily Schedule Start or any Remote Cycling Device. If the Cooling Range. Figure 28 on page 153 should be
the unit is shut down on the daily schedule, the chilled utilized to aid in understanding the following descrip-
water pump contacts (Terminals 23 and 24 of XTBC2) tion of Leaving Chilled Liquid Control.
will close to start the pump when the daily schedule
start time has been reached. Once flow has been es- 30 sec. Contol Range 60 sec.
tablished and the flow switch closes, capacity control unloading (no compressor staging) loading
functions are initiated, if the remote cycling contacts
wired in series with the flow switch are closed.
LWT
44.0 ºF 46.0 ºF 48.0 ºF
It should be noted that the chilled water pump contacts (6.7 ºC) (7.8 ºC) (8.9 ºC)
(Terminals 23 and 24 of XTBC2) are not required to Low Limit Setpoint High Limit
be used to cycle the chilled water pump. However, in Leaving Water Temp. Control - Compressor Staging
all cases the flow switch must be closed to allow unit Setpoint = 46.0 ºF (7.8 ºC) Range = +/-2 ºF (1.1 ºC)
operation. LD14404

Figure 28 - LEAVING WATER TEMPERATURE

The control system will evaluate the need for cooling CONTROL EXAMPLE
by comparing the actual leaving or return chilled liq-
uid temperature to the desired setpoint, and regulate If the leaving chilled liquid temperature is above the
the leaving or return chilled liquid temperature to meet Setpoint High Limit, the lead compressor on the lead
that desired setpoint. system will be energized along with the liquid line so-
lenoid. Upon energizing any compressor, the 60 sec-
SUCTION PRESSURE LIMIT CONTROLS ond Anti-Coincidence timer will be initiated to prevent
The anticipatory controls are intended to prevent the multiple compressors from turning ON.
unit from ever actually reaching a low-pressure cut- If after 60 seconds of run-time the leaving chilled liq-
out. Loading is prevented, if the suction pressure drops uid temperature is still above the Setpoint High Limit,
below 1.15 x suction pressure cutout (15% below the the next compressor in sequence will be energized.
cutout). Loading may reoccur after suction pressure Additional compressors will be energized at a rate of
8
rises above the unload point and a period of one min- once every 60 seconds if the chilled liquid temperature
ute elapses. This control is only operable if the optional remains above the Setpoint High Limit and the chilled
suction pressure transducers are installed. liquid temperature is dropping less than 3 °F/min. The
lag system will not be allowed to start a compressor
DISCHARGE PRESSURE LIMIT CONTROLS until the lead system has run for 5 minutes.
The discharge pressure limit controls unload a system
If the chilled liquid temperature falls below the Set-
before it reaches a safety limit due to high load or dirty
point High Limit but is greater than the Setpoint Low
condenser coils. The microprocessor monitors dis-
Limit, loading and unloading do not occur. This area of
charge pressure and unloads a system, if fully loaded,
control is called the control range.
by one compressor when discharge pressure exceeds
the programmed cutout minus 10 PSIG (0.69 barg). If the chilled liquid temperature drops to between Set-
Reloading will occur when the discharge pressure on point Low Limit and 0.5 °F (0.28 °C) below the Set-
the affected system drops to 85% of the unload pres- point Low Limit, unloading (a compressor turns OFF)
sure and 10 minutes have elapsed. occurs at a rate of 1 every 30 seconds. If the chilled
liquid temperature falls to a value greater than 0.5 °F
This control is only applicable if optional discharge
(0.28 °C) below the Setpoint Low Limit but not greater
pressure transducers are installed.
than 1.5 °F (0.83 °C) below the Setpoint Low Limit,

JOHNSON CONTROLS 153

 FORM 150.72-NM2 (811)
SECTION 8 – UNIT OPERATION
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011

unloading occurs at a rate of 20 seconds. If the chilled

SETPOINT ADJUST (DEG. F)

liquid temperature falls to a value greater than 1.5 °F
6
(0.83 °C) below the Setpoint Low Limit, unloading oc- 5
curs at a rate of 10 seconds. If the chilled liquid tem- 4
perature falls below 1 °F above the low chilled liquid 3
temperature cutout, unloading occurs at a rate of 10 2
seconds if it is greater than 10 seconds. 1
0
In water cooling mode on R-410A chillers, the mini- 0 1 2 3 4 5 6
mum low limit of the control range will be 40.0ºF. For LAST RUN TIME OF LEAD SYSTEM (MINUTES)
leaving chilled liquid temperature setpoint and control LD11415
range combinations that result in the low limit of the Figure 29 - SETPOINT ADJUST
control range being below 40.0ºF, the low limit will be If adding the setpoint adjust value to the setpoint high
reset to 40.0ºF and the difference will be added to the limit causes the setpoint high limit to be greater than 50
high limit. This will result in a control range the same °F, the setpoint high limit will be set to 50 °F, and the
size as programmed but not allow the unit to run below difference will be added to the setpoint low limit.
40.0ºF. This control will not affect glycol chillers.
Once a system runs for greater than 5 minutes, the set-
Hot gas, if present, will be the final step of capacity. Hot point adjust will be set back to 0. This will occur while
gas is energized when only a single compressor is run- the system is still running.
ning and LWT is less than SP. Hot gas is turned OFF
as temperature rises when LWT is more than SP plus LEAVING CHILLED LIQUID SYSTEM LEAD/
CR/2. If temperature remains below the setpoint low LAG AND COMPRESSOR SEQUENCING
limit on the lowest step of capacity, the microprocessor A Lead/Lag option may be selected to help equalize
will close the liquid line solenoid, after turning off hot average run hours between systems with 2 refriger-
gas, and pump the system down before turning off the ant systems. This may be programmed under the OP-
last compressor in a system. TIONS key. Auto Lead/Lag allows automatic Lead/
The leaving chilled liquid setpoint is programmable Lag of the two systems based on average run hours of
from 40 °F to 70 °F (4.4 °C to 21.1 °C) in water chill- the compressors in each system. Manual Lead/Lag se-
ing mode and from 10 °F to 70 °F (-12.2 °C to 21.1 lects specifically the sequence which the microproces-
°C) in glycol chilling mode. In both modes, the cool- sor starts systems.
ing range can be from plus or minus1.5 °F to plus or On a hot water start, once a system starts, it will turn
minus2.5 °F (plus or minus.83 °C to 1.39 °C).leaving ON all compressors before the next system starts a
chilled liquid control. compressor. The microprocessor will sequence com-
pressors within each circuit to maximize individual
LEAVING CHILLED LIQUID CONTROL
compressor run time on individual compressors within
OVERRIDE TO REDUCE CYCLING
a system to prevent short cycling.
To avoid compressor cycling the microprocessor will
adjust the setpoint upward temporarily. The last run Each compressor in a system will be assigned an arbi-
time of the system will be saved. If the last run time trary priority number 1, 2, or 1, 2, 3. The non-running
was greater than 5 minutes, no action is to be taken. compressor within a system with the lowest priority
If the last run time for the lead system was less than 5 number will always be the next compressor to start.
minutes, the microprocessor will increase the setpoint The running compressor with priority number 1 will al-
high limit according to the chart at right, with a maxi- ways be the next to shut OFF. Whenever a compressor
mum value allowed of 50 °F (seeFigure 29 on page
154).

154 JOHNSON CONTROLS

FORM 150.72-NM2 (811)
SECTION 8 – UNIT OPERATION
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011

Table 18 - SAMPLE COMPRESSOR STAGING FOR RETURN WATER CONTROL

COMPRESSOR STAGING FOR RETURN WATER CONTROL
4 COMPRESSOR
COOLING SETPOINT = 45 °F (7.2 °C) RANGE = 10 °F (5.6 °C)
# OF COMP ON 0 * 1+HG 1 2 3 4
45 °F 46.25 °F 47.5 °F 50.0 °F 52.5 °F 55.0 °F
RWT
(7.2 °C) (7.9 °C) (8.6 °C) (10.0 °C) (11.4 °C) (12.8 °C)

*Unloading only

is shut OFF, the priority numbers of all compressors Return Chilled Liquid Control MUST
will be decreased by 1 with wrap-around. This control only be used when constant chilled liquid
scheme assures the same compressor does not repeat- flow is ensured.
edly cycle ON and OFF. The range MUST always be programmed
Once the second system starts a compressor on a 2 sys- to equal the temperature drop across
tem chillers, the microprocessor will attempt to equally the evaporator when the chiller is “fully
load each system as long as the system is not limit- loaded”. Otherwise, chilled liquid temper-
ing or pumping down. Once this occurs, loading and ature will over or under shoot. Variable
unloading will alternate between systems, loading the flow must never be used in return chilled
lead system first or unloading the lag system first. liquid mode.
Normal loading will occur at intervals of 60 seconds
RETURN CHILLED LIQUID CONTROL according to the temperatures determined by the for-
(Can be used on Dual System 4, 5 and 6 Comp mulas. Unloading will occur at a rate of 30 seconds ac-
Units Only) cording to the temperatures determined in the formulas
Return chilled liquid control is based on staging the used to calculate the ON and OFF points for each step
compressors to match the cooling load. The chiller of capacity.
will be fully loaded when the return water temperature
The return chilled liquid setpoint is programmable
is equal to the Cooling Setpoint plus the Range. The
from 40 °F to 70 °F (4.4 °C to 21.1 °C) in water chill-
chiller will be totally unloaded (all compressors OFF)
ing mode and from 10 °F to 70 °F (-12.2 °C to 21.1
when the return water temperature is equal to the Cool-
°C) in glycol chilling mode. In both modes, the cooling
ing Setpoint (See sample in Table 18 on page 155).
range can be from 4 °F to 20 °F (2.2° to 11.1 °C).
At return water temperatures between the Cooling
Setpoint and Cooling Setpoint plus Range, compres- As an example of compressor staging (refer to Table 19
sor loading and unloading will be determined by the on page 155), a chiller with six compressors using a 8
formulas in Table 19 on page 155. Cooling Setpoint programmed for 45 °F (7.20 °C) and

Table 19 - RETURN CHILLED LIQUID CONTROL FOR 4 COMPRESSORS (6 STEPS)

*STEP COMPRESSOR COMPRESSOR ON POINT COMPRESSOR OFF POINT
0 0 SETPOINT SETPOINT
1 1 W/HGB SP + CR/8 (Note 1) SETPOINT
2 1 NO HGB SP + CR/4 SP + CR/8
3 2 SP + 2*CR/4 (Note 2) SP + CR/4
4 2 SP + 2*CR/4 SP + CR/4 (Note 3)
5 3 SP + 3*CR/4 SP + 2*CR/4
6 4 SP + CR SP + 3*CR/4
Notes:
1. Step 1 is Hot Gas Bypass and is skipped when loading occurs. Hot Gas Bypass operation is inhibited during Pumpdown.
2. Step 3 is skipped when loading occurs.
3. Step 4 is skipped when unloading occurs.
* STEP can be viewed using the OPER DATA key and scrolling to COOLING DEMAND.

JOHNSON CONTROLS 155

 FORM 150.72-NM2 (811)
SECTION 8 – UNIT OPERATION
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011

a Range Setpoint of 10 °F (5.56 °C). Using the formu- viewed under the OPER DATA key. Refer to “DIS-
las in Table 19 on page 155, the control range will be PLAY/PRINT KEYS” on page 131 for specific infor-
split up into six (seven including hot gas) segments, mation on the OPER DATA key.
with the Control Range determining the separation be-
tween segments. Note also that the Cooling Setpoint is RETURN CHILLLED LIQUID SYSTEM LEAD/
the point at which all compressors are OFF, and Cool- LAG AND COMPRESSOR SEQUENCING
ing Setpoint plus Range is the point all compressors are A Lead/Lag option may be selected to help equalize
ON. Specifically, if the return water temperature is 55 average run hours between systems with 2 refriger-
°F (12.8 °C), then all compressors will be ON, provid- ant systems. This may be programmed under the OP-
ing full capacity. At nominal gpm, this would provide TIONS key. Auto Lead/Lag of the 2 systems based on
approximately 45 °F (7.2 °C) leaving water tempera- average run hours of the compressors in each system.
ture out of the evaporator. Manual Lead/Lag selects specifically the sequence
If the return water temperature drops to 53.4 °F (11.9 which the microprocessor starts the systems.
°C), one compressor would cycle OFF leaving five The microprocessor will sequence compressors load
compressors running. The compressors would contin- and unload systems according to Table 20 on page
ue to cycle OFF approximately every 1.7 °F (.94 °C), 156. The microprocessor will lead/lag compressors
with the exception of hot gas bypass. Notice that the within each circuit to maximize individual compres-
hot gas bypass would cycle ON when the return water sor run time for the purpose of lubrication. It will also
temperature dropped to 46.25 °F (7.9 °C). At this point prevent the same compressor from starting 2 times in
one compressor would be running with hot gas. a row. The microprocessor will not attempt to equalize
Should the return water temperature rise from this run time on individual compressors within a system.
point to 46.7 °F (8.2 °C), the hot gas bypass would Each compressor in a system will be assigned an ar-
shut OFF, still leaving one compressor running. As the bitrary number 1, or 2. The non-running compressor
load increased, the compressors would stage ON every within a system with the lowest priority number will
1.7 °F (.94 °C). always be the next compressor to start. The running
Also note that Table 19 on page 155 not only provides compressor with priority number 1 will always be the
the formulas for the loading (ON POINT) and unload- next compressor to shut OFF. Whenever a compressor
ing (OFF POINT) of the system, the “STEP” is also is shut OFF, the priority numbers of all compressors
shown in the table. The “STEP” is the increment in the in each system will be decreased by 1 with the wrap
sequence of the capacity control scheme that can be around. This control scheme assures the same com-
pressor does not repeatedly cycle ON and OFF.

Table 20 - RETURN CHILLED LIQUID CONTROL FOR 4 COMPRESSORS (6 STEPS)

LEAD SYSTEM LAG SYSTEM
STEP COMP 1 COMP 2 - COMP 1 COMP 2 -
0 OFF OFF - OFF OFF -
1 ON + HG OFF - SEE NOTE 1 OFF OFF -
2 ON OFF - OFF OFF -
SEE NOTE 2
3 ON OFF - ON OFF -
SEE NOTE 3
4 ON ON - OFF OFF -
5 ON ON - ON OFF -
6 ON ON - ON ON -
NOTES
1. Step is Hot Gas Bypass and is skipped when loading occurs. Hot Gas Bypass operation is inhibited during pumpdown. For Leaving Chilled
Liquid Control the Hot Gas Bypass solenoid is energized only when the lead compressor is running and the LWT < SP, the Hot Gas Bypass
solenoid is turned off when the LWT more than SP + CR/2.
2. Step 3 is skipped when loading occurs.
3. Step 4 is skipped when unloading occurs.

156 JOHNSON CONTROLS

FORM 150.72-NM2 (811)
SECTION 8 – UNIT OPERATION
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011

ANTI-RECYCLE TIMER EVAPORATOR HEATER CONTROL

The programmable anti-recycle timer assures that sys- The evaporator heater is controlled by ambient air tem-
tems do not cycle. This timer is programmable under perature. When the ambient temperature drops below
the PROGRAM key between 300 and 600 seconds. 40 °F (4.4 °C) the heater is turned ON. When the tem-
Whenever possible, to reduce cycling and motor heat- perature rises above 45 °F (7.2 °C) the heater is turned
ing, the anti-recycle timer should be adjusted to 600 OFF. An under voltage condition will keep the heater
seconds. The programmable anti-recycle timer starts OFF until full voltage is restored to the system.
the timer when the first compressor in a system starts.
The timer begins to count down. If all of the compres- PUMPDOWN CONTROL
sors in a circuit cycle OFF, a compressor within the cir- Each system has a pump-down feature upon shut-off.
cuit will not be permitted to start until the anti-recycle Manual pumpdown from the keypad is not possible.
timer has timed out. If the lead system has run for less On a non-safety, non-unit switch shutdown, all com-
than 5 minutes, 3 times in a row, the anti-recycle timer pressors but one in the system will be shut OFF. The
will be extended to 10 minutes. LLSV will also be turned OFF. The final compressor
will be allowed to run until the suction pressure falls
ANTI-COINCIDENCE TIMER
below the cutout, or for 180 seconds, whichever comes
This timer is not present on single-system units. Two first.
timing controls are present in software to assure com-
pressors within a circuit or between systems, do not STANDARD CONDENSER FAN CONTROL
start simultaneously. The anti-coincidence timer as- Condenser fan operation must be programmed with
sures there is at least a one minute delay between sys- the OPTIONS key under “Fan Control.” Condenser
tem starts on 2-circuit systems. This timer is NOT pro- fan must be selected for Discharge Pressure only. Fan
grammable. The load timers further assure that there control by discharge pressure will work according to
is a minimum time between compressor starts within the tables on the following pages (see Table 21 on page
a system. 159 and Table 22 on page 160). The fan control on
pressure and fan differential off-pressure are program-
EVAPORATOR PUMP CONTROL AND YORK
mable under the PROGRAM key. Standard fan control
HYDRO KIT PUMP CONTROL
operates down to a temperature of 25° F.
The evaporator pump dry contacts (XTBC2 – Termi-
nals 23 and 24) are energized when any of the follow- The delay between turning ON and OFF fan stages is
ing conditions are true: always fixed at 5 seconds.

1. Low Leaving Chilled Liquid Fault When a fan stage is turned ON by pressure, the on
pressure for the next stage is increased 20 PSIG and 8
2. Any compressor is running ramped back to the programmed on pressure over the
3. Daily Schedule is ON, Unit Switch is ON and Re- next 20 seconds. Typically, standard ambient control
mote Stop is closed on pressure should be programmed at 385 PSIG with a
differential of 125 PSIG.
The pump will not run if the microprocessor panel
has been powered up for less than 30 seconds or if the When a fan stage is turned OFF (programmed on pres-
pump has run in the last 30 seconds to prevent pump sure minus programmed differential), the off pressure
motor overheating. for the next stage is decreased 20 PSIG and ramped
back to the programmed off pressure minus the differ-
Whenever the option “YORK HYDRO KIT PUMPS = ential over the next 20 seconds.
1” is selected under the OPTIONS key, the pump con-
trol will be as described above. DO NOT SELECT the Condenser fan locations are shown in Figure 30 on
option “YORK HYDRO KIT PUMPS = 2” under the page 158. Detailed Standard Fan Control operation
OPTIONS key. If a dual pump option is installed, the is shown in Table 21 on page 159 and Table 22 on
active pump is selected by the selector switch. page 160.

JOHNSON CONTROLS 157

 FORM 150.72-NM2 (811)
SECTION 8 – UNIT OPERATION
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011

035-21589-107 REV D

Figure 30 - CONDENSER FAN LOCATIONSWIRING DIAGRAMS

158 JOHNSON CONTROLS

 FORM 150.72-NM2 (811)
SECTION 8 – UNIT OPERATION
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011

Table 21 - YLAA STANDARD CONDENSER FAN CONTROL USING DISCHARGE PRESSURE ONLY (2, 3, OR 4
FANS PER SYSTEM)
FAN CONTAC-
FAN IPUII I/O OUTPUT FAN #
ON* OFF** TOR
STAGE
SYS 1 SYS 2 SYS 1 SYS 2 SYS 1 SYS 2
DP < PROGRAMMED
FAN CONTROL ON
DP > PROGRAMMED
PRESSURE MINUS
1 FAN CONTROL ON 7B7-8 TB10-8 1-KF1 2-KF1 1-MF1 2-MF2
PROGRAMMED DIF-
PRESSURE
FERENTIAL PRES-
SURE
DP < PROGRAMMED
DP > PROGRAMMED FAN CONTROL ON
FAN CONTROL ON PRESSURE MINUS
TB7-8 & TB10-8 & 1-KF1 & 2-KF1 & 1-MF1 & 2-MF1 &
2 PRESSURE & FAN PROGRAMMED DIF-
TB7-9 TB10-9 1-KF2 2-KF2 1-MF2 2-MF2
STAGE 1 IS ENER- FERENTIAL PRES-
GIZED SURE & FAN STAGE 1
IS ENERGIZED
3 FAN: 3 FAN:
DP < PROGRAMMED
1-MF1 & 2-MF1 &
FAN CONTROL ON
DP > PROGRAMMED 1-MF2 & 2-MF2 &
PRESSURE MINUS
FAN CONTROL ON TB7-8 & TB10-8 & 1-KF1 & 2-KF1 & 1-MF3 2-MF3
PROGRAMMED DIF-
3 PRESSURE AND FAN TB7-9 & TB10-9 & 1-KF2 & 2-KF2 & 4 FAN: 4 FAN:
FERENTIAL PRES-
STAGES 1 & 2 ARE TB7-10 TB10-10 1-KF3 2-KF3 1-MF1 & 2-MF1 &
SURE & FAN STAGES
ENERGIZED 1-MF2 & 2-MF2 &
1 & 2 ARE ENER-
1-MF3 & 2-MF3 &
GIZED
1-MF4 2-MF4

* When a fan stage is turned on, the pressure for the next stage is increased 20 PSIG and ramped back to the programmed on pressure over
the next 20 seconds.
** When a fan stage is turned off (Programmed ON pressure minus the differential), the OFF pressure for the next stage is decreased 20 PSIG
and ramped back to the programmed OFF pressure minus the differential.

The time delay (fan delay timer) between

turning fan stages on and off is fixed at
5 seconds.
8

JOHNSON CONTROLS 159

 FORM 150.72-NM2 (811)
SECTION 8 – UNIT OPERATION
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011

Table 22 - YLAA STANDARD CONDENSER FAN CONTROL USING DISCHARGE PRESSURE ONLY (5 OR 6
FANS PER SYSTEM)

FAN IPUII I/O OUTPUT FAN CONTACTOR FAN #

ON* OFF**
STAGE SYS 1 SYS 2 SYS 1 SYS 2 SYS 1 SYS 2
DP < PRO-
GRAMMED
DP > PRO- FAN CONTROL
GRAMMED FAN ON PRESSURE
1 TB7-8 TB10-8 1-KF1 2-KF1 1-MF1 2-MF1
CONTROL ON MINUS PRO-
PRESSURE GRAMMED
DIFFERENTIAL
PRESSURE
DP < PRO-
GRAMMED
DP > PRO- FAN CONTROL
GRAMMED FAN ON PRESSURE
1-MF1 & 2-MF1 &
CONTROL ON MINUS PRO- TB7-8 & TB10-8 & 1-KF1 & 2-KF1 &
2 1-MF2 & 2-MF2 &
PRESSURE & GRAMMED TB7-9 TB10-9 1-KF2 2-KF2
1-MF3 2-MF3
FAN STAGE 1 IS DIFFERENTIAL
ENERGIZED PRESSURE &
FAN STAGE 1
IS ENERGIZED
5 FAN:
DP < PRO- 1-MF1 &
GRAMMED 1-MF2 &
DP > PRO- FAN CONTROL 1-MF3 &
5 FAN:
GRAMMED FAN ON PRESSURE 1-MF4 &
1-MF1 &
CONTROL ON MINUS PRO- TB7-8 & TB10-8 & 1-KF1 & 2-KF1 & 1-MF5
1-MF2 &
3 PRESSURE AND GRAMMED TB7-9 & TB10-9 & 1-KF2 & 2-KF2 & 6 FAN:
1-MF3 &
FAN STAGES 1 DIFFERENTIAL TB7-10 TB10-10 1-KF3 2-KF3 1-MF1 &
1-MF4 &
& 2 ARE ENER- PRESSURE & 1-MF2 &
1-MF5
GIZED FAN STAGES 1 1-MF3 &
& 2 ARE ENER- 1-MF4 &
GIZED 1-MF5&
1-MF6

* When a fan stage is turned on, the pressure for the next stage is increased 20 PSIG and ramped back to the programmed on pressure over
the next 20 seconds.
** When a fan stage is turned off (Programmed ON pressure minus the differential), the OFF pressure for the next stage is decreased 20 PSIG
and ramped back to the programmed OFF pressure minus the differential.

The time delay (fan delay timer) between

turning fan stages on and off is fixed at
5 seconds.

160 JOHNSON CONTROLS

FORM 150.72-NM2 (811)
SECTION 8 – UNIT OPERATION
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011

LOAD LIMITING ALARM STATUS

Load Limiting is a feature that prevents the unit from System or unit shutdown is indicated by normally-open
loading beyond the desired value. 2 and 4 compres- alarm contacts opening whenever the unit shuts down
sor units can be load limited to 50%. This would allow on a unit fault, locks out on a system fault, or experi-
only 1 compressor per system to run. 3 and 6 compres- ences a loss of power to the chiller electronics . System
sor units can be load limited to 33% or 66%. The 66% 1 alarm contacts are located at XTBC2 – Terminals 29
limit would allow up to 2 compressors per system to to 30. System 2 alarm contacts are located at XTBC2 –
run, and the 33% limit would allow only 1 compressor Terminals 31 to 32. The alarm contacts will close when
per system to run. Five-compressor units may be load conditions allow the unit to operate, or the fault is reset
limited to 40% (1 compressor per system runs) or 80% during a loss of power, the contacts will remain open
(up to 2 compressors per system) are permitted to run. until power is reapplied and no fault conditions exist.
No other values of limiting are available.
REMOTE BAS/EMS TEMPERATURE RESET
There are two ways to load limit the unit. The first is USING A VOLTAGE OR CURRENT SIGNAL
through remote communication via an ISN. Load limit
stages are sent through YORK Talk on pages 9 and 10 The Remote Reset Option allows the Control Center
of feature 54. Page 9 is stage 1 load limit and page 10 of the unit to reset the chilled liquid setpoint using a
is stage 2 load limit. 0 to 10VDC input, or a 4 to 20mA input connected to
XTBC1 Terminals A- and A+. Whenever a reset is
A second stage of load limiting the unit is accom- called for, the change may be noted by pressing the
plished by closing contacts connected to the Load Limit COOLING SETPOINTS key twice. The new value
(XTBC1 – terminals 13-21) and PWM inputs (XTBC1 will be displayed as “REM SETP = XXX °F.”
– terminals 13-20). Stage 1 of load limiting involves
closing the Load Limit input. Stage 2 of load limiting If a 0 to 10VDC signal is supplied, it is applied to Ter-
involves closing both the Load Limit and PWM inputs. minals A+ and A‑, and jumper JP1 on the I/O board
The first stage of limiting is either 80%, 66% or 50%, must be inserted between pins 2 and 3. To calculate the
depending on the number of compressors on the unit. reset chilled liquid setpoint for values between 0VDC
The second stage of limiting is either 40% or 33% and and 10VDC use the following formula:
is only available on 3, 5 and 6 compressor units. Table Setpoint = Local Chilled Liquid Setpoint + °Reset
23 on page 161 shows the load limiting permitted for °Reset = (DC voltage signal) x (*Max Reset Value)
the various numbers of compressors.
10

Table 23 - COMPRESSOR OPERATION LOAD Example:

LIMITING Local Chilled Liquid Setpoint = 45 °F (7.22 °C)
COMPRESSORS *Max Reset Value = 20 °F (11.11 °C) 8
STAGE 1 STAGE 2
IN UNIT Input Signal = 6VDC
2 50% -
(English)
3 66% 33%
°Reset = 6VDC x 20 °F
4 50% - = 12 °F Reset
10
5 80% 40%
6 66% 33% New Setpoint = 45 °F + 12 °F = 57 °F
(Metric)
Simultaneous operation of Remote Load °Reset = 6VDC x 11. 11 °C
= 6.67 °C Reset
Limiting and EMS-PWM Temperature 10
Reset (described on following pages)
New Setpoint = 7.22 °C + 6.67 °C = 13.89 °C
cannot occur.
* M
 ax Reset Value is the “Max EMS‑PWM Remote Temp. Reset”
setpoint value described in “Remote Setpoint Control” on page
141 under “Cooling Setpoints”. Programmable values are from 2
COMPRESSOR RUN STATUS °F to 40 °F (1.11 °C to 11.11 °C).

Compressor run status is indicated by closure of con-

tacts at XTBC2 – Terminals 25 to 26 for system 1 and
XTBC2 – Terminals 27 to 28 for system 2.
JOHNSON CONTROLS 161
 FORM 150.72-NM2 (811)
SECTION 8 – UNIT OPERATION
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011

If a 4 to 20mA signal is supplied, it is applied to Ter- A 240 to 24 Volt Ratio Transformer (T3)
minals A+ and A‑ and jumper JP1 on the I/O board is used to derive nominal 12 volt output
must be installed between pin 1 and 2. To calculate the from the 120 volt supply.
chilled liquid setpoint for values between 4mA and 20
mA use the following formula:
Setpoint = Local Chilled Liquid Setpoint + °Reset
°Reset = (mA signal ‑ 4) x (*Max Reset Value)
16
Example:
Local Chilled Liquid Setpoint = 45° (7.22 °C)
*Max Reset Value = 10 °F (5.56 °C)
Input Signal = 12 mA
(English)
°Reset = 8mA x 10 °F
= 5 °F Reset
16
Setpoint = 45 °F + 5 °F = 50 °F
(Metric)
°Reset = 8mA x 5.56 °C
= 2.78 °C Reset
16
Setpoint = 7.22 °C + 2.78 °C = 10.0 °C

162 JOHNSON CONTROLS

FORM 150.72-NM2 (811)
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011

SECTION 9 – SERVICE AND TROUBLESHOOTING

CLEARING HISTORY BUFFERS Following is the order of outputs that will appear as the
ENTER/ADV key is pressed:
The history buffers may be cleared by pressing the
HISTORY key and then repeatedly pressing the UP SYS 1 COMP 1 STATUS TB7-2 IS:
arrow key until you scroll past the last history buffer SYS 1 LLSV STATUS TB7-3 IS:
choice. The following message will be displayed: SYS 1 COMP 2 STATUS TB7-4 IS:
SYS 1 COMP 3 STATUS TB7-5 IS:
I I N I T I A L I Z E H I S T O R Y
SYS 1 HGBP STATUS TB7-7 IS:
E N T E R = Y E S
SYS 2 COMP 1 STATUS TB10-2 IS:
SYS 2 LLSV STATUS TB10-3 IS:
Pressing the ENTER/ADV key at this display will SYS 2 COMP 2 STATUS TB10-4 IS:
cause the history buffers to be cleared. Pressing any SYS 2 COMP 3 STATUS TB10-5 IS:
other key will cancel the operation. SYS 1 FAN OUTPUT 1 TB7-8 IS:
DO NOT CLEAR BUFFERS. Important SYS 1 FAN OUTPUT 2 TB7-9 IS:
information may be lost. Contact factory SYS 1 FAN OUTPUT 3 TB7-10 IS:
service. SYS 2 FAN OUTPUT 1 TB10-8 IS:
SYS 2 FAN OUTPUT 2 TB10-9 IS:
SYS 2 FAN OUTPUT 3 TB10-10 IS:
EVAP HEATER STATUS TB8-2 IS:
SYS 1 ALARM STATUS TB8-3 IS:
SERVICE MODE
SYS 2 ALARM STATUS TB9-2 IS:
Service Mode is a mode that allows the user to enable EVAP PUMP STATUS TB8-6,7 IS:
or disable all of the outputs (except compressors) on SYS 2 HGBV STATUS TB10-7 IS:
the unit, change chiller configuration setup parameters SPARE DO TB8-4 IS:
and view all the inputs to the microboard. SPARE DO TB8-5 IS:
SPARE DO TB8-8, 9 IS:
To enter Service Mode, turn the Unit Switch OFF and
SPARE DO TB9-4 IS:
press the following keys in the sequence shown:
SYS 1 EEV OUTPUT TB5-1, 2 = XXX%
• PROGRAM SYS 2 EEV OUTPUT TB6-1, 2 = XXX%
SYS 1 COND FAN SPEED J15-1,5 = XXX%
• UP ARROW SYS 2 COND FAN SPEED J15-2,6 = XXX%
• UP ARROW SPARE AO J15-3,7 = XXX%
SPARE AO J15-4,8 = XXX%
• DOWN ARROW DATA LOGGING MODE 1 = ON, 0 = OFF
• DOWN ARROW DATA LOGGING TIMER X SECS
SOFT START (disabled)
• ENTER REFRIGERANT TYPE (R-410A only) 9
Service Mode will time out after 30 minutes and return EXPANSION VALVE TYPE (Thermostatic Only)
to normal control mode, if the panel is accidentally left REMOTE TEMP RESET OPTION =
in this mode. Otherwise, turning the unit switch ON REMOTE INPUT SERVICE TIME =
will take the panel out of Service Mode. “NORTH AMERICAN FEATURE SET ENABLED”
HYDRO PUMP SELECTION
SERVICE MODE – OUTPUTS EVAP PUMP TOTAL RUN HOURS
SYS 1 HOURS
After pressing the key sequence as described, the con-
SYS 2 HOURS
trol will enter Service Mode permitting the outputs
SYS 1 STARTS
(except compressors), operating hours, refrigerant
SYS 2 STARTS
type, expansion valve type, and start/hour counters to
Each display will also show the output connection on
be viewed/modified. The ENTER/ADV key is used to
the microboard for the respective output status shown.
advance through the outputs. Using the ↑ and ↓ (UP/
For example:
DOWN ) arrow keys will turn the respective digital out-
put ON/OFF or modify the value.
JOHNSON CONTROLS 163
 FORM 150.72-NM2 (811)
SECTION 9 – SERVICE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011

S Y S 1 L L S V S T A T U S SERVICE MODE – ANALOG AND DIGITAL

T B
10
- 3 I S O F F INPUTS
After entering Service Mode (PROGRAM ↑↑ ↓↓),
This display indicates that the system 1 liquid line sole- all digital and analog inputs to the microboard can be
noid valve is OFF, and the output connection from the viewed by pressing the OPER DATA key. After pressing
microboard is coming from terminal block 10 – pin 3. the OPER DATA key, the ↑ (UP) arrow and ↓ (DOWN)
arrow keys are used to scroll through the analog and
Pressing the ↑ (UP) arrow key will energize the liquid digital inputs.
line solenoid valve and OFF will change to ON in the
display as the LLSV is energized. Energizing and de- Following is the order of analog and digital inputs that
energizing outputs may be useful during troubleshoot- will appear when sequenced with the ↓ (Down) arrow
ing. key:

SERVICE MODE – CHILLER CONFIGURATION (analog inputs)

SYS 1 SUCT PRESSURE
After the Outputs are displayed, the next group of
displays relate to chiller configuration and start/hour UNIT TYPE
counters. Data logging, soft start, refrigerant type, SYS 1 *DISCH PRESSURE
pump control selection and expansion valve type all SYS 1** SUCTION TEMP.
must be programmed to match actual chiller configura- SYS 2** SUCTION TEMP.
tion. AMBIENT AIR TEMP.
Soft start (disabled), Refrigerant Type LEAVING LIQUID TEMP.
(R-410A), and Expansion Valve Type RETURN LIQUID TEMP.
(Thermostatic), and North American SYS 2 SUCTION PRESSURE
Feature (Enabled) MUST be properly SYS 2 SPARE
programmed or damage to compressors SYS 2 *DISCH PRESSURE
and other system components may result. SYS 1 MTR VOLTS
SYS 2 MTR VOLTS
Following is a list of chiller configuration selections, in (digital inputs)
order of appearance: PWM TEMP RESET INPUT
LOAD LIMIT INPUT
DATA LOGGING MODE = : DO NOT MODIFY FLOW SW / REM START
DATA LOGGING TIMER = : DO NOT MODIFY SPARE
SOFT START SINGLE SYSTEM SELECT
REFRIGERANT TYPE SYS 1 MP / HPCO INPUT
SYS 2 MP / HPCO INPUT
EXPANSION VALVE TYPE
* The discharge pressure transducer is optional on some models.
REMOTE TEMP RESET OPTION ** The suction temp. sensor is on EEV units only.
REMOTE INPUT SERVICE TIME
FEATURE SET The analog inputs will display the input connection,
the temperature or pressure, and corresponding input
PUMP CONTROL SELECTION
voltage such as:
SYS 1 HOURS
SYS 2 HOURS S Y S 1 S U C T P R J 7 - 1 0
SYS 1 STARTS 2 . 1 V D C = 8 1 P S I G

SYS 2 STARTS
The last displays shown on the above list are for the ac- This example indicates that the system 1 suction pres-
cumulated run and start timers for each system. All val- sure input is connected to plug 7 – pin 10 (J7-10) on the
ues can also be changed using the ↑ (UP) and ↓ (Down) I/O board. It indicates that the voltage is 2.1VDC which
arrow keys, but under normal circumstances would not corresponds to 81 PSIG (5.6 bars) suction pressure.
be required or advised. After the last start display, the
The digital inputs will display the input connection and
microprocessor will display the first programmable
ON/OFF status such as:
value under the PROGRAM key.

164 JOHNSON CONTROLS

FORM 150.72-NM2 (811)
SECTION 9 – SERVICE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011

F L O
W S W / R E M S T A R T Table 26 - I/O ANALOG INPUTS
J 13
- 5 I S O N SYS 1 Suction Transducer
J7-10 -or-
This indicates that the flow switch/remote start input is SYS 1 Low Pressure Switch
connected to plug 13- pin 5 (J13-5) on the microboard, Unit Type: Chiller = NO Jumper J11-12 to +24
and is ON (ON = +30VDC unregulated input, OFF = VDC
J11-12
0VDC input on digital inputs). YCUL Condensing Unit = Jumper J11-12 to +24
VDC (Do NOT Use)
CONTROL INPUTS/OUTPUTS J7-11 SYS 1 Discharge Pressure Transducer (Optional)
J6-9 Ambient Air Temp. Sensor
Table 24 through Table 27 on page 165 are a quick
reference list providing the connection points and a J6-7 Leaving Chilled Liquid Temp. Sensor
description of the inputs and outputs respectively. All J6-8 Return Chilled Liquid Temp. Sensor
input and output connections pertain to the connections SYS 2 Suction Pressure Transducer
at the microboard. J9-10 -or-
SYS 2 Low Pressure Switch
Table 24 - I/O DIGITAL INPUTS SYS 2 Discharge Pressure Transducer
J9-11
J13-2 Unit ON/OFF Switch (Optional)
J13-3 Load Limit Stage 2 on 3, 5 & 6 Comp. Units J7-12 Unit/SYS 1 Voltage
J13-4 Load Limit Stage 1 J9-12 SYS 2 Voltage
J13-5 Flow Switch and Remote Start/Stop J11-11 Remote Temperature Reset
J13-6 Spare
Single System Select Table 27 - I/O ANALOG OUTPUTS
J13-7
(Jumper = Single Sys, No Jumper = Two Sys) N/A Not Applicable
CR1
J13-8
(Sys 1 Motor Protector/High Pressure Cutout)
CR2
J13-10
(Sys 2 Motor Protector/High Pressure Cutout)

Table 25 - I/O DIGITAL OUTPUTS

TB7-2 SYS 1 Compressor 1
TB7-3 SYS 1 Liquid Line Solenoid Valve
TB7-4 SYS 1 Compressor 2
TB7-5 SYS 1 Compressor 3
TB7-7 SYS 1 Hot Gas Bypass Valve
TB10-2 SYS 2 Compressor 1
TB10-3 SYS 2 Liquid Line Solenoid Valve
TB10-4 SYS 2 Compressor 2 9
TB10-5 SYS 2 Compressor 3
TB7-8 SYS 1 Condenser Fan Output 1
TB7-9 SYS 1 Condenser Fan Output 2
TB7-10 SYS 1 Condenser Fan Output 3
TB10-8 SYS 2 Condenser Fan Output 1
TB10-9 SYS 2 Condenser Fan Output 2
TB10-10 SYS 2 Condenser Fan Output 3
TB8-2 Evaporator Heater
TB8-3 SYS 1 Alarm
TB9-2 SYS 2 Alarm
TB8-6 & 7 Evaporator Pump Starter
TB10-7 SYS 2 Hot Gas Bypass Valve

JOHNSON CONTROLS 165

 FORM 150.72-NM2 (811)
SECTION 9 – SERVICE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011

TB6 TB5 I/O BOARD

J15

TB1

TB7

J3

TB8

J5

IPU
BOARD
TB9
J6

J7

J8
TB10

J9

J10

J14 JP1
J13 J11
J12
LD12721

Figure 31 - MICROBOARD LAYOUT

166 JOHNSON CONTROLS

FORM 150.72-NM2 (811)
SECTION 9 – SERVICE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011

CHECKING INPUTS AND OUTPUTS Table 28 - OUTDOOR AIR SENSOR TEMPERA-

TURE/VOLTAGE/CORRELATION
Digital Inputs VOLTAGE
Refer to the unit wiring diagram. All digital inputs are TEMP °F (SIGNAL INPUT TEMP °C
connected to J13-1 of the I/O board. The term “digital” TO RETURN)
refers to two states – either ON or OFF. As an example, 0 0.7 -18
when the flow switch is closed, 30VDC will be applied 5 0.8 -15
to J13, pin 5 (J13-5) of the I/O board. If the flow switch 10 0.9 -12
is open, 0VDC will then be present at J13-5.
15 1.0 -9
Pin 1 of J13 is an unregulated 30VDC source used to 20 1.1 -7
supply the DC voltage to the various user contacts, 25 1.2 -4
unit switch, flow switch, etc. This DC source is factory 30 1.4 -1
wired to XTBC1, Terminal 13. Any switch or contact 35 1.5 2
used as a digital input would be connected to this ter- 40 1.7 4
minal, with the other end connecting to its respective
45 1.8 7
digital input on the microboard. Any time a switch or
50 2.0 10
contact is closed, 30VDC would be applied to that par-
ticular digital input. Any time a switch or contact is 55 2.2 13
open, 0VDC would be applied to that particular digital 60 2.3 16
input. 65 2.5 18
70 2.6 21
Typically, voltages of 24 to 36VDC could be measured
75 2.8 24
for the DC voltage on the digital inputs. This voltage is
80 2.9 27
in reference to ground. The unit case should be suffi-
85 3.1 29
cient as a reference point when measuring digital input
voltages. 90 3.2 32
95 3.4 35
Analog Inputs – Temperature 100 3.5 38
Refer to the unit wiring diagram. Temperature inputs 105 3.6 41
are connected to the microboard on plug J6. These ana- 110 3.7 43
log inputs represent varying DC signals corresponding 115 3.8 46
to varying temperatures. All voltages are in reference 120 3.9 49
to the unit case (ground). Following are the connec- 125 4.0 52
tions for the temperature sensing inputs. 130 4.1 54

Outside Air Sensor

J6-6 = +5VDC regulated supply to sensor.
J6-9 = 
VDC input signal to the microboard. 9
See Table 28 on page 167 for voltage readings
that correspond to specific outdoor tempera-
tures.
J6-3 = drain (shield connection = 0VDC) return

JOHNSON CONTROLS 167

 FORM 150.72-NM2 (811)
SECTION 9 – SERVICE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011

Table 29 - ENTERING/LEAVING CHILLED Liquid and Refrigerant Sensor Test Points

LIQUID TEMP. SENSOR, TEMPERA- (See Table 29 on page 168)
TURE/VOLTAGE CORRELATION
VOLTAGE
Entering Chilled Liquid Sensor
TEMP °F (SIGNAL INPUT TEMP °C J6-5 = +5VDC regulated supply to sensor.
TO RETURN)
J6-8 = VDC input signal to the I/O board. See Table
10 1.33 -12
29 on page 168 for voltage readings that cor-
12 1.39 -11
respond to specific liquid temperatures.
14 1.46 -10
16 1.51 -9 J6-2 = drain (shield connection = 0VDC) Return
18 1.58 -8
Leaving Chilled Liquid Temperature Sensor
20 1.65 -7
22 1.71 -6
J6-4 = +5VDC regulated supply to sensor.
24 1.78 -4 J6-7 = VDC input signal to the microboard. See Table
26 1.85 -3 29 on page 168 for voltage readings that cor-
28 1.91 -2 respond to specific liquid temperatures.
30 1.98 -1
J6-1 = drain (shield connection = 0VDC) return
32 2.05 0
34 2.12 1 Analog Inputs – Pressure
36 2.19 2
Refer to the unit wiring diagram. Pressure inputs are
38 2.26 3 connected to the microboard on plugs J7 and J9. These
40 2.33 4 analog inputs represent varying DC signals corre-
42 2.40 6 sponding to varying pressures. All voltages are in ref-
44 2.47 7 erence to the unit case (ground).
46 2.53 8
System 1 discharge and suction pressures will be con-
48 2.60 9
nected to J7 of the microboard. System 2 discharge and
50 2.65 10 suction pressure transducers will be connected to J9 of
52 2.73 11 the microboard.
54 2.80 12
The discharge transducers are optional on all units. If
56 2.86 13
the discharge transducers are not installed, no connec-
58 2.92 14
tions are made to the microboard and the discharge
60 2.98 16
pressure readout on the display would be zero.
62 3.05 17
64 3.11 18 The suction pressure transducers are standard on all
66 3.17 19 YLAA’s. The suction pressure transducers have a
range of 0 to 400 PSIG. The output will be linear from
68 3.23 20
0.5VDC to 4.5VDC over the 400 PSIG (27.5 barg)
70 3.29 21
range.
72 3.34 22
74 3.39 23 The discharge transducers have a range from 0 to
76 3.45 24 650 PSIG. The output will be linear from 0.5VDC to
78 3.5 26 4.5VDC over the 600 PSIG (41.25 barg) range. Fol-
80 3.54 27
lowing is the formula that can be used to verify the
voltage output of the transducer. All voltage reading
are in reference to ground (unit case).

168 JOHNSON CONTROLS

FORM 150.72-NM2 (811)
SECTION 9 – SERVICE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011

Table 30 - PRESSURE TRANSDUCERS J9-7 = +5VDC return

0-400 PSIG SUCTION 0-600 PSIG DISCHARGE J9-2 = drain (shield connection = 0VDC)
PRESSURE TRANS- PRESSURE TRANS-
DUCER DUCER The suction transducers have a range from 0 to 400
PRESSURE VOLTAGE PRESSURE VOLTAGE PSIG (27.5 barg). The output will be linear from
PSIG VDC PSIG VDC 0.5VDC to 4.5VDC over the 400 PSIG (27.5 barg)
0 0.5 0 0.5 range. Following is a formula that can be used to verify
50 1.0 75 1.0 the voltage output of the transducer. All voltage read-
100 1.5 150 1.5 ing are in reference to ground (unit case).
150 2.0 225 2.0 V = (Pressure in PSIG x .02) + .5
200 2.5 300 2.5 or
250 3.0 375 3.0
V = (Pressure in barg x .29) + .5
300 3.5 450 3.5
where V = DC voltage input to microprocessor
350 4.0 525 4.0
400 4.5 600 4.5 Pressure = pressure sensed by transducer
RED WIRE = 5V, BLACK WIRE = 0V, WHITE/GREEN WIRE = SIGNAL Following are the I/O board connections for the Suc-
tion Transducer.
TEST POINTS:
Suction Pressure: System 1 Suction Transducer
System 1: ...............................................Microboard J7-10 to J7-9
J7-5 = +5VDC regulated supply to transducer.
System 2: ...............................................Microboard J9-10 to J9-9
Discharge Pressure: J7-10 = V
 DC input signal to the microboard. See the
System 1: ...............................................Microboard J7-11 to J7-7 formula above for voltage readings that cor-
System 2: ...............................................Microboard J9-11 to J9-7 respond to specific suction pressures.

V = (Pressure in PSIG x .01) + .5 J7-9 = +5VDC return.

or J7-1 = drain (shield connection = 0VDC).
V = (Pressure in BARG x .145) + .5
where V = DC voltage output System 2 Suction Transducer
Pressure = pressure sensed by transducer J9-5 = +5VDC regulated supply to transducer.
The I/O board connections for the Discharge J9-10 = V
 DC input signal to the microboard. See the
Transducers are as follows. formula above for voltage readings that
correspond to specific suction pressures.
System 1 Discharge Transducer
J7-9 = +5VDC return.
J7-6 = +5VDC regulated supply to transducer.
J7-11 = drain (shield connection = 0VDC).
J7-11 = V
 DC input signal to the microboard. See the 9
formula above for voltage readings that cor- Digital Outputs
respond to specific discharge pressures.
Refer to the unit wiring diagram and Figure 32 on page
J7-7 = +5VDC return 170. The digital outputs are located on TB7, TB8,
and TB9 and TB-10 of the microboard. All outputs are
J7-2 = drain (shield connection = 0VDC)
120VAC with the exception of TB8-6 to TB8-7 which
are the contacts that can be used for a remote evapora-
System 2 Discharge Transducer
tor pump start signal. The voltage applied to either of
J9-6 = +5VDC regulated supply to transducer. these terminals would be determined by field wiring.
J9-11 = VDC input signal to the microboard. See the Each output is controlled by the microprocessor by
formula above for voltage readings that correspond to switching 120VAC to the respective output connection
specific discharge pressures. energizing contactors, evaporator heater, and solenoids
according to the operating sequence (see Figure 32 on
page 170).
JOHNSON CONTROLS 169
 FORM 150.72-NM2 (811)
SECTION 9 – SERVICE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011

120VAC is supplied to the I/O board via connections OPTIONAL PRINTER INSTALLATION
at TB7-1, TB7-6, TB10-1, TB10-6, TB8-1 and TB9-1.
The micro panel is capable of supplying a printout
Figure 32 on page 170 illustrates the relay contact ar-
of chiller conditions or fault shutdown information
chitecture on the microboard.
at any given time. This allows operator and service
TB7-2
SYS 1 personnel to obtain data and system status with the
COMP 1
touch of the keypad. In addition to manual print selec-
TB7-3 LLSV 1 tion, the micro panel will provide an automatic print-
TB7
TB7-4
SYS 1 out whenever a fault occurs. Detailed explanation of
COMP 2
the print function is given under “Print Key” on page
SYS 1
TB7-5 COMP 3 134.

TB7-7
SYS 1 Johnson Controls recommends the field tested WEIGH-
HGSV
TRONIX model 1220 printer (or former IMP 24). This
SYS 1
TB7-8 FAN 2 is a compact low cost printer that is ideal for service
TB7
TB7-9
SYS 1 work and data logging.
FAN 1
SYS 1
TB7-10 FAN 3 The WEIGH-TRONIX printer can be obtained by con-
tacting WEIGH-TRONIX for purchase information at:
SYS 2
TB10-2 COMPR 1 (4) WEIGH-TRONIX
TB10-3 LLSV 2 2320 Airport Blvd.
TB10
SYS 2
TB10-4 COMPR 2 (5) Santa Rosa, CA 95402
SYS 2
TB10-5 COMPR 3 (6) Phone: 1-800-982-6622 or 1-707-527-5555

SYS 2 (International Orders Only)

TB10-7 HGSV
The part number for the printer that is packaged spe-
TB10-8
TB10
cifically for YORK is P/N 950915576. The cable to
TB10-9 SYS 2 connect the printer can either be locally assembled
FAN 2
SYS 2
from the parts listed, or ordered directly from WEIGH-
TB10-10 FAN 4 TRONIX under part number 287-040018.

TB8-6 EVAP Parts

TB8-7 PUMP
TB8 The following parts are required:
HEAT EXCH
TB8-2 HEATER 1. WEIGH-TRONIX model 1220 printer.
LD12722

Figure 32 - I/O BOARD RELAY CONTACT ARCHI- 2. Desk top calculator paper, 2.25” (5.7cm) wide.
TECTURE
3. Twisted Pair Shielded Cable (minimum 3 conduc-
tor), #18 AWG stranded, 300V minimum insula-
tion, 25 ft. (7.62m) maximum length.

170 JOHNSON CONTROLS

FORM 150.72-NM2 (811)
SECTION 9 – SERVICE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011

4. One 25 pin Cannon connector and shell. several inches and individual wires about 3/8” (9.5
mm) to connect the cable at the Microboard. Do not
5. Cannon P/N DB-25P connector, or equivalent.
connect the shield at the printer-end of the cable.
6. Cannon P/N DB-C2-J9 shell. Obtaining a Printout
7. Assembly and Wiring A printout is obtained by pressing the PRINT key on
the keypad and then pressing either the OPER DATA
All components should be assembled and wired as key or HISTORY key.
shown in Figure 33. Strip the outside insulation back

Chiller Microboard Printer

TB3

TB3-3 TXD 2 RD

TB3-2 CTS 5 CTS

TB3-5 GND 7 SG

Shield (connect shield to Pin 5 Do not connect shield

of the connector. at printer end.

LD12723

Figure 33 - PRINTER TO MICROBOARD ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS

JOHNSON CONTROLS 171

 FORM 150.72-NM2 (811)
SECTION 9 – SERVICE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011

TROUBLESHOOTING
Table 31 - TROUBLESHOOTING
PROBLEM CAUSE SOLUTION
1. No 115VAC to 24VAC 1a. Check wiring and fuse 1FU.
Transformer.
1b. C
 heck wiring emergency stop contacts 5 to
L of XTBC2 Terminal Block.
1c. Replace Control Transformer.
2. No 24VAC to Microboard. 2. Check wiring Control Transformer to
Microboard.
3. Control Transformer defective, 3. Replace Control Transformer.
no 24VAC output.
NO DISPLAY ON PANEL. UNIT 4. Short in wire to temp. sensors or 4. Unplug connections at IPU II & I/O Board to
WILL NOT OPERATE pressure transducers. isolate.
5. Defective IPU II & I/O Board or 5. Replace IPU II & I/O Board or the Display
the Display Board. Board.
Contact Johnson Controls
Service before replacing cir-
cuit Boards!

1. No chilled liquid flow. 1. Check chilled liquid flow.

2. Flow switch improperly installed. 2. Check that the flow switch is installed
according to manufacturer’s instructions.
FLOW SWITCH/REM STOP NO
RUN PERMISSIVE 3. Defective flow switch. 3. Replace flow switch.
4. Remote cycling device open. 4. Check cycling devices connected to
terminals 13 and 14 of the XTBC1 Terminal
Block.
1. Improper suction pressure 1. Adjust per recommended settings.
cutouts adjustments.
2. Low refrigerant charge. 2. Repair leak if necessary and add refrigerant.
3. Fouled filter dryer. 3. Change dryer/core.
4. TXV defective. 4. Replace TXV.
5. Reduced flow of chilled liquid 5. Check GPM (See “OPERATIONAL
LOW SUCTION PRESSURE through the cooler. LIMITATIONS (ENGLISH)” on page 45).
FAULT Check operation of pump, clean pump
strainer, purge chilled liquid system of air.
6. Defective suction pressure 6. Replace transducer/low pressure switch or
transducer/low pressure switch faulty switch or wiring. Refer to “SECTION 9
or wiring. – SERVICE AND TROUBLESHOOTING” for
pressure/voltage formula on page 169.
7. LLSV defective 7. Replace LLSV
1. Condenser fans not operating or 1. Check fan motor, and contactors. Assure fan
operating backwards. blows air upward.
2. Too much refrigerant. 2. Remove refrigerant.
HIGH DISCHARGE PRESSURE 3. Air in refrigerant system. 3. Evacuate and recharge system.
FAULT
4. Defective discharge pressure 4. Replace discharge pressure transducer.
transducer. Refer to “SECTION 9 – SERVICE AND
TROUBLESHOOTING” for pressure/voltage
formula on page 169.

172 JOHNSON CONTROLS

FORM 150.72-NM2 (811)
SECTION 9 – SERVICE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011

TABLE 27 - TROUBLESHOOTING (CONT’D)

1. Improperly adjusted leaving 1. Re-program the leaving chilled liquid temp.

chilled liquid temp. cutout (glycol cutout.
only).
2. Micro panel setpoint/range 2. Re-adjust setpoint/range.
values improperly programmed.
3. Increase chilled liquid flow. Refer to
LOW LIQUID TEMP FAULT 3. Chilled liquid flow too low. “OPERATIONAL LIMITATIONS (ENGLISH)”
on page 45).
4. Defective LWT or RWT sensor 4. Compare sensor against a known good
(assure the sensor is properly Temperature sensing device. Refer to Table
installed in the bottom of the well 29 on page 168
with a generous amount of heat)
conductive compound).
1. Compressor internal motor 1. Verify refrigerant charge is not low. Verify
protector (MP) open. superheat setting of 10 °F to 15 °F (5.6 °C to
8.3 °C). Verify correct compressor rotation.
Verify compressor is not overloaded.
MP / HPCO FAULT 2. External overload tripped. 2. Determine cause and reset.
3. HPCO switch open. 3. See High Press. Disch. Fault.
4. Defective HPCO switch. 4. Replace HPCO switch.
5. Defective CR relay. 5. Replace relay.
1. Demand not great enough. 1. No problem. Consult Installation Manual to
aid in understanding compressor operation
and capacity control.
2. Defective water temperature 2. Compare the display with a thermometer.
COMPRESSOR(S) WON’T START sensor. Should be within plus or minus 2 degrees.
Refer to Table 29 on page 168 for RWT/
LWT temp./voltage table.
3. Contactor/Overload failure. 3. Replace defective part.
4. Compressor failure. 4. Diagnose cause of failure and replace.
1. Fouled evaporator surface. 1. Contact the local Johnson Controls service
Low suction pressure will be representative.
observed.
2. Improper flow through the 2. Reduce flow to within chiller design specs.
LACK OF COOLING EFFECT evaporator. See “OPERATIONAL LIMITATIONS
(ENGLISH)” on page 45).
3. Low refrigerant charge. Low 3. Check subcooling and add charge as
suction pressure will be needed.
observed.

JOHNSON CONTROLS 173

 FORM 150.72-NM2 (811)
SECTION 9 – SERVICE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

174 JOHNSON CONTROLS

FORM 150.72-NM2 (811)
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011

SECTION 10 – MAINTENANCE
It is the responsibility of the equipment owner to pro- CONDENSER ROUND TUBE COILS
vide maintenance on the system.
Dirt should not be allowed to accumulate on the con-
IMPORTANT denser coil surfaces. Cleaning should be as often as
necessary to keep coils clean.
If system failure occurs due to improper maintenance
during the warranty period, Johnson Controls will not Exercise care when cleaning the coil so
be liable for costs incurred to return the system to sat- that the coil fins are not damaged.
isfactory operation. The following is intended only as
a guide and covers only the chiller unit components. It
does not cover other related system components which
may or may not be furnished by Johnson Controls.
MICROCHANNEL COIL CLEANING
System components should be maintained according to
the individual manufacture’s recommendations as their The cleaning procedure for microchannel coils is sig-
operation will affect the operation of the chiller. nificantly different than tube and fin type coils. Care
must be taken to understand the differences to avoid
COMPRESSORS damage to the microchannel coil. These differences re-
quire a number of DO NOT’s that must be observed:
Oil Level check
The oil level can only be tested when the compressor • DO NOT use coil cleaners or any chemical on a
is running in stabilized conditions, to ensure that there microchannel coil. This can cause severe damage
is no liquid refrigerant in the lower shell of the com- to the coils.
pressor. When the compressor is running at stabilized • DO NOT use a pressure washer to clean the coils.
conditions, the oil level must be between 1/4 and 3/4 in While it is possible to clean a coil with a pressure
the oil sight glass. washer, it’s also possible to destroy it.
At shutdown, the oil level can fall to the • DO NOT contact the coil with a hard surface such
bottom limit of the oil sight glass. Use as a hose nozzle or metal vacuum nozzle or any
YORK “V” oil when adding oil. other tool.
Follow the three steps below for cleaning the coils:
1. Remove surface debris such as dirt, leaves, in-
Oil Analysis
sects, fibers, etc. with a vacuum cleaner having
The oil used in these compressors is pale yellow in a soft attachment rather than a metal tube. Com-
color (POE oil). If the oil color darkens or exhibits a pressed air blown from the inside out can also be
change in color, this may be an indication of contami- used. When brushing debris off the face of the coil
nants in the refrigerant system. If this occurs, an oil a soft bristle (not wire) brush can be used. Do not
sample should be taken and analyzed. If contaminants scrape the coil with the vacuum nozzle, air nozzle,
are present, the system must be cleaned to prevent or any other tool.
compressor failure.
2. Rinse the coil with tap water. Do not use coil
Never use the scroll compressor to pump cleaners. Rinse the coil from the inside out, run-
the refrigerant system down into a vacu- ning water through every passage in the heat
um. Doing so will cause internal arcing exchanger surface until it is clean. Use a gentle
10
of the compressor motor which will result spray from a spray nozzle with a plastic end or
in failure of compressor. put your finger on the end of the spray nozzle to
reduce impact and provide a gentle spray.
CONDENSER FAN MOTORS 3. Because of the fin geometry, microchannel coils
retain water more than tube and fin style. It is gen-
Condenser fan motors are permanently lubricated and
erally recommended to blow or vacuum out the
require no maintenance.
rinse water from the coils to speed drying and pre-
vent water pooling.

JOHNSON CONTROLS 175

 FORM 150.72-NM2 (811)
SECTION 10 – MAINTENANCE
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011

OPERATING PARAMETERS PLATE AND FRAME HEAT EXCHANGER

(EVAPORATOR) HEATER
Regular checks of the system should be preformed to
ensure that operating temperatures and pressures are The internal power supply to the Evapo-
within limitations, and that the operating controls are rator Heater is 120VAC. Disconnecting
set within proper limits. Refer to “SECTION 8 – UNIT 120VAC power from the unit, at or below
OPERATION” on page 153, “SECTION 6 – COM- freezing temperatures, can result in dam-
MISSIONING” on page 117, and “SECTION 4 – IN- age to the evaporator and unit as a result
STALLATION” on page 37 of this manual. of the chilled liquid freezing.

ON-BOARD BATTERY BACK-UP OVERALL UNIT INSPECTION

The Real Time Clock chip (U5) located on the 031- In addition to the checks listed on this page, periodic
02630 IPU II board that maintains the date/time and overall inspections of the unit should be accomplished
stores customer programmed setpoints. The Real Time to ensure proper equipment operation. Items such as
Clock is a 128K bram, P/N 031-02565-000. The IPU loose hardware, component operation, refrigerant
II board must have JP1 installed when the 128K bram leaks, unusual noises, etc. should be investigated and
is installed. corrected immediately.

Do not confuse JP1 on the IPU II (031-

02630) board with JP1 on the I/O (031-
02550) board.

176 JOHNSON CONTROLS

FORM 150.72-NM2 (811)
SECTION 10 – MAINTENANCE
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011

BACNET, MODBUS AND YORKTALK 2 • RS-232: connect to TB3 - Network (RX) to TB3
COMMUNICATIONS (TXD); Network (TX) to TB3 (RXD); Network
(GND) to TB3 (GND)
Data can be read and in some cases modified using a
serial communication BACnet, Modbus or YorkTalk 2 Refer to Figure 34 on page 178 for TB1, TB2 and TB3
network connection. This information allows commu- locations.
nications of chiller operating parameters and external
control changes to setpoint, load limiting, and start/ In most cases, communication parameters will need to
stop commands. be modified. Table 33 on page 179 lists setup parame-
ters for the available protocols. Modification is accom-
BACnet and YorkTalk 2 RS485 networks are wired to plished by pressing the PROGRAM, DOWN ARROW,
the + and - terminals of TB1 for port 1 communica- DOWN ARROW, DOWN ARROW, DOWN ARROW,
tions. Modbus network connection has the option of and ENTER keys in sequence. The list below shows
RS232 or RS485 connection for port 2 communica- the displays for the values that may be modified:
tions. Modbus network is wired to either TB2 or TB3
as follows:
• RS-485: connect to TB2 - Network (-1) to TB2
(-1); Network (+1) to TB2 (+1)

P2 PROTOCOL
DE MODIFIER ADDRESS
XXXXXXXXXX
XXXXX

P2 MANUAL MAC
DE MODIFIER OFFSET
ADDRESS XXX
XX

P2 BAUD RATE
P1 PROTOCOL
XXXXX
XXXXXX

P2 PARITY
P1 MANUAL MAC
XXXXX
ADDRESS XXX

P2 STOP BITS
P1 BAUD RATE
X
XXXXX

P2 HW SELECT BIT
P1 PARITY
XXXXX
XXXXX

P1 STOP BITS REAL TIME ERROR ##

X RESET 1 = YES, 0 = NO 0
Note: See Table 34 on page 179 for error descriptions 10

JOHNSON CONTROLS 177

 FORM 150.72-NM2 (811)
SECTION 10 – MAINTENANCE
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011

035-02550-xxx I/O Board

Figure 34 - MICRO PANEL CONNECTIONS

The table below shows the minimum, maximum, and default values.

Table 32 - MINIMUM, MAXIMUM AND DEFAULT VALUES

DESCRIPTION MINIMUM MAXIMUM DEFAULT
DE MODIFIER ADDRESS -1 41943 -1
DE MODIFIER OFFSET -1 99 -1
P1 BAUD RATE 1200 76800 4800
1200, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 76800, AUTO SELECTABLE
P2 BAUD RATE 1200 57600 1200
1200, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600 SELECTABLE
P1, P2 MANUAL Mac AD-
-1 127 -1
DRESS
P1, P2 PARITY NONE IGNORE NONE
NONE, EVEN, ODD, IGNORE SELECTABLE
P1 PROTOCOL BACNET API BACNET
BACNET, API SELECTABLE
P2 PROTOCOL TERMINAL MODBUS CLIENT API
TERMINAL, MODBUS IO, MODBUS SERVER, API, MODBUS CLIENT SELECTABLE
P1, P2 STOP BITS 1 2 1
RESET REAL TIME ERROR NO YES NO

178 JOHNSON CONTROLS

FORM 150.72-NM2 (811)
SECTION 10 – MAINTENANCE
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011

The table below shows set-up requirements for each communication protocol.
Table 33 - VALUES REQUIRED FOR BAS COMMUNICATION
PROTOCOL
SETTING DESCRIPTION
BACNET MS/TP MODBUS RTU5 YORKTALK 2
DE MODIFIER ADDRESS 0 to 41943(3) 1 -1
DE MODIFIER OFFSET 0 to 99(4) 0 N/A
P1 PROTOCOL BACNET N/A N/A
P1 MANUAL MAC ADDRESS 0-127(1) N/A N/A
P1 BAUD RATE 9600 To 76800 or Auto Selectable(1) N/A N/A
P1 PARITY NONE N/A N/A
P1 STOP BITS 1 N/A N/A
P2 PROTOCOL N/A MODBUS SVR N/A
P2 MANUAL MAC ADDRESS N/A 0-127(1) N/A
P2 BAUD RATE N/A 19,200(2) N/A
P2 PARITY N/A NONE(2) N/A
P2 STOP BITS N/A 1 N/A
P2 HW SELECT BIT N/A RS-485 or RS-232(1) N/A
RESET REAL TIME ERROR N/A N/A N/A
P1 HW SELECT BIT N/A N/A N/A
CHILLER ID N/A N/A 0
1
As required by network
2
Or other as required by network
3
Number is multiplied by 100, set as required by network
4
Number is added to de modifier address, set as required by network
5
Unit operating software version C.Mmc.13.03 or later required for Modbus Protocol

REBOOT REQUIRED (CYCLE POWER) The table below shows the real time error numbers that
AFTER SETTINGS ARE CHANGED. may be encountered during communication setup and
a description of each.

Table 34 - REAL TIME ERROR NUMBERS

ERROR NUMBER (##) DESCRIPTION
0 ALL OK
1 DATUM TYPE OK TEST FAILED
2 ENGLISH TEXT TOO LONG
3 FLOATING POINT EXCEPTION
4 GET PACKET FAILED
5 GET TYPE FAILED
6 INVALID UNIT CONVERSION
7 INVALID HARDWARE SELECTION
10
8 REAL TIME FAULT
9 SPANISH TEXT TOO LONG
10 THREAD EXITED
11 THREAD FAILED
12 THREAD STALLED
13 IO BOARD RESET
14 BRAM INVALID
15 BACNET SETUP FAILED

JOHNSON CONTROLS 179

 FORM 150.72-NM2 (811)
SECTION 10 – MAINTENANCE
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011

BACnet and Modbus Communications Communications Data Map Notes

Chiller data that can be read and modified using spe- (See Table 35)
cific BACnet or Modbus Register Addresses; and the
data associated with the addresses, is outlined in the 4. IPU II based units are configured for Native BAC-
following description: net MS/TP and Modbus RTU communications.
Microgateway or E-Link not required for these
Analog Write Points two communication protocols.
This data can be read and modified using a BACnet 5. BACnet Object Types:
or Modbus network connection. The Modbus Register
0 = Analog In 5 = Binary Value
Address for these points is 1025 + AV #.
1 = Analog Out 8 = Device
Binary Write Points
2 = Analog Value 15 = Alarm Notifica-
This data can be read and modified using a BACnet tion (0 through 127
or Modbus network connection. The Modbus Register 3 = Binary In
are reserved ASHRAE
Address for these points is 1537 + BV #. 4 = Binary Output Objects).
Analog Read Only Points 6.
This data can be read using a BACnet or Modbus net- WC= Inches of water Pa = Pascals
work connection and can NOT be modified using this column
connection. The Modbus Register Address for these kPa = Kilopascals
points is 513 + AI #. CFM = Cubic Feet per
PPM = Part per Mil-
Minute
lion
Binary Monitor Only Points
FPM = Feet per Minute
This data can be read using a BACnet or Modbus net- kJ/kg = Kilojoules per
work connection and can NOT be modified using this PSI = Lbs per square Kilogram.
connection. The Modbus Register Address for these inch
points is 1281 + BI #. 7. Water Cooled Scroll units use the same firmware
as Air Cooled Scroll units, ignoring Fan Control.

Refer to Table 35 on page 181 for complete list of

BACnet and Modbus registers.

The latest data map information is listed

on the Johnson Controls Equipment In-
tegration website.

180 JOHNSON CONTROLS

 2/25/2009

YCAL/YCUL/YCWL/YLAA IPU II Native Modbus and BACnet MS/TP Data Maps Board: 031-02630-xxx w/ 031-02550
ITEM Version Date York PN Check Sum Comments
1 C.MMC.13.00 29-Nov-06 031-02755-001 Standard with Board: 031-02630-xxx w/ 031-02550
2 C.MMC.15.00 29-Nov-06 031-02755-002 Basildon with Board: 031-02630-xxx w/ 031-02550
3 C.MMC.14.00 29-Nov-06 031-02755-003 MMHP with Board: 031-02630-xxx w/ 031-02550
4 C.MMC.16.00 29-Nov-06 031-02755-004 Basildon MMHP with Board: 031-02630-xxx w/ 031-02550
5 C.MMC.13.02 17-Oct-08 031-02755-001 Standard Micro Board 031-02550-xxx . Fix native Modbus communications. Fix Café Metric functionality (SCR-766)
6 C.MMC.14.02 17-Oct-08 031-02755-003 MMHP with Board: 031-02630-xxx w/ 031-02550Fix native Modbus communications. Fix Café Metric functionality (SCR-766)
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011

JOHNSON CONTROLS
7 C.MMC.16.02 17-Oct-08 031-02755-004 Basildon MMHP with Board: 031-02630-xxx w/ 031-02550 Fix native Modbus communications. Fix Café Metric functionality (SCR-766)
FORM 150.72-NM2 (811)

8
9
10

BACnet Point List Code

MODBUS MODBUS Data READ
ITEM REF BACnet NAME Object/Inst ENG UNITS POINT DESCRIPTION S=Standard; O = Optional; N = Not Available
ADDRESS Type Supported WRITE
NUM ance 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
1 SEE NOTE 5 SEE NOTE 1
3 ANALOG WRITE POINTS
4 REM_SETP AV_1 1026 03,06,16 F° R/W Setpoint Cooling Setpoint(HP Only), 99 = Auto; (40°F - 70°F)
5 SP_REM_SP_S1 AV_2 1027 03,06,16 PSIG R/W Sys 1 Setpoint (Suction Pressure Control units only)
6 LOAD_LIMIT AV_3 1028 03,06,16 index R/W Load Limit Stage (0, 1, 2)
7 REM_CR AV_4 1029 03,06,16 F° R/W Cooling Range (DAT Mode Only)
8 SP_REM_SP_S2 AV_5 1030 03,06,16 PSIG R/W Sys 2 Setpoint (Suction Pressure Control)
9 REM_SP_HEAT AV_6 1031 03,06,16 F° R/W Heating Setpoint (HP Only), 999 = Auto (95°F - 122°F)
10 HP_MODE AV_7 1032 03,06,16 index R/W Mode (HP Only) (0=Panel, 1=Cooling, 2=Heating)
11
12 BINARY WRITE POINTS
13 START_STOP BV_1 1538 01,03,05,15,06, 0, 1 R/W Stop Start Command
16
01,03,05,15,06,
14 SS_SYS1 BV_2 1539 0, 1 R/W Sys 1 Start/Stop ( Suction Pressure (SP) Control Only)
16
01,03,05,15,06,
15 SS_SYS2 BV_3 1540 0, 1 R/W Sys 2 Start/Stop ( Suction Pressure (SP) Control Only)
16 ANALOG READ ONLY POINTS
17 LCHLT AI_1 514 03,04 F° R Leaving Chilled Liquid Temp
18 RCHLT AI_2 515 03,04 F° R Return Chilled Liquid Temp
19 DAT AI_3 516 03,04 F° R Condensing Unit Models Only
Table 35 - BACNET AND MODBUS COMMUNICATIONS DATA MAP

20 S1_SUCT_TEMP AI_4 517 03,04 F° R Electronic Expansion Valve Models Only

21 OAT AI_5 518 03,04 F° R Ambient Air Temperature
22 S1_SUCT_SHEAT AI_6 519 03,04 F° R Sys 1 Suction Superheat ( EEV Models Only)
23 S1_RUN_TIME AI_7 520 03,04 seconds R Sys 1 Run Time (seconds)
24 S1_SUCT_PR AI_8 521 03,04 PSIG R Sys 1 Suction Pressure
25 S1_DSCH_PR AI_9 522 03,04 PSIG R Sys 1 Discharge Pressure
27 S1_CIR_TEMP AI_10 523 03,04 F° R Sys 1 Cooler Inlet Refrigerant Temp (R-407c Models Only)
28 S1_DEF_TEMP AI_11 524 03,04 F° R Sys 1 Defrost Temperature (HP Only)
29 S1_EEV_OUT AI_12 525 03,04 F° R System 1 EEV Output % ( EEV Models Only)
30 S1_AR_TIMER AI_13 526 03,04 seconds R Sys 1 Anti-Recycle Timer
31 AC_TIMER AI_14 527 03,04 seconds R Anti-Coincident Timer
32 S2_SUCT_TEMP AI_15 528 03,04 °F R System 2 Suction Temp ( EEVModels Only)
33 S2_RUN_TIME AI_16 529 03,04 seconds R Sys 2 Run Time (seconds)
34 S2_SUCT_PR AI_17 530 03,04 PSIG R Sys 2 Suction Pressure
35 S2_DSCH_PR AI_18 531 03,04 PSIG R Sys 2 Discharge Pressure
36 S2_CIR_TEMP AI_19 532 03,04 F° R Sys 2 Cooler Inlet Refrigerant Temperature(R-407c Only)
37 S2_DEF_TEMP AI_20 533 03,04 F° R Sys 2 Defrost Temperature (HP Only)
38 S2_SUCT_SH AI_21 534 03,04 F° R Sys 2 Suction SuperHeat (EEV Models Only)
39 S2_AR_TIMER AI_22 535 03,04 F° R Sys 2 Anti-Recycle Timer
40 S2_EEV_OUT AI_23 536 03,04 seconds R Sys 2 Suction Superheat ( EEV Models Only)

181
SECTION 10 – MAINTENANCE

Property of JCI/York International. Subject to change without notice

Mid Market Native Bacnet_Modbus Middle Market IPU II NATIVE BACnet _Modbus Data Maps_ Rev A_06.xls Page 1 of 3

10
 2/25/2009

182
BACnet Point List Code
MODBUS MODBUS Data READ
ITEM REF BACnet NAME Object/Inst ENG UNITS POINT DESCRIPTION S=Standard; O = Optional; N = Not Available
ADDRESS Type Supported WRITE
NUM ance 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
41 NUM_COMPS AI_24 537 03,04 count R Number of Compressors
42 S1_OP_CODE AI_25 538 03,04 index R • (See Table
Sys 1 Operational Code (Definition in Table
A & B) 32)
43 S1_FLT_CODE AI_26 539 03,04 index R • (See Table
Sys 1 Fault Code (Definition in Table
A & B) 32)
44 S2_OP_CODE AI_27 540 03,04 index R • (See Table
Sys 2 Operational Code (Definition in A
Table
& B) 32)
45 S2_FLT_CODE AI_28 541 03,04 index R Sys 2 Fault Code (Definition in Table
• (See Table A & B) 32)
46 S1_DBG_CODE AI_29 542 03,04 index R Sys 1 Debug Code
47 S1_FAN_STAGE AI_30 543 03,04 count R Sys 1 Condenser Fan Stage
48 S2_DBG_CODE AI_31 544 03,04 index R Sys 2 Debug Code
49 S2_FAN_STAGE AI_32 545 03,04 count R Sys 2 Condenser Fan Stage
SECTION 10 – MAINTENANCE

Unit Control Mode (0=Leaving Water, 1=Return Water, 2=Discharge Air, 3=Suction Press,
CONTROL_MODE AI_33 546 03,04 count R
50 4=Cooling, 5=Heating)
51 AR_TIME AI_34 547 03,04 seconds R Anti-Recycle Time (Programmed)
52 LCHLT_CUT AI_35 548 03,04 F° R Leaving Chilled Liquid Temp Cutout
53 LOW_AMB_CUT AI_36 549 03,04 F° R Low Ambient Temperature Cutout
54 SUCT_P_CO_HT AI_37 550 03,04 PSIG R Low Suction Pressure Cutout Heating (HP Only)
55 L_SUCT_P_CO AI_38 551 03,04 PSIG R Low Suction Pressure Cutout (Cooling on HP units )
56 H_DSCH_P_CO AI_39 552 03,04 PSIG R High Discharge Pressure Cutout
57 COOL_SETP AI_40 553 03,04 F° R Setpoint
58 SP_SETP_S1 AI_41 554 03,04 F° R Setpoint 1 (SP Control)
59 CONTROL_RG AI_42 555 03,04 F° R Cooling Range
60 SP_CTL_RG_S1 AI_43 556 03,04 F° R Cooling Range 1 (SP Control)
61 SP_SETP_S2 AI_44 557 03,04 F° R Setpoint 2 (SP Control)
62 HEAT_SETP AI_45 558 03,04 F° R Heating Setpoint (HP Only)
63 SP_CTL_RG_S2 AI_46 559 03,04 F° R Cooling Range 2 (SP Control)
64 HEAT_RANGE AI_47 560 03,04 F° R Heating Range (HP Only)
65 S1_DSCH_TEMP AI_48 561 03,04 F° R Sys 1 Discharge Temperature (EEV Only)
66 S1_DSCH_SHEAT AI_49 562 03,04 F° R Sys 1 Discharge Superheat (EEV Only)
67 S2_DSCH_TEMP AI_50 563 03,04 F° R Sys 2 Discharge Temperature (EEV Only)
68 S2_DSCH_SH AI_51 564 03,04 F° R Sys 2 Discharge Superheat (EEV Only)
69 LEAVING_HOT AI_52 565 03,04 F° R Leaving Liquid Hot Temp (R-410a)
70 RETURN_HOT AI_53 566 03,04 F° R Return Liquid Hot Temp (R-410a)
71
72
74 BINARY MONITOR ONLY POINTS
75 S1_ALARM BI_1 1282 01,02,03 0, 1 R Sys 1 Alarm
76 S2_ALARM BI_2 1283 01,02,03 0, 1 R Sys 2 Alarm
TABLE 35 - BACNET AND MODBUS COMMUNICATIONS DATA MAP (CONT’D)

77 EVAP_HTR BI_3 1284 01,02,03 0, 1 R Evaporator Heater Status

78 EVAP_PUMP BI_4 1285 01,02,03 0, 1 R Evaporator Pump Status
79 S1_C1_RUN BI_5 1286 01,02,03 0, 1 R Sys 1 Comp 1 Run
80 S2_C1_RUN BI_6 1287 01,02,03 0, 1 R Sys 2 Comp 1 Run
81 S1_LLSV BI_7 1288 01,02,03 0, 1 R Sys 1 Liquid Line Solenoid Valve
82 S1_MODE_SV BI_8 1289 01,02,03 0, 1 R Sys 1 Mode Solenoid Valve (HP Only)
83 S1_HGBV BI_9 1290 01,02,03 0, 1 R Sys 1 Hot Gas Bypass Valve
84 S1_BHS BI_10 1291 01,02,03 0, 1 R Bivalent Heat Source (HP Only)
85 S1_C2_RUN BI_11 1292 01,02,03 0, 1 R Sys 1 Comp 2 Run
86 S2_C2_RUN BI_12 1293 01,02,03 0, 1 R Sys 2 Comp 2 Run
87 S2_LLSV BI_13 1294 01,02,03 0, 1 R Sys 2 Liquid Line Solenoid Valve
88 S2_MODE_SV BI_14 1295 01,02,03 0, 1 R Sys 2 Mode Solenoid Valve (HP Only)
89 LEAD_SYS BI_15 1296 01,02,03 0, 1 R Lead System (0 = Sys 1, 1 = Sys 2)
90 S1_C3_RUN BI_16 1297 01,02,03 0, 1 R Sys 1 Comp 3 Run
91 S2_C3_RUN BI_17 1298 01,02,03 0, 1 R Sys 2 Comp 3 Run
92 CH_LIQ_TYPE BI_18 1299 01,02,03 0, 1 R Chilled Liquid Type (0=Water, 1=Glycol)
93 AMB_MODE BI_19 1300 01,02,03 0, 1 R Ambient Control Mode (0=Std Amb, 1=Low Amb)
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011
FORM 150.72-NM2 (811)

JOHNSON CONTROLS
Property of JCI/York International. Subject to change without notice
Mid Market Native Bacnet_Modbus Middle Market IPU II NATIVE BACnet _Modbus Data Maps_ Rev A_06.xls Page 2 of 3
 2/25/2009

BACnet Point List Code

MODBUS MODBUS Data READ
ITEM REF BACnet NAME Object/Inst ENG UNITS POINT DESCRIPTION S=Standard; O = Optional; N = Not Available
ADDRESS Type Supported WRITE
NUM ance 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
94 CNTL_MODE BI_20 1301 01,02,03 0, 1 R Local/Remote Control Mode (0=Local, 1=Remote)
95 DATA_UNIT BI_21 1302 01,02,03 0, 1 R Units (0=Imperial, 1=SI)
96 AUTO_LL BI_22 1303 01,02,03 0, 1 R Lead/Lag Control Mode (0=Manual, 1=Auto)

TABLE A TABLE B
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011

JOHNSON CONTROLS
Code Operational Codes Code Fault Codes
FORM 150.72-NM2 (811)

0 No Abnormal Condition 0 No Fault

1 Unit Switch Off 1 VAC Under Voltage
2 System Switch Off 2 Low Ambient Temperature
3 Lock-Out 3 High Ambient Temperature
4 Unit Fault 4 Low Leaving Chilled Liquid Temp
5 System Fault 5 High Discharge Pressure
6 Remote Shutdown 6 High Differential Oil Pressure
7 Daily Schedule Shutdown 7 Low Suction Pressure
8 No Run Permissive 8 High Motor Current `
9 No Cool Load 9 LLSV Not On
10 Anti-Coincidence Timer Active 10 Low Battery Warning
11 Anti-Recycle Timer Active 11 High Oil Temperature
12 Manual Override 12 High Discharge Temperature
13 Suction Limiting 13 Improper Phase Rotation
14 Discharge Limiting 14 Low Motor Current / MP / HPCO
15 15 Motor Current Unbalanced
16 Load Limiting 16 Low Differential Oil Pressure
17 Compressor(s) Running 17 Ground Fault
18 18 MP/HPCO Fault
19 19 Low Evaporator Temperature
20 20 Incorrect Refrigerant Programmed
21 21 Power Failure, Manual Reset Required
22 22 Unit Motor Current
23 23 Low Superheat
24 24 Sensor Fault
25 25
26 26 MP/HPCO Inhibit
27 27
28 28
29 29
30 30
TABLE 35 - BACNET AND MODBUS COMMUNICATIONS DATA MAP (CONT’D)

NOTE: Note that these tables of FAULT and OPERATIONAL Codes are for all DX products.

NOTES
1 The IPU II based YCAL /YCUL Units are configured for Native BACnet MS/TP and Modbus RTU communications. The Microgateway product is not required for these 2 interfaces
2
3 BACnet Object Types: 0= Analog In, 1 = Analog Out, 2= Analog Value, 3= Binary In, 4 = Binary Output, 5= Binary Value, 8= Device, 15 = Alarm Notification ( 0 -127 are reserved ASHRAE Objects)
4 WC= Inches of water column; CFM = Cubic Feer per Minute; FPM = Feet per Minute: PSI = Lbs per square inch; Pa = Pascals; kPa = Kilopascals; PPM = Part Per Million; kJ/kg = Kilojoules per Kilogram
5 See the applicable Middle Market Chiller Operations Manual for more details
6 The YCWL uses the same firmware as a YCAL , it just ignores Fan Control
7
8
9
10

183
SECTION 10 – MAINTENANCE

Continued on next page

Property of JCI/York International. Subject to change without notice
Mid Market Native Bacnet_Modbus Middle Market IPU II NATIVE BACnet _Modbus Data Maps_ Rev A_06.xls Page 3 of 3

10
 FORM 150.72-NM2 (811)
SECTION 10 – MAINTENANCE
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011

Yorktalk 2 Communications Transmitted Data

Received Data (Control Data) After receiving a valid transmission from the Micro-
Gateway or E-Link, the unit will transmit either op-
The unit receives eight data values from the MicroGate-
erational data or history buffer data depending on the
way or E-Link. The first four are analog values and the
“History Buffer Request” on ENG PAGE 10. Data
last four are digital values. These eight data values are
must be transmitted for every page under feature 54. If
used as control parameters when in REMOTE mode.
there is no value to be sent to a particular page, a zero
When the unit is in LOCAL mode, these eight values
will be sent. Table 36 on page 185 shows the data
are ignored. If the unit receives no valid YorkTalk 2
values and page listings for this unit.
transmission for 5 minutes it will revert back to all lo-
cal control values. Table 36 on page 185 lists the con-
trol parameters. These values are found under feature
54 in the MicroGateway or E-Link. The latest point map information is
listed on the Johnson Controls Equip-
ment Integration website http://
my.johnsoncontrols.com/portal/myportal/
cg/prod/na/chiller_in

184 JOHNSON CONTROLS

 YCAL/YCWL/YLAA/YLUA/YCRL Middle Market w/ 2050, 2550 York Talk 2 ELINK Micro Board: 031-02050/02550
Item Ref. Version Date YORK P N Checksum Baud COMMENTS
1 C.MMC.03.02 031-02049-001 944D 4800 YCAL Micro Board 031-02050-xxx
2 C.MMC.03.01 031-02049-001 964B 4800 YCAL Micro Board 031-02050-xxx
3 C.MMC.03.00 031-02049-001 2226 4800 YCAL Micro Board 031-02050-xxx
4 C.MMC.13.xx flash xxxx 4800 YCAL Micro Board 031-02550-xxx, IPU 2 board.
5 C.MMC.13.xx flash xxxx 4800 YCWL ( water cooled version) Micro Board 031-02550-xxx, IPU 2 board.
6 C.MMC.13.02 flash xxxx 4800 Micro Board 031-02550-xxx . Fix native Modbus communications (SCR . Fix Café Metric functionality (SCR-766)
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011

JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.72-NM2 (811)

8
9
10
Use ASCII page column for interfaces utilizing an ASCII XL Translator or MicroGateway to communicate to a chiller LINC

ENG ASCII York Talk York Talk N2 ENG

LON Profile LON SNVT
PAGE PAGE Point Character Address POINT LIST CODE: S = STANDARD O = OPTIONAL N = NOT AVAILABLE PAGE
Name Type
REF REF Type Position POINT LIST DESCRIPTION 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 REF
P03 P01 A. Control nviYTS01p003 SNVT_count_f (51) ADF 1 Setpoint S S S S S P03
P04 P02 A. Control nviYTS01p004 SNVT_count_f (51) ADF 2 Load Limit Stage (0, 1, 2) S S S S S P04
P05 P03 A. Control nviYTS01p005 SNVT_count_f (51) ADF 3 Heating Setpoint (HP and YCWL HP) O O O O O P05
P06 P04 A. Control nviYTS01p006 SNVT_count_f (51) ADF 4 Mode (HP and YCWL HP only) (0=Panel, 1= Cooling, 2 = Heating) O O O O O P06
P07 P05 D. Control nviYTS01p007 SNVT_sw itch (95) BD 1 Start/Stop Command S S S S S P07
P08 P06 D. Control nviYTS01p008 SNVT_sw itch (95) BD 2 P08
P09 P07 D. Control nviYTS01p009 SNVT_sw itch (95) BD 3 P09
P10 P08 D. Control nviYTS01p010 SNVT_sw itch (95) BD 4 History Buffer Request S S S S S P10
P11 P09 A. Monitor nvoYTS01p011 SNVT_count_f (51) 8 - 11 ADF 5 Leaving Chilled Liquid Temp S S S S S P11
P12 P10 A. Monitor nvoYTS01p012 SNVT_count_f (51) 12 - 15 ADF 6 Return Chilled Liquid Temp S S S S S P12
P13 P11 A. Monitor nvoYTS01p013 SNVT_count_f (51) 16 - 19 ADF 7 Leaving Hot Liquid Temp (R-410a) Heat Mode Only O O O O O P13
P14 P12 A. Monitor nvoYTS01p014 SNVT_count_f (51) 20 - 23 ADF 8 Discharge Air Temp ( Cond Unit) Return Hot Liquid Temp (410a- Heat Mode)
S S S S S P14
Table 36 - YORKTALK 2 COMMUNICATIONS DATA MAP

P15 P13 A. Monitor nvoYTS01p015 SNVT_count_f (51) 24 - 27 ADF 9 Leaving Liquid Temp Hot (R-410a) O O O O O P15
P16 P14 A. Monitor nvoYTS01p016 SNVT_count_f (51) 28 - 31 ADF 10 Ambient Air Temperature S S S S S P16
P17 P15 A. Monitor nvoYTS01p017 SNVT_count_f (51) 32 - 35 ADF 11 Sys 1 Suction Superheat ( EEV only) O O O O O P17
P18 P16 A. Monitor nvoYTS01p018 SNVT_count_f (51) 36 - 39 ADF 12 Sys 1 Run Time (seconds) S S S S S P18
P19 P17 A. Monitor nvoYTS01p019 SNVT_count_f (51) 40 - 43 ADF 13 Sys 1 Suction Pressure S S S S S P19
P20 P18 A. Monitor nvoYTS01p020 SNVT_count_f (51) 44 - 47 ADF 14 Sys 1 Discharge Pressure S S S S S P20
P21 P19 A. Monitor nvoYTS01p021 SNVT_count_f (51) 48 - 51 ADF 15 Sys 1 Cooler Inlet Refrigerant Temperature(R-407c Only) S S S S S P21
P22 P20 A. Monitor nvoYTS01p022 SNVT_count_f (51) 52 - 55 ADF 16 P22
P23 P21 A. Monitor nvoYTS01p023 SNVT_count_f (51) 56 - 59 ADF 17 Sys 1 EEV Output % (EEV only) O O O O O P23
P24 P22 A. Monitor nvoYTS01p024 SNVT_count_f (51) 60 - 63 ADF 18 Sys 1 Anti- Recycle Timer S S S S S P24
P25 P23 A. Monitor nvoYTS01p025 SNVT_count_f (51) 64 - 67 ADF 19 Anti-Coincident Timer S S S S S P25
P26 P24 A. Monitor nvoYTS01p026 SNVT_count_f (51) 68 - 71 ADF 20 Sys Suction Temp ( EEV only) O O O O O P26
P27 P25 A. Monitor nvoYTS01p027 SNVT_count_f (51) 72 - 75 ADF 21 Sys 2 Run Time (seconds) S S S S S P27
P28 P26 A. Monitor nvoYTS01p028 SNVT_count_f (51) 76 - 79 ADF 22 Sys 2 Suction Pressure S S S S S P28
P29 P27 A. Monitor nvoYTS01p029 SNVT_count_f (51) 80 - 83 ADF 23 Sys 2 Discharge Pressure S S S S S P29
P30 P28 A. Monitor nvoYTS01p030 SNVT_count_f (51) 84 - 87 ADF 24 Sys 2 Cooler Inlet Refrigerant Temperature (R-407c systems Only) S S S S S P30
P31 P29 A. Monitor nvoYTS01p031 SNVT_count_f (51) 88 - 91 ADF 25 Sys 2 Defrost Temperature ( HP only) O O O O O P31
P32 P30 A. Monitor nvoYTS01p032 SNVT_count_f (51) 92 - 95 ADF 26 Sys 2 Suction Superheat (EEV only) O O O O O P32
P33 P31 A. Monitor nvoYTS01p033 SNVT_count_f (51) 96 - 99 ADF 27 Sys 2 Anti-Recycle Timer S S S S S P33
P34 P32 A. Monitor nvoYTS01p034 SNVT_count_f (51) 100 - 103 ADF 28 Sys 2 EEV Output % (EEV only) O O O O O P34
P35 P33 A. Monitor nvoYTS01p035 SNVT_count_f (51) 104 - 107 ADF 29 Number of Compressors S S S S S P35
P36 P34 D. Monitor nvoYTS01p036 SNVT_sw itch (95) 108 BD 5 Sys 1 Alarm S S S S S P36
P37 P35 D. Monitor nvoYTS01p037 SNVT_sw itch (95) 109 BD 6 Sys 2 Alarm S S S S S P37
P38 P36 D. Monitor nvoYTS01p038 SNVT_sw itch (95) 110 BD 7 Evaporator Heater Status S S S S S P38
P39 P37 D. Monitor nvoYTS01p039 SNVT_sw itch (95) 111 BD 8 Evaporator Pump Status S S S S S P39
P40 P38 D. Monitor nvoYTS01p040 SNVT_sw itch (95) 112 BD 9 Sys 1 Compressor 1 Run S S S S S P40
P41 P39 D. Monitor nvoYTS01p041 SNVT_sw itch (95) 113 BD 10 Sys 2 Compressor 1 Run S S S S S P41
P42 P40 D. Monitor nvoYTS01p042 SNVT_sw itch (95) 114 BD 11 Sys 1 Liquid Line Solenoid Valve S S S S S P42

185
SECTION 10 – MAINTENANCE

10
 ENG ASCII York Talk York Talk N2 ENG
LON Profile LON SNVT

186
PAGE PAGE Point Character Address POINT LIST CODE: S = STANDARD O = OPTIONAL N = NOT AVAILABLE PAGE
Name Type
REF REF Type Position POINT LIST DESCRIPTION 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 REF
P43 P41 D. Monitor nvoYTS01p043 SNVT_sw itch (95) 115 BD 12 Sys 1 Hot Gas Bypass Valve S S S S S P43
P44 P42 D. Monitor nvoYTS01p044 SNVT_sw itch (95) 116 BD 13 Sys 1 Compressor 2 Run S S S S S P44
P45 P43 D. Monitor nvoYTS01p045 SNVT_sw itch (95) 117 BD 14 Sys 2 Compressor 2 Run S S S S S P45
P46 P44 D. Monitor nvoYTS01p046 SNVT_sw itch (95) 118 BD 15 Sys 2 Liquid Line Solenoid Valve S S S S S P46
P47 P45 D. Monitor nvoYTS01p047 SNVT_sw itch (95) 119 BD 16 Lead System (0 = Sys 1, 1 = Sys 2) S S S S S P47
P48 P46 D. Monitor nvoYTS01p048 SNVT_sw itch (95) 120 BD 17 Sys 1 Compressor 3 Run S S S S S P48
P49 P47 D. Monitor nvoYTS01p049 SNVT_sw itch (95) 121 BD 18 Sys 2 Compressor 3 Run S S S S S P49
P50 P48 D. Monitor nvoYTS01p050 SNVT_sw itch (95) 122 BD 19 Chilled Liquid Type (0=Water, 1=Glycol) S S S S S P50
SECTION 10 – MAINTENANCE

P51 P49 D. Monitor nvoYTS01p051 SNVT_sw itch (95) 123 BD 20 Ambient Control Mode (0=Std Amb, 1=Low Amb) S S S S N P51
P52 P50 D. Monitor nvoYTS01p052 SNVT_sw itch (95) 124 BD 21 Local/Remote Control Mode (0=Local, 1=Remote) S S S S S P52
P53 P51 D. Monitor nvoYTS01p053 SNVT_sw itch (95) 125 BD 22 Units (0=Imperial, 1=SI) S S S S S P53
P54 P52 D. Monitor nvoYTS01p054 SNVT_sw itch (95) 126 BD 23 Lead/Lag Control Mode (0=Manual, 1=Auto) S S S S S P54
P55 P53 D. Monitor nvoYTS01p055 SNVT_sw itch (95) 127 BD 24 Sys 2 Hot Gas Bypass Valve S S S S S P55
P56 P54 Code Monitor nvoYTS01p056 SNVT_count_f (51) 128 ADI 1 *Sys 1 Operational Code S S S S S P56
P57 P55 Code Monitor nvoYTS01p057 SNVT_count_f (51) 129 ADI 2 *Sys 1 Fault Code S S S S S P57
P58 P56 Code Monitor nvoYTS01p058 SNVT_count_f (51) 130 ADI 3 *Sys 2 Operational Code S S S S S P58
P59 P57 Code Monitor nvoYTS01p059 SNVT_count_f (51) 131 ADI 4 *Sys 2 Fault Code S S S S S P59
P60 P58 Code Monitor nvoYTS01p060 SNVT_count_f (51) 132 ADI 5 S S S S S P60
P61 P59 Code Monitor nvoYTS01p061 SNVT_count_f (51) 133 ADI 6 Sys 1 Condenser Fan Stage S S S S S P61
P62 P60 Code Monitor nvoYTS01p062 SNVT_count_f (51) 134 ADI 7 S S S S S P62
P63 P61 Code Monitor nvoYTS01p063 SNVT_count_f (51) 135 ADI 8 Sys 2 Condenser Fan Stage S S S S S P63
P64 P62 Code Monitor nvoYTS01p064 SNVT_count_f (51) 136 ADI 9 P64
P65 P63 Code Monitor nvoYTS01p065 SNVT_count_f (51) 137 ADI 10 Unit Control Mode (0=Lv Wtr, 1=Ret Wtr, 2=Dis Air, 3=SP, 4=Cool, 5=Heat)
S S S S S P65
P66 P64 A. Monitor nvoYTS01p066 SNVT_count_f (51) 138 - 141 ADF 30 Anti-Recycle Time (Programmed) S S S S S P66
P67 P65 A. Monitor nvoYTS01p067 SNVT_count_f (51) 142 - 145 ADF 31 Leaving Chilled Liquid Temp Cutout S S S S S P67
P68 P66 A. Monitor nvoYTS01p068 SNVT_count_f (51) 146 - 149 ADF 32 Low Ambient Temperature Cutout S S S S S P68
P69 P67 A. Monitor nvoYTS01p069 SNVT_count_f (51) 150 - 153 ADF 33 Low Suction Pressure Cutout (Heating HP Only) S S S S S P69
P70 P68 A. Monitor nvoYTS01p070 SNVT_count_f (51) 154 - 157 ADF 34 Low Suction Pressure Cutout (Cooling HP only) S S S S S P70
P71 P69 A. Monitor nvoYTS01p071 SNVT_count_f (51) 158 - 161 ADF 35 High Discharge Pressure Cutout S S S S S P71
TABLE 36 - YORKTALK 2 COMMUNICATIONS DATA MAP (CONT’D)

P72 P70 A. Monitor nvoYTS01p072 SNVT_count_f (51) 162 - 165 ADF 36 Remote Setpoint S S S S S P72
P73 P71 A. Monitor nvoYTS01p073 SNVT_count_f (51) 166 - 169 ADF 37 Cooling Range S S S S S P73
P74 P72 A. Monitor nvoYTS01p074 SNVT_count_f (51) 170 - 173 ADF 38 Remote Setpnt 2 ( SP Control), Remote Heatng Setpnt ( HP and YCWLOHP O only)
O O O P74
P75 P73 A. Monitor nvoYTS01p075 SNVT_count_f (51) 174 - 177 ADF 39 Cool Range Setpoint 2 (SP Control), Heat Range (HP and YCWL HP only)
O O O O O P75
P76 P74 A. Monitor nvoYTS01p076 SNVT_count_f (51) 178 - 181 ADF 40 Sys 1 Discharge Temp (EEV only) O O O O O P76
P77 P75 A. Monitor nvoYTS01p077 SNVT_count_f (51) 182 - 185 ADF 41 Sys 1 Discharge Superheat (EEV only) O O O O O P77
P78 P76 A. Monitor nvoYTS01p078 SNVT_count_f (51) 186 - 189 ADF 42 Sys 2 Discharge Temp (EEV only) O O O O O P78
P79 P77 A. Monitor nvoYTS01p079 SNVT_count_f (51) 190 - 193 ADF 43 Sys 2 Discharge Superheat (EEV only) O O O O O P79
P80 P78 D. Monitor nvoYTS01p080 SNVT_sw itch (95) 194 BD 25 P80
P81 P79 D. Monitor nvoYTS01p081 SNVT_sw itch (95) 195 BD 26 P81
P82 P80 D. Monitor nvoYTS01p082 SNVT_sw itch (95) 196 BD 27 P82
P83 P81 D. Monitor nvoYTS01p083 SNVT_sw itch (95) 197 BD 28 P83
P84 P82 D. Monitor nvoYTS01p084 SNVT_sw itch (95) 198 BD 29 P84
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011
FORM 150.72-NM2 (811)

JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.72-NM2 (811)
SECTION 10 – MAINTENANCE
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011

TABLE 36 - YORKTALK 2 COMMUNICATIONS DATA MAP (CONT’D)

ENG ASCII Operational Code ENG ASCII Fault Code

PAGE PAGE PAGE PAGE
P56 P54 C_OPER.CODE P57 P55 C_FAULT.CODE
0 0 No Abnormal Condition 0 0 No Fault Code
1 1 Unit Switch Off 1 1 VAC Undervoltage
2 2 System Switch Off 2 2 Low Ambient Temperature
3 3 Lock-Out 3 3 High Ambient Temperature
4 4 Unit Fault 4 4 Low Leaving Chilled Liquid Temperature
5 5 System Fault 5 5 High Discharge Pressure
6 6 Remote Shutdown 6 6 High Differential Oil Pressure
7 7 Daily Schedule Shutdown 7 7 Low Suction Pressure
8 8 No Run Permissive 8 8 High Motor Current
9 9 No Cool Load 9 9 LLSV Not On
10 10 Anti-Coincidence Timer Active 10 10 Low Battery Warning
11 11 Anti-Recycle Timer Active 11 11 High Oil Temperature
12 12 Manual Override 12 12 High Discharge Temperature
13 13 Suction Limiting 13 13 Improper Phase Rotation
14 14 Discharge Limiting 14 14 Low Motor Current / MP / HPCO
15 15 Current Limiting 15 15 Motor Current Inpomabalanced
16 16 Load Limiting 16 16 Low Differntail Oil Pressure
17 17 Compressor(s) Running 17 17 Grpound Fault
18 18 Heat Pump Load Limiting ( HP Only) 18 18 MP / HPCO Fault
19 19 Low Evaporator Temperature
20 20 Incorrect Refrigernat Programmed
21 21 Power Failure, Manual Reset Required
22 22 Unit Motor Current
23 23 Low Superheat
24 24 Sensor Fault
25 25 Discharge Inhibit
26 26 MP/HPCO Inhibit
27 27 Pump Trip
28 28 Pump Fail Make Flow
29 29 High Ambient Temperature

* Note
Shaded Codes may not be available on
all models. Please check the Fault and
Operational codes against the codes
published in your operators manual or
confirm Code is available through the
display of your unit. If the Code appears in
the display, you will recieve that value
through the BAS.

10

JOHNSON CONTROLS 187

 FORM 150.72-NM2 (811)
SECTION 10 – MAINTENANCE
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011

TEMPERATURE
TEMPERATURE CONVERSION
CONVERSION CHART
CHART
Temperature Conversion Chart - Temperature Conversion Chart -
Actual Temperatures Differential Temperatures
°F = °C °C = °F °F = °C °C = °F
0 -17.8 -18 -0.4 0 0 0 0
4 -15.6 -16 3.2 4 2.2 2 3.6
8 -13.3 -14 6.8 8 4.4 4 7.2
12 -11.1 -12 10.4 12 6.7 6 10.8
16 -8.9 -10 14 16 8.9 8 14.4
20 -6.7 -8 17.6 20 11.1 10 18
24 -4.4 -6 21.2 24 13.3 12 21.6
28 -2.2 -4 24.8 28 15.6 14 25.2
32 0.0 -2 28.4 32 17.8 16 28.8
36 2.2 0 32 36 20 18 32.4
40 4.4 2 35.6 40 22.2 20 36
44 6.7 4 39.2 44 24.4 22 39.6
48 8.9 6 42.8 48 26.7 24 43.2
52 11.1 8 46.4 52 28.9 26 46.8
56 13.3 10 50 56 31.1 28 50.4
60 15.6 12 53.6 60 33.3 30 54
64 17.8 14 57.2
68 20.0 16 60.8
72 22.2 18 64.4 Pressure Conversion Chart -
76 24.4 20 68 Gauge or Differential
80 26.7 22 71.6
84 28.9 24 75.2 PSI = BAR BAR = PSI
88 31.1 26 78.8 20 1.38 1.5 21.8
92 33.3 28 82.4 30 2.07 2 29
96 35.6 30 86 40 2.76 2.5 36.3
100 37.8 32 89.6 50 3.45 3 43.5
104 40.0 34 93.2 60 4.14 3.5 50.8
108 42.2 36 96.8 70 4.83 4 58
112 44.4 38 100.4 80 5.52 4.5 65.3
116 46.7 40 104 90 6.21 5 72.5
120 48.9 42 107.6 100 6.9 5.5 79.8
124 51.1 44 111.2 110 7.59 6 87
128 53.3 46 114.8 120 8.28 6.5 94.3
132 55.6 48 118.4 130 8.97 7 101.5
136 57.8 50 122 140 9.66 7.5 108.8
140 60.0 52 125.6 150 10.34 8 116
144 62.2 54 129.2 160 11.03 8.5 123.3
148 64.4 56 132.8 170 11.72 9 130.5
152 66.7 58 136.4 180 12.41 9.5 137.8
156 68.9 60 140 190 13.1 10 145
160 71.1 62 143.6 200 13.79 10.5 152.3
164 73.3 64 147.2 210 14.48 11 159.5
168 75.6 66 150.8 220 15.17 11.5 166.8
172 77.8 68 154.4 230 15.86 12 174
176 80.0 70 158 240 16.55 12.5 181.3
180 82.2 72 161.6 250 17.24 13 188.5
184 84.4 74 165.2 260 17.93 13.5 195.8
188 86.7 76 168.8 270 18.62 14 203
192 88.9 78 172.4 280 19.31 14.5 210.3
196 91.1 80 176 290 20 15 217.5
200 93.3 82 179.6 300 20.69 15.5 224.8
204 95.6 84 183.2 310 21.38 16 232
208 97.8 86 186.8 320 22.07 16.5 239.3
212 100.0 88 190.4 330 22.76 17 246.5
216 102.2 90 194 340 23.45 17.5 253.8
220 104.4 92 197.6 350 24.14 18 261
224 106.7 94 201.2 360 24.83 18.5 268.3
228 108.9 96 204.8 370 25.52 19 275.5
232 111.1 98 208.4 380 26.21 19.5 282.8
236 113.3 100 212 390 26.9 20 290
240 115.6 102 215.6 400 27.59 20.5 297.3
244 117.8 104 219.2

188 JOHNSON CONTROLS

FORM 150.72-NM2 (811)
SECTION 10 – MAINTENANCE
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011

R-410A PRESSURE TEMPERATURE CHART

PSIG TEMP ˚F PSIG TEMP ˚F
0 -60 78 20
2 -58 80 21
4 -54 85 24
6 -50 90 26
8 -46 95 29
10 -42 100 32
12 -39 105 34
14 -36 110 36
16 -33 115 39
18 -30 120 41
20 -28 125 43
22 -26 130 45
24 -24 135 47
26 -20 140 49
28 -18 145 51
30 -16 150 53
32 -14 160 57
34 -12 170 60
36 -10 180 64
38 -8 190 67
40 -6 200 70
42 -4 210 73
44 -3 220 76
46 -2 225 78
48 0 235 80
50 1 245 83
52 3 255 85
54 4 265 88
56 6 275 90
58 7 285 92
60 8 295 95
62 10 305 97
64 11 325 101
66 13 355 108
68 14 375 112
70 15 405 118
72 16 500 134 10
74 17 600 149
76 19 700 159

JOHNSON CONTROLS 189

 FORM 150.72-NM2 (811)
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011

NOTES

190 JOHNSON CONTROLS

FORM 150.72-NM2 (811)
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011

The following factors can be used to convert from

English to the most common SI Metric values.

Table 37 - SI METRIC CONVERSION

MEASUREMENT MULTIPLY ENGLISH UNIT BY FACTOR TO OBTAIN METRIC UNIT

Capacity Tons Refrigerant Effect (ton) 3.516 Kilowatts (kW)

Power Horsepower 0.7457 Kilowatts (kW)

Flow Rate Gallons / Minute (gpm) 0.0631 Liters / Second (l/s)

Feet (ft) 304.8 Meters (m)

Length
Inches (in) 25.4 Millimeters (mm)

Weight Pounds (lbs) 0.4538 Kilograms (kg)

Velocity Feet / Second (fps) 0.3048 Meters / Second (m/s)

Feet of Water (ft) 2.989 Kilopascals (kPa)

Pressure Drop
Pounds / Square Inch (psi) 6.895 Kilopascals (kPa)

TEMPERATURE
To convert degrees Fahrenheit (°F) to degrees Celsius
(°C), subtract 32° and multiply by 5/9 or 0.5556.
Example: (45.0°F - 32°) x 0.5556 = 27.2°C
To convert a temperature range (i.e., a range of 10°F)
from Fahrenheit to Celsius, multiply by 5/9 or 0.5556.
Example: 10.0°F range x 0.5556 = 5.6 °C range

JOHNSON CONTROLS 191

P.O. Box 1592, York, Pennsylvania USA 17405-1592 Tele. 800-861-1001 Subject to change without notice. Printed in USA
Copyright © by Johnson Controls 2011 www.johnsoncontrols.com ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Form 150.72-NM2 (811)
Issue Date: August 15, 2011
Supersedes 150.72-NM1 (0110) and 150.72-NM2 (309)